Cli 72 PDF

ProxySG Command Line
Interface Reference
ProxySG Command Line Interface Reference
Legal Notice
Broadcom, the pulse logo, Connecting everything, and Symantec are among the trademarks of Broadcom. The term
“Broadcom” refers to Broadcom Inc. and/or its subsidiaries.
Copyright © 2020 Broadcom. All Rights Reserved.
The term “Broadcom” refers to Broadcom Inc. and/or its subsidiaries. For more information, please visit www.broadcom.com.
Broadcom reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products or data herein to improve reliability,
function, or design. Information furnished by Broadcom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, Broadcom does not
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of this information, nor the application or use of any product or circuit
described herein, neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others.
Tuesday, January 21, 2020
2 of 604
About the ProxySG Command Line Interface Reference

To help you configure and manage your Blue Coat ProxySG appliance, Symantec developed a software suite that includes an
easy-to-use graphical interface called the Management Console and a Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI allows you to
perform the superset of configuration and management tasks; the Management Console, a subset.
This document describes each of the commands available in the CLI.
About the Command Line Interface

This document is intended for system administrators and experienced users who are familiar with network configuration.
Symantec assumes that you have a functional network topography, that you and your Symantec Sales representative have
determined the correct number and placement of the appliance, and that the appliance has been installed in an equipment rack
and at least minimally configured as outlined in the Symantec Quick Start Guide that accompanied the device.
Document Conventions
The following table lists the typographical and CLI syntax conventions used in this reference.
Convention Definition
fixed-width font Command line text, Content Policy Language (CPL).
fixed-width font, Command line variable that is to be substituted with a literal name or value pertaining to the appropriate
italics facet of your network system.
fixed-width font, Literal string to be entered as shown.

bold
{ } One of the parameters enclosed within the braces must be supplied.
[ ] Optional parameter or parameters.
| Either the parameter before or after the pipe character can or must be entered.
SSH and Script Considerations

Consider the following when using the CLI during an SSH session or in a script:
n Case sensitivity. CLI command literals and parameters are not case-sensitive.
n Command abbreviations. You can abbreviate CLI commands, provided you supply enough command characters to be
unambiguous. For example:
# configure terminal
3 of 604
The preceding can be shortened to:
# conf t
Standard and Privileged Modes

The ProxySG appliance CLI has three major modes—standard, privileged, and configure privileged. In addition, privileged mode
has several subordinate modes. See the introduction in "Privileged Mode Commands" on page 56 for details about the different
modes.
n Standard mode prompt: >
n Privileged mode prompt: #
n Configure privileged mode prompt: # (config)
Accessing Quick Command Line Help

You can access command line help at any time during a session. The following commands are available in both standard mode
and privileged mode.
To access a comprehensive list of mode-specific commands, type help or ? at the prompt.
The help command displays how to use CLI help. For example:
> help
Help may be requested at any point in a command by typing a question mark '?'.
1. For a list of available commands, enter '?' at the prompt.
2. For a list of arguments applicable to a command, precede the '?' with a space (e.g. 'show ?')
3. For help completing a command, do not precede the '?' with a space (e.g. 'sh?')
The ? command displays the available commands. For example:
> ?
display Display a text based url
enable Turn on privileged commands
exit Exit command line interface
help Information on help
inline Install configurations from console input
ping Send echo messages
ping6 Send IPv6 echo messages
show Show running system information
test Test subsystems
traceroute Trace route to destination
traceroute6 Trace route to IPv6 destination
To access a command-specific parameter list, type the command name, followed by a space, followed by a question mark.
4 of 604
You must be in the correct mode—standard or privileged—to access the appropriate help information. For example, to get
command completion help for pcap:
# pcap ?
filter Setup the current capture filter
info Display current capture information
start Start the capture
stop Stop the capture
transfer Transfer captured data to ftp site
To access the correct spelling and syntax, given a partial command, type the first letter, or more, of the command, followed by
a question mark (no spaces).
You must be in the correct mode—standard or privileged—to access the appropriate help information. For example:
>p?
ping ping6
# p?
# pcap ping ping6 policy
Special Characters in Command Strings

The “?” Character
Command strings including the question mark (“?”) must be quoted. For example, the following command results in an error:
# (config) upgrade-path https://example.com/cgi-bin/download?rid=3399924431
To execute the command correctly, enclose the string in quotes:
# (config) upgrade-path "https://example.com/cgi-bin/download?rid=3399924431"
The “!” Character

A string starting with an exclamation mark (“!”) denotes a comment; as a result, the CLI ignores the string. Consider the
following example, where a password starts with a “!”:
# licensing register-hardware user1 !password
Issuing this command causes the CLI to prompt you to enter a password again.
To prevent this from occurring, do one of the following to enter a password starting with “!”:
Escape the “!” with a backslash character (“\”) such as:
# licensing register-hardware user1 \!password
Press ENTER after specifying the username to display the password prompt. At the prompt, you can type the password
without having to escape it:
5 of 604
# licensing register-hardware user1

Password: !password
6 of 604
Additional SGOS Documentation

In addition to the following, Symantec provides other deployment guides targeted for specific solutions. For these and other
documents, refer to: https://support.symantec.com/us/en/documentation.1145522.2128268.html
Document Overview
SGOS Upgrade/Downgrade Guide Steps for upgrading or downgrading SGOS. Also covers behavior changes and
policy deprecations.
https://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC9794
SGOS Administration Guide Detailed information for configuring and managing the ProxySG appliance.
ProxySG Web Visual Policy Manager How to create and implement policy in the ProxySG appliance's web-based Visual
WebGuide Policy Manager, including layer interactions, object descriptions, and advanced
tasks.
Legacy Visual Policy Manager Reference How to create and implement policy in the ProxySG appliance's legacy Visual Policy
Manager.
Content Policy Language Reference CPL gestures available for writing the policy by which the ProxySG appliance
evaluates web requests.
Required ports, protocols, and services for Basic configurations, and some commonly used options, for ports and protocols.
the ProxySG appliance
https://www.symantec.com/docs/INFO5294
ProxySG Security Best Practices Best-effort security considerations for your ProxySG deployment.
First Steps Deployment Guide How to get a ProxySG up and running in a Secure Web Gateway (SWG)
deployment.
http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC10940
SSL Proxy Deployment Guide Best practices for deploying the SSL proxy. The SSL proxy improves visibility into
SSL traffic, allowing security policies and logging to be applied to encrypted
http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC10325 requests and responses, and can enhance performance by caching encrypted data.
Reverse Proxy WebGuide How to deploy a ProxySG appliance as a front-end for Internet-based users to
access secure application, content, and web servers.
Web Application Firewall Solutions Guide How to configure Symantec WAF solution to protect your web servers, accelerate
web content, and simplify operation.
7 of 604
Document Overview
Secure Web Gateway - Content Analysis Provides a secure and customizable policy model for bypassing content scanning to
Policy Best Practices Improvement improve the user experience where needed or save resources by excluding low-
risk/high-volume traffic. This document identifies weak policy conditions and is
http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC10920 intended to reduce risk by using different sets of policy conditions.
SGOS 7.2.x Documentation Full list of documentation published for SGOS 7.2.x.
SGOS Release Notes Changes, issues, fixes, and limitations pertaining to SGOS releases. Also includes
any related security advisory (SA) fixes.
SGOS Release Notes are available on the
Downloads page. Log in to MySymantec
with your MySymantec credentials to access
the release image and release notes.
8 of 604
Standard Mode Commands

This section describes and provides examples for the ProxySG appliance standard mode CLI commands. Standard mode is
the default mode when you first log in to the CLI, and thus provides the lowest level of access.
Tip: The CLI command mode structure is hierarchical. From privileged mode, you can issue
privileged and standard mode commands. From privileged configure mode, you can issue
standard, privileged, and privileged mode commands.
From standard mode, you can view but not change configuration settings. This mode can be password protected, but it is not
required.
The standard mode prompt is a greater-than sign (>):
Press "enter" three times to activate the serial console.

Enter option: 1
Type "exit" at the main prompt to quit
>
9 of 604
> display
Synopsis
Display the content (such as HTML or Javascript) for the specified fully-qualified URL. This content is displayed one screen at
a time. —More— at the bottom of the terminal screen indicates that there is additional content. Press the spacebar to display the
next batch of content; press Enter to display one additional line of content.
This command is used for general HTTP connectivity testing.
Syntax
> display url
Example
> display https://www.symantec.com
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en">
<head>

<meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0">

<meta http-equiv="X-UA-Compatible" content="IE=edge,chrome=1">
<meta name="keywords">
<meta name="description" content="Symantec provides security products and solutions to protect
small, medium, and enterprise businesses from advanced threats, malware, and other cyber attacks.">
...
10 of 604
> enable
Synopsis
Enter privileged mode. Privileged mode commands enable you to view and change your configuration settings. A password is
always required. This command has no parameters or subcommands.
Syntax
> enable
Example
> enable
Enable Password:******
# conf t
# (config)
Note: conf t is a shortcut to typing configure terminal.
See Also
n "Privileged Mode Commands" on page 56
n "# disable" on page 66
n "# (config) security hashed-password" on page 464
n "# (config) security password" on page 494
n "# (config) security username" on page 532
11 of 604
> exit
Synopsis
Exits the CLI. This command has no parameters or subcommands.
Syntax
> exit
Example
> exit
12 of 604
> help
See "Accessing Quick Command Line Help" on page 4 for details on this command.
13 of 604
> ping
Synopsis
Verify whether an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) host is reachable across a network.
Syntax
> ping {IPv4_address | hostname} [routing_domain_name]
Example
> ping 10.25.36.47
PING 10.25.36.47 (10.25.36.47): 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 10.25.36.47: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.126 ms
--- 10.25.36.47 ping statistics ---
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.096/0.118/0.143/0.017 ms
14 of 604
> ping6
Synopsis
Verify whether an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) host is reachable across a network.
Syntax
> ping {IPv6_address | hostname} [routing_domain_name]
Example
> ping6 fe80::2d0:83ff:fe05:780%0:0
PING6(56=40+8+8 bytes) fe80::2d0:83ff:fe05:780 --> fe80::2d0:83ff:fe05:780%0:0
16 bytes from fe80::2d0:83ff:fe05:780%0:0, icmp_seq=0 hlim=64 time=0.799 ms
--- fe80::2d0:83ff:fe05:780%0:0 ping6 statistics ---
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0.0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/std-dev = 0.761/1.728/3.745/1.084 ms
15 of 604
> show
Synopsis
Displays system information. You must be in privileged mode to show all available commands.
Syntax
> show {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show accelerated-pac
Displays accelerated PAC file information.
"> show access-log" on page 25
Displays the current access log settings.
> show advanced-url
Displays the advanced URL for statistics.
> show appliance-identifier
Displays the identifier of the appliance. The appliance identifier is the same as the value returned in the access log and policy
substitution x-bluecoat-appliance-identifier. Refer to theProxySG Log Fields and CPL Substitutions Reference.
> show appliance-name
Displays the name of the appliance.
> show application-attributes
Displays Application Attributes settings. See "> show application-attributes" on page 27. You must have an Application
Attributes database and a valid subscription in order to use this feature. This command produces the same output as # (config
application-attributes) view.
> show application-classification
Displays Application Classification settings. See "> show application-classification" on page 28. You must have an
Application Classification database and a valid subscription in order to use this feature. This command produces the same
output as # (config application-classification) view.
> show application-protection
Application protection settings. You must have an Application Protection database and a valid subscription in order to use this
feature. This command produces the same output as # (config application-protection) view.
> show arp-table
16 of 604
Displays TCP/IP ARP table information.
> show bandwidth-gain
Displays bandwidth gain status, mode, and the "substitute get for get-if-modified-since," "substitute get for HTTP 1.1
conditional get," and "never refresh before specified object expiry" settings.
"> show bandwidth-management" on page 29
Displays bandwidth management configuration and statistics information.
"> show bridge" on page 30
Displays information about bridging on the system.
> show cachepulse
Displays CachePulse statistics, such as license information, registration status, the download URL for the CachePulse
database, results of the last download, and the last successful download. This command produces the same output as #
(config cachepulse) view.
> show caching
Displays data regarding cache refresh rates and settings and caching policies.
"> show cifs" on page 31
Displays Common Internet File System (CIFS) information
"> show clients" on page 33
Displays ProxyClient and Unified Agent settings.
> show clock
Displays the current ProxySG appliance time setting.
> show cloud-service
Shows Universal Policy configuration.
"> show commands" on page 35
Displays the available CLI commands.
> show content-analysis [statistics]
Displays Content Analysis or Content Analysis statistics information.
> show content-distribution
Displays the average sizes of objects in the cache.
17 of 604
> show content-filter {bluecoat | categories | iwf | local | optenet | proventia | status | youtube}
Displays settings for Symantec Web Filter or the specified third-party content-filtering vendors. Display current content-
filtering status using the status subcommand.
> show copyright
Displays copyright information.
> show cpu
Displays CPU usage.
> show cpu-monitor
Displays the state of the CPU monitor.
"> show diagnostics" on page 37
Displays remote diagnostics information.
"> show disk" on page 38
Displays disk information, including slot number, vendor, product ID, revision and serial number, capacity, and status, about
all disks or a specified disk.
> show disk-monitor
Displays disk monitor offline policy status.
> show dns
Displays primary and alternate DNS server data.
> show dns-forwarding
Displays the DNS servers and the imputing name.
> show download-paths
Displays downloaded configuration path information, including the policy list, accelerated PAC file, HTTP error page, RIP
settings, static route table, upgrade image, and WCCP settings.
> show entitlements
Shows all of the entitlements for Intelligence Services bundles. If the appliance is not entitled for Intelligence Services
bundles, the CLI indicates No entitlements. Otherwise, the CLI displays the name of each Intelligence Services bundle to
which you are entitled and the expiration date.
> show epmapper [statistics]
Displays proxy settings or statistics.
> show event-log [configuration]
18 of 604
Show the event-log configuration.
"> show exceptions" on page 39
Displays all exceptions information.
> show failover [group_address]
Displays failover settings for the specified group or all groups.
> show forwarding
Displays advanced forwarding settings, including download-via-forwarding, health check, and load balancing status, and the
definition of forwarding hosts/groups and advanced forwarding rules.
> show ftp
Displays the FTP settings on the system.
> show general
Displays the general settings.
> show geolocation
Displays geolocation settings. See "> show geolocation" on page 40. You must have a Geolocation database and a valid
subscription in order to use this feature.
> show health-checks
Displays health check information.
> show http
Displays HTTP configuration information.
> show http2
Displays HTTP2 configuration information.
> show http-stats
Displays HTTP and HTTP/2 statistics, including HTTP statistics version number, number of connections accepted by HTTP,
number of persistent connections that were reused, and the number of active client connections.
> show identd
Displays IDENTD service settings.
> show installed-systems [verbose]
19 of 604
Displays ProxySG appliance system information, listing version release numbers, boot and lock status, and timestamp
information. Specifying verbose displays more details such as the signature for each system image, the signature of the boot
chain, and the boot chain version. You can compare the signature to known values to confirm hat the installed images are
valid. For instructions, refer to http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH245154.
> show interface {all | interface_number}
Displays interface status and configuration information.
> show ip-default-gateway
Specifies the default IP gateway.
> show ip-route-table
Displays route table information.
"> show ip-stats" on page 41
Displays TCP/IP statistics
> show ipv6
Displays current settings for IPv6-related options (bypass IPv6 traffic, auto-linklocal, forwarding).
> show isatap
Displays ADN ISATAP status.
> show licenses
Displays license information.
> show management-services
Displays information about the management services enabled or disabled on the system.
> show mapi
Displays settings for the MAPI proxy.
> show ndp
Shows TCP/IP Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) table. NDP performs functions for IPv6 similar to ARP for IPv4.
> show netbios
Displays NETBIOS settings.
> show netflow
Displays NetFlow settings.
> show ntp
20 of 604
Displays NTP servers status and information.
> show p2p [statistics]
Displays P2P statistics.
> show policy {config | executable | listing | order | proxy-default | source | tenant}
Displays the specified policy element.
> show policy-services
Displays Policy Services settings.
> show private-network
Displays the private network subnets and domains.
> show profile
Displays the system profile.
> show proxy-client
Displays the proxy client settings.
> show proxy-services
Displays information about proxy services. See "> show proxy-services" on page 43.
> show reflect-client-ip
Displays the client IP reflection.
> show resources
Displays allocation of disk and memory resources.
> show restart
Displays system restart settings, including core image information and compression status.
> show return-to-sender
Displays "return to sender" inbound and outbound settings.
> show rip {default-route | parameters | routes | statistics}
Displays information on RIP settings, including parameters and configuration, RIP routes, and RIP statistics.
."> show routing-domain" on page 45
Displays routing domains and contents.
21 of 604
> show service-groups
Displays proxy service groups.
> show sessions
Displays information about the CLI session.
> show shell
Displays the settings for the shell, including the maximum connections, the prompt, and the realm- and welcome-banners.
"> show smbv2" on page 46
Displays SMBv2 information.
> show smtp
Displays SMTP configuration, including the server domain name or IP address, port number, and sender’s email address.
> show snmp
Displays SNMP statistics, including status and MIB variable and trap information
> show socks-gateways
Displays SOCKS gateway settings.
> show socks-machine-id
Displays the identification of the secure sockets machine.
> show socks-proxy
Displays SOCKS proxy settings.
"> show sources" on page 47
Displays source listings for installable lists, such as the license key, policy files, RIP settings, static route table, and WCCP
settings files.
"> show ssl" on page 49
Displays ssl settings.
> show static-routes
Displays static route table information.
# show statistics-export
Displays information for exporting statistics. This command displays the same information as the # (config statistics-export)
view command.
22 of 604
> show status
Displays current system status information, including configuration information and general status information.
"> show streaming" on page 50
Displays information about configured streaming services, and client and total bandwidth configurations and usage.
> show tcp-ip
Displays TCP-IP parameters.
> show terminal
Displays terminal configuration parameters and subcommands.
> show timezones [area[/location]]
Displays supported timezones or the configured local timezone.
> show trust-destination-ip
Displays the trust destination IP
> show user-info
Displays information about the user currently logged in to the CLI.
> show user-overflow-action
Displays configured user limit overflow setting.
> show version
Displays ProxySG appliance hardware and software version and release information and backplane PIC status.
> show virtual-ip
Displays the current virtual IP addresses
> show wccp {configuration | statistics | status}
Displays WCCP configuration and statistics information. You can also view WCCP service-group information.
> show xml-config path
Displays the registry settings.
Example
> show caching
Refresh:
Estimated access freshness is 100.0%
23 of 604
Let the ProxySG Appliance manage refresh bandwidth

Current bandwidth used is 0 kilobits/sec
Policies:
Do not cache objects larger than 1024 megabytes
Cache negative responses for 0 minutes
Let the ProxySG Appliance manage freshness
FTP caching:
Caching FTP objects is enabled
FTP objects with last modified date, cached for 10% of last modified time
FTP objects without last modified date, initially cached for 24 hours
24 of 604
> show access-log

Synopsis
Displays the current access log settings.
Syntax
> show access-log {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show access-log default-logging
Displays the access log default policy.
> show access-log format brief
Displays the names of access log formats.
> show access-log format
Displays the all access log formats.
> show access-log format format_name
Displays the specified access log format.
> show access-log log brief
Displays the access log names.
> show access-log log
Displays configuration information of all access logs.
> show access-log log log_name
Displays the specified access log configuration.
> show access-log statistics
Displays all access log statistics.
> show access-log statistics log_name
Displays access log statistics for the specified log.
Example
> show access-log format brief
Formats:
25 of 604
main
streaming
ssl
squid
ncsa
bcreportermain_v1
bcreporterssl_v1
bcreporterstreaming_v1
bcreporterwarp_v1
dns
collaboration
mapi-http
clientagent_v1
im
p2p
cifs
mapi
bcreportercifs_v1
bcsecurityanalytics_v1
26 of 604

Synopsis
Displays Application Attributes settings related to database download status and attribute values. These commands produce
the same output as # (config application-attributes) view.
Syntax
> show application-attributes [subcommand]
Subcommands
Displays the download URL for the Application Attributes database, and results of the last download and the last successful
download.
> show application-attributes attributes
Displays all supported attributes.
> show application-attributes possible-values
Displays possible values for a specified application attribute. If an attribute name contains spaces, enclose it in double
quotation marks ("). When writing policy that includes the request.application.attribute_name= condition, you can use
this subcommand to ensure that the CPL parameters are valid.
Example
> show application-att possible-values cobit
True/False
27 of 604

Synopsis
Displays Application Classification settings related to database download status, applications, groups, and operations. These
commands produce the same output as # (config application-classification) view.
Syntax
> show application-classification [subcommand]
Subcommands
Displays the download URL for the Application Classification database, and results of the last download and the last
successful download.
> show application-classification applications[group group | operation operation]
Displays all applications in the specified group or that support the specified operation. If no parameter is specified, displays all
applications.
> show application-classification groups [application application]
Displays all groups, or all groups supported by the specified application.
> show application-classification operations
Displays all operations, or all operations supported by the specified application.
Example
> show application-classification operations applications webex
Host Meeting
Join Meeting
Login
Share Application
Upload Files
28 of 604
> show bandwidth-management

Synopsis
Displays the bandwidth management configuration.
Syntax
> show bandwidth-management [subcommand]
Subcommands
> show bandwidth-management
Displays the bandwidth management state (enabled or disabled).
> show bandwidth-management configuration [bandwidth_class]
Displays the bandwidth-management configuration for the specified bandwidth class . If you do not specify a bandwidth class,
displays the bandwidth-management configuration for the system.
> show bandwidth-management statistics [bandwidth_class]
Displays the bandwidth-management statistics for the specified bandwidth class. If you do not specify a bandwidth class,
displays the bandwidth-management statistics for the system.
Example
> show bandwidth-management configuration
Bandwidth Management Enabled
See Also
n "Managing Bandwidth" in SGOS Administration Guide
29 of 604
> show bridge

Synopsis
Displays bridge configuration and statistics.
Syntax
> show bridge {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show bridge configuration [bridge_name]
Displays the bridge configuration for the specified bridge_name or for all interfaces on the system.
> show bridge fwtable [bridge_name]
Displays the bridge forwarding table for the specified bridge_name or for all interfaces on the system.
> show bridge statistics [bridge_name]
Displays the bridge statistics for the specified bridge_name or for all interfaces on the system.
Example
> show bridge configuration
Bridge passthru-0 configuration:
Interface 0:0
Internet address: 10.9.59.246
Internet subnet: 255.255.255.0
MTU size: 1500
Spanning tree: disabled
Allow intercept: enabled
Reject inbound: disabled
Status: autosensed full duplex, 100 megabits/sec network
Interface 0:1
MTU size: 1500
Status: autosensed no link
30 of 604
> show cifs

Synopsis
Shows Common Internet File System (CIFS) information.
Syntax
> show cifs {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show cifs configuration
Displays the CIFS configuration settings, such as whether read-ahead is enabled/disabled and write-back is full or none. For
more information on these settings, see"# (config cifs)" on page 206 .
> show cifs directory url
Displays contents of the specified directory located in the appliance cache, where url is in the format:
cifs://server/share/path-to-file
To enter file or directory names that contain spaces, substitute each space with the following escape code: %20. If the path-to-
file contains a percent sign, substitute the % with %25.
The output lists each file or directory name, the date and time the file/directory was last updated, and the file size.
Note: You must be in enable mode to use the > show cifs directory command.
> show cifs file url
Displays information about a specific CIFS file or directory located in the appliance cache, where url is in the format:
To enter file or directory names that contain spaces, substitute each space with the following escape code: %20. If the path-to-
file contains a percent sign, substitute the % with %25.
The output lists the object size, and when the file/directory was created, last accessed, and last modified.
Note: You must be in enable mode to use the > show cifs file command.
> show cifs statistics
Displays statistics about CIFS read/write file operations.
31 of 604
Example
> enable
Enable Password:
# show cifs file cifs://atlas/public/prepop/a/a1.txt
Type: file
Cached object size: 409,121
Data bytes in cache: 409,121
Creation Time: Thu, 09 Jul 2009 03:36:15 UTC
Last Access Time: Wed, 14 Oct 2009 17:36:25 UTC
Last Write Time: Thu, 09 Jul 2009 03:36:24 UTC
Change Time: Thu, 09 Jul 2009 03:36:24 UTC
32 of 604
> show clients

Synopsis
Shows remote clients information.
Syntax
> show clients [subcommand]
Subcommands
> show clients
Displays ProxyClient and Unified Agent configuration.
> show clients acceleration
Displays ProxyClient acceleration settings.
> show clients acceleration adn
Displays ProxyClient Application Delivery Network (ADN) settings.
> show clients acceleration adn exclude-subnets
Displays ProxyClient ADN excluded subnets.
> show clients acceleration cifs
Displays ProxyClient CIFS settings.
> show clients clients
Displays current connected clients.
> show clients locations
Displays location settings.
> show clients web-filtering
Displays Web Filtering settings.
Example
> show clients web-filtering
Client Manager Web-filter configuration
Activation : enabled
Safe Search : enabled
HTTPS Filtering : enabled
33 of 604
Default Action : allow

Failure Mode : closed
34 of 604
> show commands

Synopsis
Displays the available CLI commands. By default, commands are formatted in output.
Syntax
> show commands [subcommand]
Subcommands
> show commands
Displays all available commands.
> show commands delimited [all | privileged]
Displays commands so they can be parsed.
> show commands formatted [all | privileged]
Displays commands so they can be viewed easily.
35 of 604
Example
>show commands
-----------------------------------------------------------
Root non-privileged commands
-----------------------------------------------------------
1:display Display a text based url
<url>
1:enable Turn on privileged commands
1:exit Exit command line interface
1:help Information on help
1:inline Install configurations from console input
1:ping Send echo messages
<IPv4 address | hostname> [routing domain name]
1:ping6 Send IPv6 echo messages
<IPv6 address | hostname> [routing domain name]
1:show Show running system information
2:accelerated-pac Accelerated PAC file
36 of 604
> show diagnostics

Synopsis
Displays remote diagnostics information, including version number, and whether the Heartbeats feature and the ProxySG
appliance monitor are currently enabled.
Syntax
> show diagnostics {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show diagnostics configuration
Displays diagnostics settings.
> show diagnostics cpu-monitor
Displays the CPU Monitor results.
> show diagnostics service-info
Displays service-info settings.
> show diagnostics snapshot
Displays the snapshot configuration.
Example
> show diagnostics snapshot
Snapshot sysinfo
Target: /sysinfo
Status: Enabled
Interval: 1440 minutes
To keep: 100
To take: Infinite
Next snapshot: 2019-07-12 00:00:00 UTC
Snapshot sysinfo_stats
Target: /sysinfo-stats
Status: Enabled
Interval: 60 minutes
To keep: 168
To take: Infinite
Next snapshot: 2019-07-11 17:00:00 UTC
37 of 604
> show disk

Synopsis
Displays information about the specified hard disk(s), including slot number, drive manufacturer, product ID/model, revision
and serial number, capacity, SGOS compatibility information, and disk status.
The Status line in output displays information based on the current status of the selected hard disk drive:
n Present: Hard disk drive is mounted correctly and available for access by the appliance.
n Empty: Hard disk drive slot is not occupied by a disk drive.
n Initializing: Hard disk drive is in the process of being mounted for use by the appliance.
n Offline: Hard disk drive is offline and no longer usable by the appliance.
n Error: Hard drive disk is faulty.
n Present (partition offline): Drive partition is down but the disk drive is active.
Syntax
> show disk {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show disk disk_number
Displays information on the specified disk.
> show disk all
Displays information about all installed disks in the ProxySG appliance.
Example
> show disk 1
Vendor: SEAGATE
Product: ST9250410AS
Revision: 0002SDM1
Disk serial number: 5VGCEJJQ
Capacity: 250059350016 bytes
Pre 6.2 compatible: no
Status: present
38 of 604
> show exceptions

Synopsis
Displays all exceptions or the specified built-in or user defined exception.
Syntax
> show exceptions [subcommand]
Subcommands
> show exceptions
Displays all exceptions.
> show exceptions [built-in_id | user-defined_id]
Displays the specified built-in or user-defined exception.
Example
Display the exception called 'refresh'.
> show exceptions refresh

$(exception.id):
refresh
$(exception.summary):
Authorized
$(exception.details):
Click <a href="$(redirect.location)">here</a> if you are not automatically redirected.
HTTP $(exception.code):
200
See Also
n "# (config exceptions)" on page 293
39 of 604
> show geolocation

Synopsis
Displays geolocation settings related to database download status and countries listed in the database. These commands
produce the same output as # (config geolocation) view.
Syntax
> show geolocation [subcommand]
Subcommands
> show geolocation
Displays the download URL for the geolocation database, and results of the last download and the last successful download.
> show geolocation countries
Displays a list of countries defined in the geolocation database (if one has been downloaded). In addition, this subcommand
also displays system-defined conditions for country names when geolocation is not enabled or licensed, or if the database is
otherwise unavailable.
Example
> show geolocation
License Type: Demo
Licensed Until: Wed, 02 Oct 2019 00:00:00 UTC
Service: Enabled
Download method: Direct
Last successful download:
Time: Tue, 16 Jul 2019 15:45:06 UTC
Downloaded from: https://subscription.es.bluecoat.com/geoip/database
Version: 20190716
See Also
n "Geolocation" in SGOS Administration Guide
40 of 604
> show ip-stats

Synopsis
Displays TCP/IP statistics.
Syntax
> show ip-stats {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show ip-stats all
Display TCP/IP statistics.
> show ip-stats interface {all | number}
Displays TCP/IP statistics for all interfaces or for the specified number (0 to 7).
> show ip-stats ip
Displays IP statistics.
> show ip-stats memory
Displays TCP/IP memory statistics.
> show ip-stats summary
Displays TCP/IP summary statistics.
> show ip-stats tcp
Displays TCP statistics.
> show ip-stats udp
Displays UDP statistics.
Example
> show ip-stats summary
; TCP/IP Statistics
TCP/IP General Statistics

Entries in TCP queue: 8
Maximum entries in TCP queue: 8
Number of time wait allocation failures: 0
Entries in UDP queue: 4
41 of 604
Number of active bypassed connections 0

Stack tick counter 1191781183
Fast tick counter 5492490
Slow tick counter 2324895
Number of SYNs ignored due to acceptance regulation 0
Number of accept regulations due to high CPU 1
42 of 604

Synopsis
Information about proxy services.
Syntax
> show proxy-services [subcommand]
Subcommands
Displays all proxy services configured on the system.
> show proxy-services dynamic-bypass
Displays all dynamic bypass entries
> show proxy-services dynamic-bypass configuration
Displays dynamic bypass configuration information.
> show proxy-services dynamic-bypass filter
Displays filtered dynamic bypass list.
> show proxy-services restricted-intercept
Show restricted intercept information.
> show proxy-services restricted-intercept filter
Show filtered restricted intercept list.
> show proxy-services services bypass
Display services containing a bypass action.
> show proxy-services services default [configuration]
Display default services configuration.
> show proxy-services services default statistics
Show default service destination port byte statistics.
> show proxy-services services intercept
Display services containing an intercept action.
43 of 604
> show proxy-services services name name
Display services with name substring match.
> show proxy-services services proxy proxy
Display services using the specified proxy.
> show proxy-services static-bypass
Displays static bypass information.
> show proxy-services static-bypass filter
Displays filtered static bypass information.
Example
> show proxy-services services intercept
Service Name: Explicit HTTP
Service Group: Standard
Proxy: HTTP
Attributes: use-adn, adn-byte-cache, adn-compress, byte-cache-priority normal, early-intercept
Source IP Destination IP Port Range Action
<All> <Explicit> 8080 Intercept
<All> <Explicit> 80 Intercept
44 of 604
> show routing-domain

Synopsis
Displays routing domains information.
Syntax
> show routing-domain [subcommand]
Subcommands
> show routing-domain
Displays all routing domains.
> show routing-domain routing_domain
Displays the specified routing domain.
Example
> show routing-domain Marketing_144
Routing domain Marketing_144 configuration:
Associated interfaces: 1:0.144
; TCP/IP Routing Table

Routing tables
Routing domain 2 : Marketing_144

Internet:
Destination Gateway Flags Refs Use Netif Expire
default 144.144.144.100 UGS 1 0 1:0.144
44.44.44.0/24 144.144.144.111 UGS 1 0 1:0.144
144.144.144.0/24 link#9 UC 0 0 1:0.144
144.144.144.100 link#9 UHLW 1 0 1:0.144 66
144.144.144.111 link#9 UHLW 0 0 1:0.144
See Also
n "Routing on the Appliance" in SGOS Administration Guide
45 of 604
> show smbv2

Synopsis
Displays information about SMBv2 connections for CIFS proxy.
Syntax
> show smbv2 {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show smbv2 configuration
Displays SMBv2 configuration information.
> show smbv2 statistics
Displays SMBv2 statistics.
Example
> show smbv2 configuration
SMBv2: Enabled
See Also
n "> show cifs" on page 31
n “Accelerating File Sharing” chapter in SGOS Administration Guide
46 of 604
> show sources

Synopsis
Displays source listings for installable lists, such as the license key, policy files, RIP settings, static route table, and WCCP
settings files.
Syntax
> show sources {subcommand}
Subcommands
> authentication-form form_name
Displays the specified authentication form.
> show sources crl crl_id
Displays the specified CRL.
> show sources exceptions
Displays the exception code.
> show sources forwarding
Displays forwarding settings.
> show sources license-key
Displays license information.
> show sources policy {builtin-epilog | builtin-prolog | central | classification |

cloud-customer | cloud-solution | forward | landlord | local | tenant | vpm-cpl | vpm-xml}
Displays the specified policy file.
> show sources rip-settings
Displays RIP settings.
> show sources socks-gateways
Displays the SOCKS gateways settings.
> show sources static-route-table
Displays the static routing table information.
> show sources wccp-settings
47 of 604
Displays WCCP settings.
Example
> show sources socks-gateways
# Current SOCKS Gateways Configuration
# No update
# Connection attempts to SOCKS gateways fail: closed
socks_fail closed
# 0 gateways defined, 64 maximum
# SOCKS gateway configuration
# gateway <gateway-alias> <gateway-domain> <SOCKS port>
# [version=(4|5 [user=<user-name> password=password]
# [request-compression=yes|no])]
# Default fail-over sequence.
# sequence <gateway-alias> <gateway-alias> ...
# The default sequence is empty.
# SOCKS Gateways Configuration Ends
48 of 604
> show ssl

Synopsis
Displays SSL settings.
Syntax
> show ssl {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show ssl ccl [list_name]
Displays all CA certificate lists configured on the appliance, or displays a summary of all CA certificates in the specified CCL.
> show ssl ecl [list_name]
Displays all external certificate lists configured on the appliance, or displays a summary of all external certificates in the
specified ECL.
> show ssl ssl-client [ssl_client]
Displays a summary of all SSL clients configured on the appliance, or displays a summary of the specified SSL client.
Example
> show ssl ssl-client
SSL-Client Name Keyring CCL Protocol
-------------------- -------------------- -------------------- -------------------------
default default browser-trusted tlsv1 tlsv1.1 tlsv1.2
49 of 604
> show streaming

Synopsis
Displays configuration and statistics for supported streaming services.
Syntax
> show streaming {subcommand}
Subcommands
> show streaming adobe-hds configuration
Displays Adobe HTTP Dynamic streaming configuration information.
> show streaming apple-hls configuration
Displays Apple HTTP Live streaming configuration information.
> show streaming flash {configuration | statistics}
Displays Flash streaming configuration information or statistics.
> show streaming ms-smooth configuration
Displays Microsoft Smooth streaming configuration information.
> show streaming quicktime {configuration | statistics}
Displays QuickTime streaming configuration information or statistics.
> show streaming real-media {configuration | statistics}
Displays Real Media streaming configuration information or statistics.
> show streaming windows-media {configuration | statistics}
Displays Windows Media streaming configuration information or statistics.
> show streaming configuration
Displays configuration information for all supported streaming services.
> show streaming statistics
Displays statistics for all supported streaming services.
50 of 604
Example
> show streaming configuration
; Streaming Configuration
max-client-bandwidth: unlimited
max-gateway-bandwidth: unlimited
multicast address: 224.2.128.0 - 224.2.255.255
multicast port: 32768 - 65535
multicast TTL: 16
See Also
n "Managing Streaming Media" in SGOS Administration Guide
51 of 604
> test
Synopsis
Tests subsystems. A test http get command to a particular origin server or URL, for example, can verify Layer 3
connectivity as well as upper-layer functionality.
Syntax
> test {subcommand}
Subcommands
> test adn IP_server_address port
Tests the ADN connection by connecting to a server. The IP server address can be either IPv4 or IPv6.
> test application-attributes application_name attribute_name
Displays values for the specified application and attribute. You must have an Application Attributes database and a valid
subscription in order to use this feature.
> test application-classification URL
Displays the application and operation of the specified URL.
> test content-filter URL
Displays the categories for the specified URL, as determined by the content filter data source and policy.
> test dns {host_name | IP_address} [ipv4 | ipv6] [DNS_server_IP] [bypass-cache]
Performs a DNS lookup and displays debugging information that describes the lookup. If you specify DNS_server_IP,
bypass-cache is implied and is not required.
> test geolocation IP_address
Displays the country associated with an IP address. You must have a Geolocation database and a valid subscription in order
to use this feature.
> test http get URL
Does a test GET of an HTTP object specified by URL.
> test service source_ip destination_ip port_range [protocol_type]
Perform a test of proxy services to determine how a specific request will be handled (bypass/intercept) by the ProxySG
appliance, based on client address and destination address and port.
> test threat-risk URLI
52 of 604
Displays the Threat Risk Level of the specified URL. You must have a Threat Risk Levels database and a valid subscription in
order to use this feature.
Example
> test http get symantec.com
Type escape sequence to abort.

Executing HTTP get test
* HTTP request header sent:

GET HTTP://symantec.com/ HTTP/1.0
Host: symantec.com
User-Agent: HTTP_TEST_CLIENT
* HTTP response header recv'd:

HTTP/1.1 301 Moved Permanently
Server: A Web Server
Date: Wed, 17 Jul 2019 15:15:37 GMT
Location: http://www.symantec.com/
Content-length: 0
Connection: close
Measured throughput rate is 0.44 Kbytes/sec

HTTP get test passed
53 of 604
> traceroute
Synopsis
Traces the route to a destination. This command can be helpful in determining where a problem might lie between two points in
a network.
Use this command to trace the network path from a ProxySG appliance back to a client or to a specific origin Web server.
You can also use this command from your client station (if supported) to trace the network path between the client, an
ProxySG appliance, and a Web server. Microsoft operating systems generally support trace route from a command prompt.
The syntax from a Microsoft-based client is: tracert [ip | hostname].
Syntax
> traceroute {IP_address | hostname}
Example
> traceroute 10.25.36.47
Type escape sequence to abort.
1 10.169.0.1 1 1 0
2 155.64.2.108 0 * 1
See Also
n "> traceroute6" on the facing page
54 of 604
> traceroute6
Synopsis
Traces the route to an IPv6 destination. This command can be helpful in determining where a problem might lie between two
points in a network.
Use this command to trace the network path from a ProxySG appliance back to a client or to a specific origin Web server.
You can also use this command from your client station (if supported) to trace the network path between the client, an
ProxySG appliance, and a Web server. Microsoft operating systems generally support trace route from a command prompt.
The syntax from a Microsoft-based client is: tracert -6 [ip | hostname].
Syntax
> traceroute6 {IPv6_address | hostname}
Example
> traceroute6 0:0:0:0:0:FFFF:9B40:8A65
% traceroute6[22]: bind
See Also
n "> traceroute" on the previous page
55 of 604
Privileged Mode Commands

This section describes and provides examples for the ProxySG appliance privileged mode CLI commands. Privileged mode
provides a level of access that is higher than standard and lower than privileged configure mode.
Privileged mode provides a set of commands that enable you to view, manage, and change ProxySG appliance settings for
features such as log files, authentication, caching, DNS, HTTPS, packet capture filters, and security. You can cannot
configure functionality such as SSL Proxy, HTTP compression.
The prompt changes from a greater-than sign (>) to a pound sign (#) to indicate that you are in privileged mode.
Enter privileged mode from standard mode by using the enable command:
> enable
Enable Password:
#
56 of 604
# acquire-utc
Synopsis
Acquire the Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. To manage objects, the appliance
must know the current UTC time. Your ProxySG appliance comes pre-populated with a list of NTP servers available on the
Internet, and attempts to connect to them in the order specified on the NTP tab. If the appliance cannot access any of the listed
NTP servers, the UTC time must be set manually. For instructions on how to set the UTC time manually, refer to “Accessing
the Appliance” in the SGOS Administration Guide. This command has no parameters or subcommands.
Syntax
# acquire-utc
Example
# acquire-utc
NTP update in progress, please check event log for further messages.
See Also
n "Accessing the Appliance" in SGOS Administration Guide
57 of 604
# bridge
Synopsis
Clears bridge data.
Syntax
# bridge {subcommand}
Subcommands
# bridge clear-statistics bridge_name
Clear the specified bridge's statistics.
# bridge clear-fwtable bridge_name
Clear the specified bridge's forwarding table.
Example
# bridge clear-statistics bridge1
ok
See Also
n "Hardware and Software Bridges" in SGOS Administration Guide
58 of 604
# cancel-upload
Synopsis
Cancels a pending access log upload. This command allows you to stop repeated upload attempts if the Web server becomes
unreachable while an upload is in progress. Iif the log is waiting to retry the upload,the command sets log uploading back to
idle. If the log is in the process of uploading, a flag is set to the log. This flag sets the log back to idle if the upload fails.
Syntax
# cancel-upload {subcommand}
Subcommands
# cancel-upload all
Cancels all pending log uploads.
# cancel-upload log log_name
Cancels upload of the specified log.
Example
# cancel upload all
ok
See Also
n "Creating Custom Access Log Formats” in SGOS Administration Guide
59 of 604
# clear-arp
Synopsis
Clears the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table. ARP tables are used to correlate an IP address to a physical machine
address recognized only in a local area network. ARP provides the protocol rules for providing address conversion between a
physical machine address (also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address) and its corresponding IP address, and
vice versa. This command has no parameters or subcommands.
Syntax
# clear-arp
Example
# clear-arp
ok
60 of 604
# clear-cache
Synopsis
Clears the byte, dns, or object cache. This can be done at any time. When any cache is cleared, performance slows down until
the cache is repopulated.
Syntax
# clear-cache [subcommand]
Subcommands
# clear-cache
Clears all cached content.
# clear-cache byte-cache
Clears the byte cache.
# clear-cache dns-cache
Clears the DNS cache.
# clear-cache [object-cache]
Sets all objects in the cache to expired.
Example
# clear-cache
ok
61 of 604
# clear-errored-connections
Synopsis
Clears historical errored proxied sessions, errored bypassed connections, and errored ADN inbound connections. To view
errored proxied sessions in the Management Console, select Statistics > Sessions > Errored Sessions > Proxied
Sessions. To view errored bypassed connections in the Management Console, select Statistics > Sessions > Errored
Sessions > Bypassed Connections. To view errored ADN inbound connections in the Management Console, select
Statistics > Active Sessions > ADN Inbound Connections.
Syntax
# clear-errored-connections {subcommand}
Subcommands
# clear-errored-connections proxied sessions
Clears the historical proxied sessions.
# clear-errored-connections bypassed sessions
Clears the historical bypassed connections.
# clear-errored-connections adn-inbound sessions
Clears the historical ADN inbound connections.
Example
# clear-errored-connections adn-inbound sessions
ok
62 of 604
# clear-statistics
Synopsis
This command clears the bandwidth-management, persistent, and Windows Media, Real Media, and QuickTime streaming
statistics collected by the ProxySG appliance. To view streaming statistics from the CLI, use either the > show streaming
{quicktime | real-media | windows-media} statistics or the > show bandwidth-management statistics [bandwidth_class]
commands.
Syntax
# clear-statistics {subcommand}
Subcommands
# clear-statistics authentication [error | realm realm_name]
Clears the authentication error statistics or clears statistics for the specified authentication realm.
# clear-statistics bandwidth-management [class class_name]
Clears all bandwidth-management statistics or clears statistics for the specified bandwidth-management class.
# clear-statistics cifs
Clears CIFS statistics.
# clear-statistics default-services
Clears statistics for default services.
# clear-statistics epmapper
Clears Endpoint Mapper statistics.
# clear-statistics export
Clears export statistics. Once this command is run, the next export only includes the data accumulated since the clear-
statistics export command was run.
# clear-statistics msrpc ...
Clears MSRPC/MAPI statistics.
# clear-statistics persistent [prefix]
Clears statistics that persist after a reboot. You can clear all persistent statistics, or, since statistics are kept in a naming
convention of group:stat, you can limit the statistics cleared to a specific group. Common prefixes include HTTP, SSL, and
SOCKS.
# clear-statistics quicktime
63 of 604
Clears QuickTime statistics.
# clear-statistics real-media
Clears Real Media statistics.
# clear-statistics windows-media
Clears Windows Media statistics.
Example
# clear-statistics windows-media
ok
64 of 604
# configure
Synopsis
Manages ProxySG appliance features.
Syntax
# configure {subcommand}
Subcommands
# configure network url
Downloads a web-accessible script (such as a configuration file) from the specified HTTP network host, and implements the
changes in the script onto the system.
# configure terminal
Enters privileged # (config) submode. See "Configure Mode Commands" on page 120
Example
# configure network http://1.1.1.1/fconfigure.txt
ok
See Also
n "Configure Mode Commands" on page 120
65 of 604
# disable
Synopsis
Returns you to standard mode from privileged mode. This command has no parameters or subcommands.
Syntax
# disable
Example
# disable
>
See Also
n "> enable" on page 11
n "# exit" on page 72
66 of 604
# disk
Synopsis
Use the disk command to take a disk offline or to re-initialize a disk.
On a multi-disk ProxySG appliance, after issuing the disk reinitialize disk_number command, complete the reinitialization by
setting it to empty and copying pre-boot programs, boot programs and starter programs, and system images from the master
disk to the re-initialized disk. The master disk is the leftmost valid disk. Valid indicates that the disk is online, has been
properly initialized, and is not marked as invalid or unusable.
Note: If the current master disk is taken offline, reinitialized or declared invalid or unusable, the
leftmost valid disk that has not been reinitialized since restart becomes the master disk. Thus
as disks are reinitialized in sequence, a point is reached where no disk can be chosen as the
master. At this point, the current master disk is the last disk. If this disk is taken offline,
reinitialized, or declared invalid or unusable, the ProxySG appliance is restarted.
Reinitialization is done without rebooting the system, although the system should not proxy traffic during reinitialization. The
ProxySG appliance operations, in turn, are not affected, although during the time the disk is being reinitialized, that disk is not
available for caching. Note that only the master disk reinitialization might restart the ProxySG appliance.
Syntax
# disk {subcommand}
Subcommands
# disk offline disk_number
Takes the specified disk offline.
# disk reinitialize disk_number
Reinitializes the specified disk.
# disk decrease-object-limit [force]
Decreases the object capacity on all disks so that they will be compatible with releases prior to SGOS 6.2.
Warning: Issue this command on an idle system only.
On systems that have had their object store capacity increased with the # disk increase-object-limit command, you will
want to decrease the object limit before downgrading to pre-6.2 releases. Note that this command preserves configuration,
registry settings, policy, licensing files, and the appliance birth certificate; it does not retain cache contents, access logs,
67 of 604
event log, or sysinfo snapshots. If the disk already has the decreased object capacity, the disk will not be modified; the
command will be aborted. The force option decreases the object limit without prompting or warning. This command will not
work on a single disk system.
Warning: If you do not decrease the object store capacity before downgrading to a pre-6.2
image, the disks will be re-initialized after the downgrade and all data and settings will be lost.
# disk increase-object-limit [force]
Increase disk object capacity on multi-disk, large-drive systems in order to store more objects on each disk. The increased
object capacity is the default for all multi-disk systems that are manufactured with SGOS 6.2; to get this extra capacity on
other systems, you have to initiate this command. Note that the disks will be re-initialized in a format that is not compatible
with SGOS releases prior to 6.2. After disk re-initialization, the configuration, registry settings, policy, licensing files, and the
appliance birth certificate are preserved; it does not retain cache contents, access logs, event log, and sysinfo snapshots. If
the disk already has the increased object capacity, the disk will not be modified; the command will be aborted. This command
will not work on a single disk system.
Warning: This command should be executed on an idle system only.
The force option increases the object limit without prompting or warning.
Warning: Before downgrading to a pre-6.2 release, you must use the # disk decrease-
object-limit command to decrease the object store capacity. If you fail to do this, all data
and settings will be lost after the downgrade.
Example
# disk offline 3
ok
# disk reinitialize 3
ok
68 of 604
# display
See > display for details on this command.
69 of 604
# enable
Synopsis
Enters privileged mode. Privileged mode commands enable you to view and change your configuration settings. A password is
always required. This command has no parameters or subcommands.
Syntax
# enable
Example
# enable
Enable Password:
#
See Also
n "# (config) security hashed-password" on page 464
n "# (config) security username" on page 532
70 of 604
# entitlements
Synopsis
Executes commands related to entitlements.
Syntax
# entitlements {subcommand}
Subcommands
# entitlements refresh
Refresh the appliance’s entitlements for Intelligence Services bundles.
Example
# entitlements refresh
This may take a few minutes. Please wait...
ok
71 of 604
# exit
See "> exit" on page 12 for details on this command.
See Also
72 of 604
# fips-mode
Synopsis
Note: This release is not FIPS-capable; using this command results in an error. Refer to the
SGOS 7.2.x Release Notes and the SGOS Upgrade/Downgrade document for more
information.
Enables and disables FIPS mode. When you enter FIPS mode, all previous configurations are destroyed. When you exit FIPS
mode, all FIPS configurations are destroyed.
Note: This command is available only from the serial console.
Syntax
# fips-mode {subcommand}
Subcommands
# fips-mode disable
Disables FIPS mode.
# fips-mode enable
Enable FIPS mode.
Example
# fips-mode enable
ok
73 of 604
# help
See "Accessing Quick Command Line Help" on page 4 for details on this command.
74 of 604
# hide-advanced
Synopsis
Disable advanced commands.
Syntax
# hide-advanced {subcommand}
Subcommands
# hide-advanced all
Hides all advanced commands.
# hide-advanced expand
Expands all advanced commands.
Example
# hide-advanced expand
ok
See Also
n "# reveal-advanced" on page 96
75 of 604
# inline
Synopsis
Installs lists based on your terminal input.
Discussion
The easiest way to create installable lists, such as forwarding hosts, PAC files, and policy files, among others, is to take an
existing file and modify it, or to create the text file on your local system, upload the file to a server, and download the file to the
ProxySG appliance. As an alternative, you can enter the list directly into the Proxy SG appliance through the inline command,
either by typing the list line by line or by pasting the contents of the file. If you choose to create a text file to contain the
configuration commands and settings, be sure to assign the file the extension .txt. Use a text editor to create this file, noting
the following ProxySG appliance configuration file rules:
n Only one command (and any associated parameters) permitted, per line
n Comments must begin with a semicolon (;)
n Comments can begin in any column, however, all characters from the beginning
Tip: When entering input for the inline command, you can correct mistakes on the current line
using the backspace key. If you catch a mistake in a line that has already been terminated with
the ENTER key, you can abort the inline command by pressing CTRL+C. If the mistake is
caught after you terminate input to the inline command, you must re-enter the entire content.
The end-of-input marker (eof_marker) is a string you specify to mark the end of input for the
current inline command. The string can be composed of standard characters and numbers, but
cannot contain any spaces, punctuation marks, or other symbols.
Choose a unique end-of-input string that does not match any string of characters in the
configuration information. One recommended end-of-input string is ''' (three single quotes).
Syntax
# inline {subcommand eof_marker}
Subcommands
# inline accelerated-pac eof_marker
Updates the accelerated pac file with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending eof_marker.
# inline authentication-form form_name eof_marker
Install an authentication form from console input
76 of 604
# inline authentication-forms eof_marker
Install all authentication forms from console input.
# inline banner eof_marker
Updates the login banner for the telnet and SSH consoles with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and
the ending eof_marker.
# inline classification eof_marker
Install VPM classification from console input, with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending
eof_marker.
# inline exceptions eof_marker
Install exceptions with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending eof_marker.
# inline forwarding eof_marker
Updates the forwarding configuration with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending eof_
marker.
# inline license-key eof_marker
Updates the current license key settings with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending eof_
marker.
# inline policy policy_type eof_marker
Updates the current policy settings—central, local, forward, tenant (default | tenant_id), landlord, vpm-cpl, and vpm-xml—with
the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending eof_marker. Tenant and Landlord options are only
available when multi-tenant support is enabled. See # (config general) multi-tenant for more information.
# inline rip-settings eof_marker
Updates the current RIP settings with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending eof_
marker.
# inline socks-gateways eof_marker
Updates the current SOCKS gateway settings with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending
eof_marker.
# inline static-route-table eof_marker
Updates the current static route table settings with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending
eof_marker. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6.
# inline wccp-settings eof_marker
77 of 604
Updates the current WCCP settings with the settings you include between the beginning eof_marker and the ending eof_
marker.
Example
# inline accelerated-pac eof
settings
...
eof
78 of 604
# kill
Synopsis
Terminates the specified session. Use > show sessions to determine session information, including session numbers.
Syntax
# kill session_number
Example
> show sessions
Sessions:
# state type start elapsed
01 IDLE
02 PRIVL ssh 08 Aug 2006 21:27:51 UTC 23:08:04
03* NORML ssh 10 Aug 2006 20:35:40 UTC 00:00:15
...
> enable
Enable Password:
# kill 3
ok
See Also
n "> show" on page 16
79 of 604
# licensing
Synopsis
Request or update appliance licenses.
Syntax
# licensing {subcommand}
Subcommands
# licensing disable-trial
Disables trial period.
# licensing enable-trial
Enables trial period.
# licensing mark-registered
Marks the hardware registered manually.
# licensing register-hardware [force] user_ID password
Registers hardware with Symantec.
# licensing request-key [force] user_ID password
Requests the license key from Symantec using the specified user ID and password.
# licensing update-key [force]
Updates the license key from Symantec immediately.
Example
# licensing request-key
User ID: admin
Password:
...
ok
See Also
n “Licensing” in SGOS Administration Guide
80 of 604
# load
Synopsis
Downloads installable lists or system upgrade images. These installable lists or settings also can be updated using "# inline"
on page 76.
Syntax
# load {subcommand}
Subcommands
# load accelerated-pac
Downloads the current accelerated PAC file settings.
# load authentication-form form_name
Downloads the specified authentication form.
# load authentication-forms
Downloads all new authentication forms.
# load banner
Configure the login banner for the telnet and SSH consoles.
# load crl crl
Loads the specified certificate revocation list.
# load exceptions
Downloads new exceptions.
# load forwarding
Downloads the current forwarding settings.
# load keydata [passphrase]
Loads the keyrings and keylists from the location specified with keydata-path.
# load license-key
Downloads a new license key.
# load policy {builtin | central | classification | forward | landlord | local | tenant | vpm-cpl |
vpm-xml | space_separated_list}
81 of 604
This command loads the latest version of the built-in policy source files, or downloads the specified file, from the URL
specified in the # (config) policy policy_file-path command. When multi-tenant mode is enabled, use the landlord option to load
landlord policy and the tenant option to load default tenant policy. To load policy for a tenant other than the default tenant, use
the #inline policy tenant tenant_id command.
You can specify a space-separated list of multiple policy files, excluding built-in policy.
# load proxy-client-software
Loads the ProxyClient software to the Client Manager. The CLI displays messages as the software loads.
# load rip-settings
Downloads new RIP settings.
# load socks-gateways
Downloads the current SOCKS gateways settings.
# load static-route-table
Downloads the current static route table settings.
# load trust-package
Downloads and installs the trust package from the specified download path. For information on setting the download path and
other trust package download settings, see # (config) security trust-package. Note that any manual changes you have made to
the browser-trusted or image-validation CA Certificate Lists (CCLs) or their associated CA certificates will be preserved. The
trust package at the specified download path will only be downloaded and installed if signature validation succeeds and if the
timestamp on the trust package indicates that it is a newer version than the existing trust packages that have been
downloaded to the ProxySG appliance.
# load upgrade [ignore-warnings]
Downloads the latest system image. The ignore-warnings option allows you to force an upgrade even if you receive policy
deprecation or disk compatibility warning. Keep the following in mind when using the ignore-warnings option:
n If you use # load upgrade ignore-warnings to force an upgrade while the system emits deprecation warnings
results in a policy load failure; all traffic is allowed or denied according to default policy.
n If you use # load upgrade ignore-warnings to force an upgrade while the system emits disk layout incompatibility
warnings, the disks will be re-initialized after the downgrade and all data and settings will be lost.
# load wccp-settings
Downloads the current WCCP settings.
# load timezone-database
Downloads a new time zone database.
82 of 604
Example
> show download-paths
Policy
Local:
Forward:
VPM-CPL:
VPM-XML:
Central: https://download.bluecoat.com/release/SG3/files/CentralPolicy.txt
Update when changed: no
Notify when changed: no
Polling interval: 1 day
Accelerated PAC:
RIP settings:
Static route table:
Upgrade image:
bcserver1.bluecoat.com/builds/ca_make.26649/wdir/8xx.CHK_dbg
WCCP settings:
Forwarding settings:
SOCKS gateway settings:
License key:
Exceptions:
Authentication forms:
>en
Enable Password
# load upgrade
Downloading from
"bcserver1.bluecoat.com/builds/ca_make.26649/wdir/8xx.CHK_dbg"
Downloading new system software (block 2611)
The new system software has been successfully downloaded.
Use "restart upgrade" to install the new system software.
See Also
n "# inline" on page 76
83 of 604
# pcap
Synopsis
Enables you to capture packets of Ethernet frames entering or leaving a ProxySG appliance. Packet capturing allows filtering
on various attributes of the frame to limit the amount of data collected. The collected data can then be transferred to the
desktop for analysis.
Note: After a filter is set, it remains in effect until it is redefined; the filtering properties are
persistent across reboots; however, PCAP stops when a system is rebooted.
The # pcap start options are not persistent across reboots. You must reconfigure them if you
reboot the system. The capsize and coreimage subcommands are used to specify the size of
the PCAP file. When no capsize or coreimage value is specified, the default packet capture file
size is 100MB.
Note: Before using the PCAP utility, consider that packet capturing doubles the amount of
processor usage performed in TCP/IP.
To view the captured packets, you must have a tool that can read Packet Sniffer Pro 1.1 files
such as Wireshark or Ethereal.
Syntax
# pcap {subcommand}
Subcommands
# pcap filter
No filtering specified (captures all packets in both directions—on all interfaces).
# pcap filter direction {in | out | both}
Specifies capture in the specified direction. If both is selected, both incoming and outgoing packets are captured. The default
setting is both.
# pcap filter interface {adapter_number:interface_number | all}
Specifies capture on the specified interface or on all interfaces, such as 0:1. The interface number must be between 0 and 16.
The default setting is all.
# pcap filter exprfilter_expression
Specifies capture only when the filter expression matches.
84 of 604
# pcap info
Displays current packet capture information.
# pcap start
Starts the capture.
# pcap start buffering-method [first | last] {count n |capsize number_of_kb}
Specifies how captured packets are buffered in memory, where:
n first: PCAP stops when the buffer limit is exceeded.
Note: This is a specific command that captures an exact number of packets. If no

parameters are specified, the default is to capture until the # pcap stop subcommand is
issued or the maximum limit reached.
n last: PCAP continues capturing even after the buffer limit has been exceeded. The oldest captured packets are
removed from buffer to make space for the newly captured packets: In this way, PCAP captures the last n (or n KB of)
packets. The saved packets in memory are written to disk when the capture is terminated. The packet capture file size
is limited to 1% of total RAM, which might be reached before n packets have been captured.
n count: Buffer limit is controlled by the number of packets stored in the buffer. The value of count must be between 1 and
1000000.
n capsize: Maximum number of bytes stored in the buffer. The capsize value is limited to 3% of the available system
memory at startup (not to exceed 4GB). This value will differ by appliance model.
Note: This is an approximate commandthat captures an approximate number of packets.

The actual size of the file written to disk is a little larger than the capsize value because of
extra packet information such as time-stamps. If no parameters are specified, the default
is to capture until the # pcap stop command is issued or the maximum limit reached.
# pcap start buffering-method coreimagen
Specifies kilobytes of packets kept in a core image. The coreimage value is limited to 3% of the available system memory at
startup (not to exceed 4 GB). This value will differ by appliance model.
# pcap start buffering-method truncn
Collects, at most, n bytes of packets from each frame when writing to disk. The range is 1 to 65535.
# pcap stop
Stops the capture.
85 of 604
# pcap transfer full_url/filename username password
Transfers captured data to an FTP site.
Example 1
Capture transactions among a ProxySG appliance (10.1.1.1), a server (10.2.2.2), and a client (10.1.1.2).
# pcap filter expr "host 10.1.1.1 || host 10.2.2.2 || host 10.1.1.2"
Example 2
Transfer captured packets to the FTP site 10.25.36.47.
# pcap transfer ftp://10.25.36.47/path/filename.cap username password
If the folders in the path do not exist, they are not created. An error message is generated.
Example 3
To start PCAP, enter # pcap start. Then run pcap info to view the results of the packet capture.
# pcap start
ok
# pcap info
Current state: Capturing
Filtering: On
Filter: direction both interface all expr "port 3035"
Packet capture information:
first count 4294967295 capsize 100000000 trunc 4294967295 coreimage 0
Packets captured: 2842
Bytes captured: 237403
Packets written: 2836
Bytes written: 316456
Coreimage ram used: 0B
Packets filtered through: 8147
After PCAP is stopped (using the # pcap stop command), enter pcap info to view the results of your PCAP session. You
should see results similar to the following:
# pcap info
Current state:
Filtering: On
Filter: direction both interface all expr "port 3035"
Packet capture information:
Packets captured: 5101
Bytes captured: 444634
Packets written: 5101
Bytes written: 587590
86 of 604
Coreimage ram used: 0B

Packets filtered through: 10808
See Also
n "Diagnostics" in SGOS Administration Guide
87 of 604
# ping
See "> ping" on page 14 for details on this command.
88 of 604
# ping6
See "> ping6" on page 15 for details on this command.
89 of 604
# policy
Synopsis
Configures policy commands.
Note: Configuring the # policy command to trace all transactions by default can significantly
degrade performance and should only be used in situations where a problem is being
diagnosed.
Syntax
# policy {subcommand}
Subcommands
# policy trace {all | none | proxy-traffic}
Use all to trace all transactions by default, use none to specify no tracing except as specified in policy files, and proxy-
traffic to trace all proxy transactions by default.
Example
# policy trace all
ok
All requests will be traced by default;
Warning: this can significantly degrade performance.
Use 'policy trace none' to restore normal operation
# policy trace none
ok
90 of 604
# register-with-director
Synopsis
Automatically registers the ProxySG appliance with a Symantec Director appliance, thus enabling that Director to establish a
secure administrative session with the ProxySG appliance. During the registration process, Director can “lock out” all other
administrative access to the appliance so that all configuration changes are controlled and initiated by Director. If your
appliance does not have an appliance certificate, you must specify the registration password that is configured on Director.
Syntax
# register-with-director
Subcommands
# register-with-director dir_ip_address [appliance_name dir_serial_number]
Register with the Director appliance with the specified IP address. Optionally, specify the name and serial number of the
Director appliance.
Example
# register-with-director 192.0.2.0
Registration Successful
91 of 604
# register-with-management-center
Synopsis
Registers the ProxySG appliance with a Symantec Management Center appliance, thus enabling that Management Center to
establish a secure administrative session with the ProxySG appliance.
Syntax
Subcommands
# register-with-management-center IP_address API_Key [group]
Register with the Management Center appliance with the specified IP address and API key. Optionally, specify an
existing Management Center device group for the appliance.
Example
# register-with-management-center 192.0.2.0 AKIAIUR5RVQA6RF4ZGSQ East-Group
Register with Management Center 192.0.2.0...
Registered Successfully
92 of 604
# remove-sgos8-config
Synopsis
Removes the SGOS 8.x configuration file so that when upgrading from SGOS 7.x to 8.x, the configuration settings for 8.x will
be based on the current 7.x configuration.
Syntax
# remove-sgos8-config [subcommand]
Subcommands
Removes the SGOS 8.x configuration file.
# remove-sgos8-config [force]
Removes the SGOS 8.x configuration file without a confirmation prompt from the CLI.
Example
Removing SGOS 8.x configuration will permanently delete existing 8.x configuration from disk.
Continue? (y/n)[n]: y
ok
Or if there is no SGOS 8.x configuration found:
% No SGOS 8.x configuration is available on this system.
See Also
n "# restore-defaults" on page 95
93 of 604
# restart
Synopsis
Restarts the system. The restart options determine whether the ProxySG appliance should simply reboot (regular) or reboot
using the new image previously downloaded using the load upgrade command (upgrade).
Syntax
# restart {subcommand}
Subcommands
# restart abrupt
Reboots the system abruptly, according to the version of the ProxySG appliance that is currently installed. Restart abrupt
saves a core image. Note that the restart can take several minutes using this option.
# restart regular
Reboots the version of the ProxySG appliance that is currently installed
# restart upgrade
Reboots the system and boots the image selected as default.
# restart upgrade keep-sgos7-config
Preserve the existing 7.x configuration on upgrade.
Example
# restart upgrade
ok
See Also
n "# load" on page 81
94 of 604
# restore-defaults
Synopsis
Restores the ProxySG appliance to the default configuration. When you restore system defaults, the ProxySG appliance’s IP
address, default gateway, and the DNS server addresses are cleared. In addition, any lists (for example, forwarding or bypass)
are cleared. After restoring system defaults, you need to restore the ProxySG appliance’s basic network settings and reset any
customized configuration elements.
Syntax
# restore-defaults {subcommand}
Subcommands
# restore-defaults factory-defaults
Reinitializes the appliance to the original settings it had when it was shipped from the factory. This option resets all system
settings, including the setup console password.
# restore-defaults force
Restores the system defaults without confirmation. If you don’t use the force command, you are not prompted to enter y or n
before restoration can proceed.
# restore-defaults keep-console [force]
Restores defaults except settings required for console access. Using the keep-console option retains the following settings:
n Settings for all consoles (Telnet-, SSH-, HTTP-, and HTTPS-consoles), whether they are enabled, disabled, or deleted.
n IP Addresses, including Gateways and DNS (VIPs are not retained)
n Static Routes information
If you use the force command, you are not prompted to enter y or n before restoration can proceed.
Example
# restore-defaults
Restoring defaults requires a restart to take effect.
The current configuration will be lost and the system will be restarted.
Continue with restoring? (y/n)[n]: n
Existing configuration preserved.
See Also
n "Maintaining the Appliance" in SGOS Administration Guide
95 of 604
# reveal-advanced
Synopsis
Enables all or a subset of the advanced commands available to you when using the CLI. You can also use "# hide-advanced"
on page 75 to reveal hidden commands.
Syntax
# reveal-advanced {subcommand}
Subcommands
# reveal-advanced all
Reveals all advanced commands.
# reveal-advanced expand
Expands all advanced commands.
Example
# reveal-advanced all
ok
See Also
n "# hide-advanced" on page 75
96 of 604
# show
Synopsis
Displays all the show commands available in the standard mode in addition to commands available only in privileged mode and
configuration mode. This section discusses the show commands that are available only in privileged mode.
Syntax
> show {subcommand}
Subcommands
# show adn
Displays ADN configuration. See "# show adn" on page 100.
# show archive-configuration
Displays archive configuration settings.
# show attack-detection
Displays client attack-detection settings and client and server statistics. See "# show attack-detection" on page 101.
# show cachepulse
Displays CachePulse statistics, such as license information, registration status, the download URL for the CachePulse
database, results of the last download, and the last successful download.
# show configuration
Displays system configuration. See "# show configuration" on page 102.
# show connection-forwarding
Displays TCP connection forwarding status and peer IP address list.
# show content
Displays content-management commands.
# show realms
Displays the status of each realm.
# show security
Displays security settings. See "# show security" on page 107.
# show session-monitor
97 of 604
Displays the session monitor, which monitors RADIUS accounting messages and maintains a session table based on the
information in these messages.
# show ssh-console
Displays SSH console settings. See "# show ssh-console" on page 109.
# show ssl
Also available in standard mode, this command offers more options in privileged mode. See "# show ssl" on page 111.
# show system-resource-metrics
Displays system resource statistics.
# show threat-risk [risk-levels]
Displays Threat Risk Levels service information or supported Threat Risk Levels. You must have a Threat Risk Levels
database and a valid subscription in order to use this feature.
# show tunnel-on-protocol-error
Displays tunnel on protocol error setting.
# show ui
Displays UI version details.
Example
# show system-resource-metrics
Title Health Monitor Stats
Version 1.1
Overall Health
Current State : WARNING
Last Transition : Thu, 11 Jul 2019 17:34:43 UTC
Health Stats
Stat: CPU Utilization
Current State : OK
Current Value : 2
Unit of Measurement : percent
Warning Threshold : 80
Warning Interval : 120
Critical Threshold : 95
Critical Interval : 120
Notification Method : log
98 of 604
Stat: Memory Utilization

Current State : OK
Current Value : 34
Unit of Measurement : percent
Warning Threshold : 90
Warning Interval : 120
Critical Threshold : 95
Critical Interval : 120
Notification Method : log
...
99 of 604
# show adn
Synopsis
Displays ADN settings and statistics.
Syntax
# show adn {subcommand}
Subcommands
# show adn byte-cache
Displays ADN byte-cache settings.
# show adn routing [advertise-internet-gateway | server-subnets]
Displays ADN routing settings.
# show adn tunnel
Displays ADN tunnel configuration.
Example
# show adn
Application Delivery Network Configuration:
ADN: disabled
Manager port: 3034
Tunnel port: 3035
Primary manager: none
Backup manager: none
External VIP: none
Byte-cache Configuration:
Max number of peers: 10347
Max peer memory: 30
Tunnel Configuration:
TCP window size: 65536
reflect-client-ip : use-local-ip
Routing Configuration:
Internet Gateway: disabled
Exempt Server subnet: 10.0.0.0/8
100 of 604
# show attack-detection
Synopsis
Displays client attack-detection settings and client and server statistics.
Syntax
# show attack-detection {subcommand}
Subcommands
# show attack-detection client [blocked | connections | statistics]
Displays client attack-detection settings.
# show attack-detection configuration
Displays attack-detection configuration.
# show attack-detection server [statistics]
Displays server connection failure statistics.
Example
# show attack-detection client blocked
Client blocking is disabled
101 of 604
Synopsis
Shows current configuration that differs from default configuration.
Syntax
# show configuration [subcommand]
Subcommands
Displays all configuration settings.
# show configuration brief
Displays the configuration without inline expansion.
# show configuration expanded
Displays the configuration with inline expansion.
# show configuration listing
Displays results of configuration database load.
# show configuration noprompts
Show configuration without --More-- prompts
# show configuration post-setup
Show configuration changes made after console setup.
# show configuration versions
Show versions of configuration installed.
Example
Assuming non-default settings of:
n policy = <Proxy> DENY
n IP address of 10.167.42.38
# show configuration brief

interface 0:0 ;mode
ip-address 10.167.42.38
102 of 604
exit
# show configuration expanded
interface 0:0 ;mode
ip-address 10.167.42.38
exit
!
inline policy local "end-326998078-inline"
<Proxy>
DENY
end-326998078-inline
103 of 604
# show content
Synopsis
Displays content-management commands.
Syntax
# show content {subcommand}
Subcommands
# show content outstanding-requests
Displays the complete list of outstanding asynchronous content revalidation and distribute requests.
# show content outstanding-requests deletes
Displays regex deletes in-progress.
# show content outstanding-requests revalidates
Displays regex revalidates in-progress.
# show content outstanding-requests priority
Displays regex priority commands in-progress.
# show content priority [regex regular_expression | url URL]
Displays the deletion priority value assigned to the specified regular expression or URL.
# show content statistics
Displays content management statistics.
# show content url url
Displays statistics of the specified URL To enter file or directory names that contain spaces, substitute each space with the
following escape code: %20. If the url contains a percent sign, substitute the % with %25.
To show a CIFS file, the url should conform to the following format:
To show HTTP content, the url should use the following format:
http://host:port/path-to-file
To show FTP content, the url should use the following format:
ftp://host:port/path-to-file
104 of 604
To show streaming content, the url should use one of the following formats:
rtsp://host:port/path-to-file
mms://host:port/path-to-file
105 of 604
# show netflow
See # show netflow for details on this command.
106 of 604
# show security
Synopsis
Displays information about security parameters.
Syntax
# show security [subcommand]
Subcommands
# show security
Displays all security settings on the system.
# show security authentication-errors
Displays all authentication errors.
# show security authentication-forms
Displays authentication forms configured on the system.
# show security local-user-list
Displays the local user list configured on the system.
# show security local-user-list-group
Displays the groups in local user list.
# show security local-user-list-user
User in local user list
# show security trust-package
Displays information about the trust package download settings and the status of the latest download.
Example
# show security
Account:
Username: "admin"
Hashed Password: $1$it$24YXwuAGbmvQl7zhaeG5u.
Hashed Enable Password: $1$U1JZbCl1$itmTNhAwhymF2BNwBnum1/
Hashed Front Panel PIN: "$1$50KI$KR0RtYxQl02Z26cLy.Pq5."
Management console display realm name: ""
Web interface session timeout: 15 minutes
CLI session timeout: 5 minutes
107 of 604
Access control is disabled

Access control list (source, mask):
Flush credentials on policy update is enabled
Default authenticate.mode: auto
Transparent proxy authentication:
Method: cookie
Cookie type: session
Cookie virtual-url: "www.cfauth.com/"
IP time-to-live: 15
Verify IP: yes
Allow redirects: no
108 of 604
# show ssh-console
Synopsis
Displays the SSH console details.
Syntax
# ssh-console {subcommand}
Subcommands
# show ssh-console ciphers
Displays the currently selected SSH ciphers, the default set of ciphers, and the available choices of ciphers. Fewer ciphers are
available or selected if the appliance is in FIPS mode.
# show ssh-console client-key [username]
Displays the client key fingerprint for the specified username.
# show ssh-console director-client-key [key_id]
Displays all client key fingerprints or the client key fingerprint of the specified key ID.
# show ssh-console hmacs
Displays the SSH HMAC algorithms currently configured, the default set of HMAC algorithms, and the available choices of
HMAC algorithms. Fewer HMACs are selected or available if the appliance is in FIPS mode.
# show ssh-console host-public-key [ecdsa | ed25519 | rsa]
Displays the specified SSHV2 host public key. If you do not specify the type, the RSA key is shown if installed.
# show ssh-console management-center-client-key [key_id]
Displays all client key fingerprints or the client key fingerprint of the specified key ID.
# show ssh-console user-list
Displays a list of users with imported RSA client keys.
# show ssh-console versions-enabled
Indicates whether SSHv2 is enabled.
# show ssh-console welcome-banner
Displays the content of the SSH welcome banner, if one is already configured through the #(config ssh-console) inline
welcome-banner command.
109 of 604
Example
# show ssh-console versions-enabled
SSHv2 is enabled.
110 of 604
# show ssl
Synopsis
Shows SSL certificates and keyrings information.
Syntax
# show ssl {subcommand}
Subcommands
# show ssl appliance-certificate-request
Displays the appliance certificate signing request (CSR) configuration.
# show ssl ca-certificate name
Displays the specified CA certificate configuration.
# show ssl ccl name
Displays currently configured CA certificate lists (CCLs) or configuration for the specified list. This option can also be viewed
from standard mode.
# show ssl certificate keyring_id
Displays the certificate configuration for the specified keyring.
# show ssl crl crl_id
Displays the SSL certificate Revocation List (CRL) of the specified ID.
# show ssl ecl name
Displays the specified external certificate list (ECL) configuration.
# show ssl external-certificate name
Displays the specified external certificate configuration.
# show ssl force-secure-renegotiation
Displays SSL force secure renegotiation configuration.
# show ssl hsm [name]
Displays a summary of HSM configuration or the specified HSM.
# show ssl hsm-keyring [name]
Displays a summary of HSM keyring configuration or the specified HSM keyring.
111 of 604
# show ssl hsm-keygroup [name]
Displays a summary of HSM keygroup configuration or the specified HSM keygroup.
# show ssl intermediate-cert-cache certificate [detail | summary]
Displays cached intermediate certificate details or a summary.
# show ssl intermediate-cert-cache status
Displays the current status of the intermediate certificate cache.
# show ssl keydata
Show keydata configuration.
# show ssl keypair {aes128-cbc | aes256-cbc | unencrypted} keyring_id
Displays the keypair. To view the keypair in an encrypted format, specify aes128-cbc or aes128-cbc before the keyringID. You
are then prompted for the challenge entered when the keyring was created.
# show ssl keyring [keyring_id]
Displays all keyrings configuration or the specified keyring.
# show ssl keyring expiring-in
Displays all keyrings that are expiring.
# show ssl keyring unreferenced
Displays all keyrings that are not referenced in configuration.
# show ssl keylist [[verbose] keylist_name]
Displays all keylists, or the specified keylist.
# show ssl ocsp
Displays SSL OCSP configuration.
# show ssl proxy
Displays SSL proxy configuration.
# show ssl signing-request keyring_id
Displays the signed CSR for the specified keyring.
# show ssl ssl-client ssl_client
Displays information about all SSL clients or the specified SSL client. This option can also be viewed from standard mode.
# show ssl ssl-device-profile [ssl_device_profile]
112 of 604
Displays a summary of all currently configured SSL device profiles or the specified SSL device profile.
# show ssl ssl-nego-timeout
Displays SSL negotiation timeout configuration.
# show ssl sslv-offload
Show SSLV offload configuration information.
# show ssl summary [ca-certificate | crl | external-certificate]
Displays the SSL summary information for CA certificates, CRLs, or external certificates.
Example
# show ssl keyring
Keyring ID: appliance-key
Private key showability: no-show
Signing request: present
Certificate: present
Certificate subject: /C=US/ST=CA/O=Blue Coat Systems, Inc./OU=Blue Coat SG300
Series/CN=4410162148
Certificate issuer: /C=US/ST=California/L=Sunnyvale/O=Blue Coat Systems, Inc./OU=Blue Coat,
ABRCA/CN=abrca.bluecoat.com/emailAddress=sysadmin@bluecoat.com
Certificate valid from: Apr 29 14:10:29 2019 GMT
Certificate valid to: Apr 29 20:10:29 2024 GMT
Certificate thumbprint: 4F:DC:2A:93:5F:08:70:ED:A6:48:5A:57:CD:7F:95:82
Keylist membership:
...
113 of 604
# temporary-route
Synopsis
Manages temporary route entries. After a reboot these routes are lost.
Syntax
# temporary-route {subcommand}
Subcommands
# temporary-route add destination_address netmask gateway_address
Adds a temporary route entry.
# temporary-route delete destination_address
Deletes a temporary route entry.
Example
# temporary-route delete destination_address
ok
114 of 604
# test
See "> test" on page 52.
115 of 604
# traceroute
See "> traceroute" on page 54.
116 of 604
# traceroute6
See "> traceroute6" on page 55.
117 of 604
# unregister-with-management-center
Synopsis
Remove the appliance from Management Center.
Syntax
# unregister-with-management-center
Example
ok
118 of 604
# upload
Synopsis
Uploads the current access log or running configuration to a configured host.
Syntax
# upload {subcommand}
Subcommands
# upload access-log {all | log log_name}
Uploads all access logs or the specified log to a configured host.
# upload configuration
Uploads running configuration to a configured host.
Example
# upload configuration
ok
119 of 604
Configure Mode Commands

This section describes and provides examples for privileged mode configure command, which allows you to configure the
ProxySG appliance settings.
The configure command, available only in enable mode, allows you to configure the Symantec ProxySG settings from your
current terminal session (configure terminal), or by loading a text file of configuration settings from the network (configure
network).
The prompt changes from a pound sign (#) to a # (config) prompt, indicating that you are in configure mode.
Enter configure mode from privileged mode by using the configure command:
# conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CTRL-Z.
# (config)
No additional password is required to enter configure mode.
120 of 604
# (config) accelerated-pac
Synopsis
Configures PAC file settings.
Syntax
# (config) accelerated-pac {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) accelerated-pac no path
Clears the configured path to download the PAC file.
# (config) accelerated-pac path url
Specifies the location on a Web server from which the PAC file should be downloaded.
Example
# (config) accelerated-pac path http://www.comp.com/pac/accelerated_pac_base
ok
# (config) load accelerated-pac
ok
See Also
n "# inline" on page 76
n "# load" on page 81
n "Explicit and Transparent Proxy" in SGOS Administration Guide
121 of 604
# (config) access-log
Synopsis
The appliance can maintain an access log for each HTTP request made. The access log can be stored in one of three formats,
which can be read by a variety of reporting utilities.
Syntax
This changes the prompt to:
# (config access-log)
Subcommands
# (config access-log) create loglog_name
Creates an access log.
# (config access-log) create formatformat_name
Creates an access log format.
# (config access-log) cancel-upload all
Cancels upload of all logs.
# (config access-log) cancel-upload loglog_name
Cancels the specified log upload.
# (config access-log) default-logging {cifs | dns | epmapper | ftp | http | https-forward-proxy |

https-reverse-proxy | im | mapi | mms | p2p | rtsp | socks | ssl | tcp-tunnel | telnet} log_name
Creates the default log for the specified protocol.
# (config access-log) delete loglog_name
Deletes an access log.
# (config access-log) delete formatformat_name
Deletes an access log format.
# (config access-log) disable
Disables access logging.
# (config access-log) early-upload megabytes
122 of 604
Sets the log size in megabytes that triggers an early upload.
# (config access-log) edit format format_name
Changes the prompt to (see "# (config format format_name)" on page 125.
# (config access-log) edit log log_name
Changes the prompt to (see "# (config log log_name)" on page 127.
# (config access-log) enable
Enables access logging.
# (config access-log) exit
Returns to # (config) mode.
# (config access-log) max-log-sizemegabytes
Sets the maximum size in megabytes that logs can reach.
# (config access-log) no default-logging {cifs | dns | epmapper | ftp | http | https-forward-proxy |

https-reverse-proxy | im | mapi | mms | p2p | rtsp | socks | ssl | tcp-tunnel | telnet}
Disables default logging for the specified protocol.
# (config access-log) overflow-policy delete
Deletes the oldest log entries (up to the entire log).
# (config access-log) overflow-policy stop
Stops access logging until logs are uploaded.
# (config access-log) upload {all | log_name}
Uploads all logs or the specified log.
# (config access-log) view
Displays access logging settings.
# (config access-log) view default-logging
Displays the access log default policy.
# (config access-log) view format [brief | format_name]
Displays the entire log format configuration, a brief version of the log format configuration, or the configuration for a specific log
format.
# (config access-log) view log [brief | log_name]
123 of 604
Displays the entire access log configuration, a brief version of the access log configuration, or the configuration for a specific
access log.
# (config access-log) view [statistics {log_name]
Displays access log statistics for all logs or for the specified log.
Example
# (config access-log) create log test
ok
# (config access-log) max-log-size 1028
ok
# (config access-log) overflow-policy delete
ok
See Also
n “Configuring Access Logging” in SGOS Administration Guide
124 of 604
# (config format format_name)

Synopsis
Edit an access log format.
Syntax
# (config access-log) edit format format_name
# (config format format_name)
Subcommands
# (config format format_name) exit
Returns to # (config access-log) mode.
# (config format format_name) multi-valued-header-policy log-all-headers
Sets multi-valued header policy to log all headers.
# (config format format_name) multi-valued-header-policy log-first-header
Sets multi-valued header policy to log the first header.
# (config format format_name) multi-valued-header-policy log-last-header
Sets multi-valued header policy to log the last header.
# (config format format_name) type custom format_string
Specifies custom logging format.
# (config format format_name) type elff format_string
Specifies W3C extended log file format.
# (config format format_name) view
Shows the format settings.
125 of 604
Example
# (config access-log) edit format testformat
# (config format testformat) multi-valued-header-policy log-all-headers
ok
# (config format testformat) exit
# (config)
See Also
n "# (config) access-log" on page 122
n "Creating Custom Access Log Formats" in SGOS Administration Guide
126 of 604
# (config log log_name)

Synopsis
Configures the specified access log.
Syntax
# (config access-log)
# (config access-log) edit loglog_name
# (config log log_name)
Subcommands
# (config log log_name) bandwidth-classbwm_class_name
Specifies a bandwidth-management class for managing the bandwidth of this log.In order to bandwidth-manage this log,
bandwidth management must be enabled. Bandwidth management is enabled by default.
Note: You must also create a bandwidth class for this access log (in bandwidth-management
mode) before you can select it here. See "# (config) bandwidth-management" on page 190 for
more information
# (config log log_name) client-type { bluecoat | custom | ftp | http | kafka | none | scp }
Specifies the client to use for uploading the current access log, where:
n bluecoat: Use the Symantec Reporter client
n custom: Use the custom client
n ftp: Use the FTP client
n http: Use the HTTP client
n kafka: Use the Kafka client
n none: Disable uploads for the current log
n scp: Use the SCP client
127 of 604
Note: When changing a log’s upload type from Kafka client to another client, or from another
client to Kafka, and the kafka-client message-set-codec command is set, Symantec
recommends that you perform the following steps in the specified order to prevent upload
failures:
- Upload the access logs
- Change the upload client
- Delete all access logs with the command # (config log log_name)commands delete-
logs
For details, refer to the “Configuring the Access Log Upload Client” chapter in the SGOS
Administration Guide.
For details on configuring access log upload clients, refer to the appropriate subcommands for # (config log log_name) and
the SGOS Administration Guide.
# (config log log_name) commands cancel-upload
Disables uploads for this log.
# (config log log_name) commands close-connection
Closes a manually opened connection to the remote server.
# (config log log_name) commands delete-logs
Permanently deletes all access logs on the appliance.
# (config log log_name) commands open-connection
Manually opens a connection to the remote server.
# (config log log_name) commands rotate-remote-log
Switches to a new remote log file.
# (config log log_name) commands send-keep-alive
Sends a keep-alive log packet to the remote server.
# (config log log_name) commands test-upload
Tests the upload configuration by uploading a verification file.
# (config log log_name) commands upload-now
Uploads access log now.
# (config log log_name) connect-wait-time seconds
Sets time to wait between server connect attempts.
128 of 604
# (config log log_name) continuous-upload enable
Uploads access log continuously to remote server.
Note: You can enable continuous upload to have the logs upload in near-real time. SCP client
does not support continuous upload.
# (config log log_name) continuous-upload keep-alive seconds
Sets the interval between keep-alive log packets
# (config log log_name) continuous-upload lag-time seconds
Sets the maximum time between log packets (text upload only).
# (config log log_name) continuous-upload rotate-remote {daily rotation_hour (0-23) | hourly hours
[minutes]}
Specifies when to switch to new remote log file.
# (config log log_name) custom-client alternate hostIP_address [port]
Configures the alternate custom server address. The hostIP_address must be defined as an IPv4 address.
# (config log log_name) custom-client no {alternate | primary}
Deletes the alternate or primary custom host site.
# (config log log_name) custom-client primary hostIP_address [port]
Configures the primary custom server address. The hostIP_address must be defined as an IPv4 address.
# (config log log_name) custom-client secure {no | yes}
Selects whether to use secure connections (SSL). The default is set to no; in other words, custom-client by default is in non-
FIPS mode;
# (config log log_name) description description
Sets the log description.
# (config log log_name) early-upload megabytes
Sets log size in megabytes that triggers an early upload.
# (config log log_name) encryption certificate certificate_name
Specifies access-log encryption settings.
# (config log log_name) exit
129 of 604
Returns to # (config access-log) mode.
# (config log log_name) format-name format_name
Sets the log format.
# (config log log_name) ftp-client alternate {encrypted-password encrypted_password | host hostname

[port] | password password | path path | username username}
Configures the alternate FTP host site. The hostname can be defined as an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a domain name that
resolves to an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
# (config log log_name) ftp-client filename format
Configures the remote filename format
# (config log log_name) ftp-client no {alternate | filename | primary}
Deletes the remote filename format or the alternate or primary host parameters.
# (config log log_name) ftp-client pasv {no | yes}
Sets whether PASV or PORT command is sent.
# (config log log_name) ftp-client primary {encrypted-password encrypted_password | host hostname

Configures the primary FTP host site. The hostname can be defined as an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a domain name that
# (config log log_name) ftp-client secure {no | yes}
Selects whether to use secure connections (FTPS). The default is no. If yes, the hostname must match the hostname in the
certificate presented by the server.
# (config log log_name) ftp-client time-format {local | utc}
Selects the time format to use within upload filename.
# (config log log_name) http-client alternate {encrypted-password encrypted_password | host hostname

Configures the alternate HTTP host site. The hostname can be defined as an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a domain name that
# (config log log_name) http-client filename format
Configures the remote filename format.
# (config log log_name) http-client no {alternate | filename | primary}
Deletes the remote filename format or the alternate or primary host parameters.
130 of 604
# (config log log_name) http-client primary {encrypted-password encrypted_password | host hostname

Configures the primary HTTP host site. The hostname can be defined as an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a domain name that
# (config log log_name) http-client secure {no | yes}
Selects whether to use secure connections (HTTPS). The default is no. If yes, the hostname must match the hostname in the
certificate presented by the server
# (config log log_name) http-client time-format {local | utc}
Selects the time format to use within upload filename.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client alternate host hostname_or_IP [port]
Specify the hostname/IP address and port for the alternate Kafka broker. Configuring an alternate host is optional.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client alternate ssl-device-profile profile}
Specify an existing SSL device profile to use for mutual authentication between the alternate Kafka broker and the appliance.
Configuring an alternate host is optional.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client message-set-codec [force]
Adds the Kafka MessageSet header to the start of compressed log entries (gzip file type). By default, this setting is disabled.
To determine whether this setting is enabled or disabled, issue the # (config log log_name) view command and look for
the Use Kafka gzip codec when upload as gzip file setting in the output. Specify the force parameter to enable the codec
without the CLI prompting you for confirmation.
Note: To prevent log upload failures, Symantec recommends that you:

- Upload the access logs using Kafka client before enabling the codec
- Delete all access logs using Kafka client with the # (config log log_name) commands
delete-logs after enabling the setting. For details, refer to the “Configuring the Access Log
Upload Client” chapter in the SGOS Administration Guide.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client no [alternate | primary]
Clears the alternate or primary Kafka broker settings.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client no message-set-codec [force]
Specifies that the Kafka MessageSet header is not added to the start of compressed log entries (gzip file type); this is the
default setting. To determine whether this setting is enabled or disabled, issue the # (config log_name) view command and
look for the Use Kafka gzip codec when upload as gzip file setting in the output. Specify the force parameter to disable the
codec without the CLI prompting you for confirmation.
131 of 604
Note: To prevent log upload failures, Symantec recommends that you:

- Upload the access logs using Kafka client before enabling the codec
- Delete all access logs using Kafka client with the # (config log log_name) commands
delete-logs after enabling the setting. For details, refer to the “Configuring the Access Log
Upload Client” chapter in the SGOS Administration Guide.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client primary host hostname_or_IP [port]
Specify the hostname/IP address and port for the primary Kafka broker. Configuring a primary host is mandatory if you want to
use Kafka as an upload client.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client primary ssl-device-profile profile
Specify an existing SSL device profile to use for mutual authentication between the primary Kafka broker and the appliance.
Configuring a primary host is mandatory if you want to use Kafka as an upload client.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client secure [disable | enable]
Enables secure connection between the appliance and the Kafka broker. The SSL device profile must be set up already.
# (config log log_name) kafka-client topic format
Specifies the topic name for the log facility. You can use any string-format combination. If you do not specify a format, the
default is SG_%f, where %f is automatically replaced with the name of the log facility.
# (config log log_name) no {encryption | bandwidth-class | signing}
Disables access-log encryption, bandwidth management, or digital signing for this log.
# (config log log_name) periodic-upload enable
Uploads access log daily/hourly to remote server.
# (config log log_name) periodic-upload upload-interval {daily upload_hour (0-23) | hourly hours
[minutes]}
Specifies access log upload interval.
# (config log log_name) remote-size megabytes
Sets maximum size in MB of remote log files.
Note: Before you can use the following SCP subcommands to configure SCP for uploads, you
must configure ciphers, HMACs, and known hosts for SSH connections; see "# (config) ssh-
console" on page 552.
132 of 604
# (config log log_name) scp-client alternate {encrypted-password encrypted_password | host hostname

Configures the alternate SCP host site. The hostname can be defined as an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a domain name that
# (config log log_name) scp-client authentication {client-key | password | all}
Specifies authentication type for the SCP client, where:
n client-key means that only the SSH client key is used for authentication; see "# (config) ssh-console" on page 552.
n password means that only password authentication is used.
n all means that client keys are attempted for authentication first; if that fails, password authentication is attempted.
# (config log log_name) scp-client filename format
Configures the remote filename format.
# (config log log_name) scp-client no {alternate | filename | primary}
Clears the specified SCP client parameters.
# (config log log_name) scp-client primary {encrypted-password encrypted_password | host hostname

Configures the primary SCP host site. The hostname can be defined as an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a domain name that
# (config log log_name) scp-client time-format {local | utc}
Specifies the time format to use within the upload filename.
# (config log log_name) signing keyring keyring_id
Specifies the keyring to be used for digital signatures.
# (config log log_name) upload-type {gzip | text}
Sets upload file type (gzip or text).
# (config log log_name) view
Shows log settings.
Example
# (config access-log) edit log testlog
# (config log testlog) upload-type gzip
ok
133 of 604
# (config log testlog) exit

See Also
n "# (config) access-log" on page 122
n “Configuring the Access Log Upload Client” in SGOS Administration Guide
134 of 604
# (config) adn
Synopsis
ADN optimization allows you to reduce the amount of tunneled TCP traffic across a WAN by means of an overlay network
called an Application Delivery Network, or ADN. ProxySG devices that participate in the ADN utilize byte caching technology,
which replaces large chunks of repeated data with small tokens representing that data. ProxySG devices in the ADN also use
gzip compression to further reduce the amount of data flowing over the WAN.
Syntax
# (config) adn {subcommand}
# (config adn)
Subcommands
# (config adn) byte-cache
Configures byte caching parameters. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn byte-cache)" on page 137.
# (config adn) {enable | disable}
Enables or disables the ADN optimization network.
# (config adn) exit
# (config adn) load-balancing
Configures load-balancing parameters. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn load-balancing)" on page 139.
# (config adn) manager
Configures manager parameters. The prompt changes to "# (config adn manager)" on page 141.
# (config adn) routing
Configures routing information. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn routing)" on page 145.
# (config adn) security
Configures authorization parameters. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn security)" on page 149.
# (config adn) tunnel
Configures parameters for tunnel connections. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn tunnel)" on page 151.
# (config adn) view
135 of 604
Displays configuration of the WAN optimization parameters.
Example
# (config adn)
# (config adn) enable
ok
See Also
n "Configuring an Application Delivery Network" in SGOS Administration Guide
136 of 604
# (config adn byte-cache)

Synopsis
Configure ADN byte cache settings.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn byte-cache)
Subcommands
# (config adn byte-cache) exit
Returns to # (config adn) mode.
# (config adn byte-cache) adaptive-compression {enable | disable}
Enables or disables adaptive compression. When adaptive compression is enabled, the appliance determines whether to
increase or decrease the compression level based on CPU usage. When extra CPU is available, it will adapt compression to
use these additional resources, resulting in higher CPU usage.
# (config adn byte-cache) delete-peer peer-id [force]
Deletes the specified ADN peer. If the peer has an established dictionary or a dictionary that is manually sized, you will be
prompted to confirm that you want to proceed with the deletion. The force argument allows you to delete a peer without
confirmation.
# (config adn byte-cache) max-disk-usage percentage
Sets the maximum percentage of disk space that can be used for byte caching. When this setting is changed, an immediate
resizing is done. If the statistics have changed since the last resizing, the recommended dictionary sizes and the rankings for
each peer might change. However, if there has been no traffic (and it is still the same day), or if the changes balance out, there
might be no change to either the recommended dictionary sizes or the rankings.
# (config adn byte-cache) peer-size peer_id {size_in_megabytes | auto | none}
Manually sets the amount of memory used to keep track of the byte-cache hash table or disables compression to this peer.
Generally, the dynamic settings are acceptable; you do not need to change the dictionary size. Only if you determine that the
137 of 604
algorithm performance does not guarantee the right dictionary size for a specific peer should you manually set the dictionary
size.
# (config adn byte-cache) view
Views the current configuration of the byte caching parameters.
Example
# (config adn byte-cache) max-peer-memory 40
ok
138 of 604
# (config adn load-balancing)

Synopsis
Configure load balancing parameters.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn load-balancing)
Subcommands
# (config adn load-balancing) {enable | disable}
Enables or disables load-balancing functionality.
# (config adn load-balancing) exit
Returns to # (config adn) mode.
# (config adn load-balancing) external-vip IP_address
Sets the external VIP. The IP_address can be either IPv4 or IPv6, but must be reachable by all branch peers. The same VIP
must be configured on each ProxySG appliance in the cluster, and the VIP must exist on an external load balancing device.
The external VIP is used in explicit external load balancing.
# (config adn load-balancing) group group_name
Sets the group name for an ADN group. Groups are used in transparent load balancing.
# (config adn load-balancing) load-balance-only {enable | disable}
Specifies whether the node can take participate in load balancing (disable) or if it acts as a load balancer only (enable).
# (config adn load-balancing) no {external-vip | group}
Removes the external VIP or group name.
# (config adn load-balancing) view
Displays the load-balancing configuration.
139 of 604
Example
# (config adn load-balancing) group EAST2
ok
140 of 604
# (config adn manager)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
Subcommands
# (config adn manager) approved-peers
Configures approved-peers. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn approved-peers)" on page 143.
# (config adn manager) backup-manager {IP_address [device_id] | self | none}
Defines the backup ADN manager; the IP_address can be IPv4 or IPv6. While optional, defining a backup ADN manager is
highly recommended. If the primary ADN manager goes offline for any reason, routing updates are no longer available which
prevent nodes from learning when other nodes enter and leave the network. Existing route information is still retained by the
peers, however.
# (config adn manager) exit
Exits the # (config adn manager) submode and returns to # (config adn) mode.
# (config adn manager) open-adn {enable | disable}
Enables or disables Open-ADN mode.
# (config adn manager) pending-peers
Configures pending peers. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn pending-peers)" on page 144.
# (config adn manager) port port_number
Sets the port number for the primary and backup ADN managers. All ProxySG devices in the ADN must use the same
manager port number. The default is port 3034; it should not be changed.
# (config adn manager) primary-manager {IP_address [device_id] | self | none}
141 of 604
Defines the primary ADN manager; the IP_address can be IPv4 or IPv6. The responsibility of the ADN manager is to keep up
to date the routing information from each ProxySG node on the WAN optimization network and to broadcast that information to
all the peers.
# (config adn manager) secure-port port_number
Sets the listening port for the secure ADN manager.
# (config adn manager) view
Views the ADN manager configuration.
Example
# (config adn manager) primary-manager 2001:418:9804:111::169
ok
# (config adn manager) backup-manager 10.25.36.48
ok
142 of 604
# (config adn approved-peers)

Synopsis
Configure ADN approved peers.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn manager) approved-peers
# (config adn approved-peers)
Subcommands
# (config adn approved-peers) add device_id
Add an approved peer.
# (config adn approved-peers) exit
Exits the # (config adn approved-peers) submode and returns to "# (config adn manager)" on page 141 mode.
# (config adn approved-peers) remove {device_id | all [force]}
Removes the specified peer(s), or all peers, from the approved peers list. Specify the force parameter to remove peers
without a confirmation prompt.
# (config adn approved-peers) view
Views the list of approved devices and connections, as well as the device ID of the ADN manager and backup manager.
143 of 604
# (config adn pending-peers)

Synopsis
Configure ADN pending peers.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn manager) pending-peers
# (config adn pending-peers)
Subcommands
# (config adn pending-peers) {accept | reject} {device_id | all}
Allows or denies a specific peer or all peers that want to join a network.
# (config adn pending-peers) {enable | disable}
Enables or disables the pending-peers functionality.
# (config adn pending-peers) exit
Exits the # (config adn pending-peers) submode and returns to "# (config adn manager)" on page 141 mode.
# (config adn pending-peers) view
Views the list of pending devices and connections.
144 of 604
# (config adn routing)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
Subcommands
# (config adn routing) advertise-internet-gateway
Enables the ProxySG appliance as an Internet gateway. Changes the prompt to "# (config adn routing advertise-internet-
gateway)" on the next page.
# (config adn routing) prefer-transparent {enable | disable}
Forces peers to always use advertised routes or to allows them to use transparent routes if they are available.
# (config adn routing) exit
Returns to "# (config) adn" on page 135 mode.
# (config adn routing) server-subnets
Configures server-subnets that will be advertised to other peers on the WAN optimization network. Changes the prompt to "#
(config adn routing server-subnets)" on page 147.
# (config adn routing) view
Views the current parameters of the routing configuration.
145 of 604
# (config adn routing advertise-internet-gateway)

Synopsis
Enables the ProxySG appliance as an Internet gateway.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn routing) advertise-internet-gateway
# (config adn routing advertise-internet-gateway)
Subcommands
# (config adn routing advertise-internet-gateway) {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the ability for this peer to be used as an Internet gateway.
# (config adn routing advertise-internet-gateway) exempt-subnets {add {subnet_prefix[/prefix_length]}

| clear-all | remove {subnet_prefix[/prefix_length]} | view}
Manages subnets that must not be routed to Internet gateway(s). The subnets can be IPv4, IPv6, or a combination. The subnet
prefix can be in either IPv4 or IPv6 format.
# (config adn routing advertise-internet-gateway) exit
Returns to "# (config adn routing)" on the previous page submode.
# (config adn routing advertise-internet-gateway) view
Displays the advertise-internet-gateway configuration.
Forces peers to always use advertised routes or to allows them to use transparent routes if they are available.
146 of 604
# (config adn routing server-subnets)

Synopsis
Configure server-subnets that will be advertised to other peers on the WAN optimization network. The server subnets can be
IPv4, IPv6, or both.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn routing server-subnets)
Subcommands
# (config adn routing server-subnets) add subnet_prefix[/prefix length]
Adds a subnet with the specified prefix and, optionally, the prefix length, to the ProxySG appliance routes that it sends to the
ADN manager. The subnet prefix can be in either IPv4 or IPv6 format.
# (config adn routing server-subnets) clear-all
Deletes all subnets listed on the system.
# (config adn routing server-subnets) remove subnet_prefix[/prefix length]
Removes a subnet with the specified prefix and, optionally, the prefix length, to the ProxySG routes that it sends to the ADN
manager. The subnet prefix can be in either IPv4 or IPv6 format.
# (config adn routing server-subnets) exit
Returns to "# (config adn routing)" on page 145 submode.
# (config adn routing server-subnets) view
Views the current configuration of the server subnets.
147 of 604
Example
# (config adn routing server-subnets) clear-all
ok
# (config adn routing server-subnets) add 10.9.59.0/24
ok
# (config adn routing server-subnets) add 2001:418:9804:100::84/128
ok
148 of 604
# (config adn security)

Synopsis
Configure authorization parameters.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn) security
# (config adn security)
Subcommands
# (config adn security) authorization {enable | disable}
Enables connection authorization.
# (config adn security) exit
Leaves the security submode. Returns to "# (config) adn" on page 135 mode.
# (config adn security) manager-listening-mode {plain-only | plain-read-only | secure-only | both}
Configures manager listening mode. Both refers to plain-only or secure-only.
# (config adn security) no ssl-device-profile
Clears the SSL device profile name.
# (config adn security) secure-outbound {none | secure-proxies | all}
Configures outbound connection encryption, where none indicates the encryption is disabled, secure-proxies enables
encryption on secure proxy (that is, HTTPS or SSL) traffic, and all indicates that encryption is enabled on all outbound
connections.
# (config adn security) ssl-device-profile profile_name [no-authorization]
Sets the SSL device profile for ADN.
# (config adn security) tunnel-listening-mode {plain-only | secure-only | both}
Starts the specified tunnel listening mode.
149 of 604
# (config adn security) view
Displays security configuration.
Example
Set the SSL device profile "default" for ADN.
# (config adn security) ssl-device-profile default

ok
150 of 604
# (config adn tunnel)

Synopsis
Configures parameters for tunnel connections. Tunnel connections are established between ADN peers in order to carry
optimized traffic over the WAN.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
Subcommands
# (config adn tunnel) connect-transparent {enable [fast | regular] | disable}
Control outbound ADN transparent tunnel initiation.
# (config adn tunnel) exit
Returns to "# (config) adn" on page 135 mode.
# (config adn tunnel) last-peer-detection {enable | disable}
Allows traffic to be optimized across the entire data path of a transparent ADN deployment: from the branch office, through one
or more intermediate concentrators, all the way to the main data center.
# (config adn tunnel) port port_number
Sets the port number for the client or data port used by ADN tunnel connections. Each ADN node has a TCP listener on this
port in order to receive tunnel connections. The default is port 3035; it should not be changed.
# (config adn tunnel) preferred-ip-addresses
Configures a list of preferred tunnel or control IP addresses. Changes prompt to "# (config adn tunnel preferred-ip-addresses)"
on page 153.
# (config adn tunnel) preserve-dest-port {enable | disable}
Preserve destination port on outbound connections
# (config adn tunnel) reflect-client-ip {allow | deny | use-local-ip}
151 of 604
Deprecated but available for backward compatibility purposes.
Configures the Concentrator peer to follow (allow), reject (deny), or ignore (use-local-ip) the Branch peer reflect-client-ip
settings. When allow is specified, both ProxySG and ProxyClient branch peers will be set to allow. When deny is specified,
ProxySG branch peers will be set to deny, and ProxyClient peers will be set to use-local-ip. When use-local-ip is specified,
both ProxySG and ProxyClient Branch peers will be set to use-local-ip. The local IP is the IP address of the Concentrator
ProxySG.
# (config adn tunnel) reflect-client-ip peer-sg {allow | deny | use-local-ip}
Determines the behavior of the ADN Concentrator peer when a ProxySG Branch peer requests client IP reflection for an
inbound tunnel connection. The allow option allows the request and reflects the client IP. The deny option rejects the request
and the connection. The use-local-ip option allows the connection but uses the IP address of the Concentrator peer.
# (config adn tunnel) reflect-client-ip proxy-client {allow | deny | use-local-ip}
Determines the behavior of the ADN Concentrator peer when a ProxyClient peer requests client IP reflection for an inbound
tunnel connection. The allow option allows the request and reflects the client IP. The deny option rejects the request and the
connection. The use-local-ip option allows the connection but uses the IP address of the Concentrator peer.
# (config adn tunnel) secure-port port_number
Configure listening port for secure ADN tunnel
# (config adn tunnel) tcp-window-size {auto | size_in_bytes}
Sets the TCP window size for ADN optimization tunnel connections based on current network conditions and on the receiving
host’s acknowledgement. Auto is the default; under most circumstances, this option should not be set manually.
# (config adn tunnel) view
Views the current configuration ADN tunnel parameters.
Example
# (config adn tunnel) tcp-window-size 200000
ok
152 of 604
# (config adn tunnel preferred-ip-addresses)

Synopsis
Configure a list of preferred tunnel or control IP addresses. By default, the list is empty; this means that all IP addresses
configured on the ProxySG appliance are eligible to be used for inbound ADN control connections and explicit tunnel
connections. The IP addresses that are not in the preferred list will not be advertised for use in tunnel and control connections.
Note that this list indicates a preference only; if the concentrator gets an inbound ADN connection on an IP address that is not
in the preferred list, that connection is still accepted. In an open, unmanaged transparent ADN deployment, the concentrator
looks at the list of preferred IP addresses and determines which IP address to send to the branch peer by following the
guidelines below:
n The concentrator’s first choice is to use a preferred IP address of the same address family as the source address on the
interface that the connection came on.
n If that’s not possible, it uses a preferred IP address of the same address family as the source address, on an interface
that is different from the interface that the connection came on.
n If the concentrator can’t use an IP from the same address family, the concentrator uses a preferred IP address of a
different address family on the interface that the connection came on.
n If the same interface isn’t possible, it uses a preferred IP address of a different address family, on an interface that is
different from the interface that the connection came on.
n If none of the above are applicable, the concentrator uses the first data IP address in the preferred IP list.
Note: If there isn’t a preferred list, the concentrator selects the first IP configured on the
incoming tunnel connection interface.
Syntax
# (config) adn
# (config adn)
# (config adn tunnel) preferred-ip-addresses
# (config adn tunnel preferred-ip-addresses)
153 of 604
Subcommands
# (config adn tunnel preferred-ip-addresses) add IP_address
Adds an IP address to the preferred list. The IP address can be IPv4 or IPv6. This list is communicated to
ADN peers so that they can form explicit tunnels and control connections.
# (config adn tunnel preferred-ip-addresses) clear-all
Removes all IP addresses from the preferred list. When the list is empty, all IP addresses configured on the appliance are
available for tunnel and control connections.
# (config adn tunnel preferred-ip-addresses) remove IP_address
Removes the specified IP address from the preferred list. This IP address will no longer be preferred for tunnel and control
connections. Existing control/tunnel connections using a deleted IP address will not be effected; only new connections will use
the new configuration.
# (config adn tunnel preferred-ip-addresses) view
Displays the list of preferred IP addresses.
154 of 604
# (config) alert
Synopsis
Configures the notification properties of hardware environmental metrics (called sensors) and the threshold and notification
properties of system resource health monitoring metrics. These health monitoring metrics allow you to assess the health of the
ProxySG appliance.
Setting Notifications
The following notification options are available:
n email: Notify using e-mail (set in the #(config event-log) mail command)
n log: Notify using Event log
n trap: Notify using SNMP trap
n none: Disable notification
To set more than one type of notification, separate the notification method with spaces as follows:
#(config) alert notification license-utilization users email log trap
Setting Thresholds
For the purposes of notification, thresholds are defined by two variables, the threshold level and the threshold interval:
n The threshold level describes the state of the metric: OK, Warning, or Critical.
n The threshold interval specifies the maximum period of time that metric can be in a state. When that period of time is
exceeded, an alert is sent
Consider the following command:
#(config) alert threshold cpu-utilization 80 20 90 20
The preceding command sets the cpu-utilization threshold values as follows:
n Warning Threshold: 80%
n Warning Interval: 20 seconds
n Critical Threshold: 90%
n Critical Interval: 20 seconds
In this example, if CPU activity hovers between 80% and 89% for 20 seconds, the cpu-utilization metric is considered to be in
the Warning state. A notification is sent when a threshold state changes, for example, from OK to Warning.
155 of 604
Note: See "Sensor and System Metrics" on page 160 for details on thresholds for specific
metrics.
Note: Sensor thresholds are not configurable.
Licensing Thresholds and Metrics

License expiration alert settings can be modified for the following licenses.
n sgos: Alert properties for SGOS
n ssl: Alert properties for SSL Proxy
n cloud-common-policy: Alert properties for cloud common policy
The threshold values for license expiration metrics are set in days until expiration. In this context, a Critical threshold indicates
that license expiration is imminent. This is the only metric in which the Critical threshold value should be smaller than the
Warning threshold value. For example, if you set the Warning threshold to 45, an alert is sent when there are 45 days remaining
in the license period. The Critical threshold would be less than 45 days.
For the license expiration metrics, the threshold interval is irrelevant and is set by default to 0. The Critical threshold is
configured to 0, which means that a trap is immediately sent upon license expiration. Set the Warning threshold to a value that
gives you ample time to renew your license.
Syntax
# (config) alert {subcommand}
Subcommands
#(config) alert notification adn {connection | manager} {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for ADN connection and ADN manager status.
#(config) alert notification application-attributes expiration {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Application Attributes license expiration.
#(config) alert notification application-classification expiration {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Application Classification license expiration.
#(config) alert notification application-protection expiration {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Application Protection license expiration.
#(config) alert notification cachepulse expiration {email | log | none | trap}
156 of 604
Configures notifications for CachePulse license expiration.
#(config) alert notification cloud-casb-gatelet entitlement {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for CASB integration in Web Security Services entitlement.
#(config) alert notification cloud-common-policy {communication-status | entitlement} {email | log

| none | trap}
Configures notification for Common Policy in Web Security Services communication status and entitlement.
#(config) alert notification content-filter entitlement {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Symantec content filtering entitlement.
#(config) alert notification cpu-utilization {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for CPU utilization.
#(config) alert notification disk-status {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notification for disk status.
#(config) alert notification failover {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notification for failover status.
#(config) alert notification geolocation expiration {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Geolocation license expiration.
#(config) alert notification health-check {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for health checks status.
#(config) alert notification icap {deferred-connections | queued-connections} {email | log

| none | trap}
Configures notifications for ICAP deferred connections and queued connections.
#(config) alert notification license-expiration {base | ssl} {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for base license and SSL license expiration.
#(config) alert notification license-utilization users {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Concurrent User Limit utilization.
#(config) alert notification memory-utilization {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for memory utilization.
#(config) alert notification network-utilization adapter[:interface] {email | log | none | trap}
157 of 604
Configures notifications for the specified interface utilization.
#(config) alert notification policy-services expiration {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Policy Services license expiration.
#(config) alert notification reboot {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for appliance reboot.
#(config) alert notification subscription communication-status {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for subscription services communication status.
#(config) alert notification threat risk expiration {email | log | none | trap}
Configures notifications for Threat Risk Levels license expiration.
#(config) alert threshold application-attributes expiration warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Application Attributes expiration.
#(config) alert threshold application-classification expiration warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Application Classification expiration.
#(config) alert threshold application-protection expiration warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Application Protection expiration.
#(config) alert threshold cachepulse expiration warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for CachePulse expiration.
#(config) alert threshold cloud-casb-gatelet entitlement warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for CASB integration in Web Security Services entitlement.
#(config) alert threshold cloud-common-policy {communication-status | entitlement} warning_threshold

critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Common Policy in Web Security Services communication status and
entitlement.
#(config) alert threshold content-filter entitlement warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Symantec content filtering entitlement.
#(config) alert notification cpu-utilization warning_threshold critical_threshold warning_interval

critical_interval
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds and intervals for CPU utilization.
#(config) alert threshold geolocation expiration warning_threshold critical_threshold
158 of 604
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Geolocation license expiration.
#(config) alert threshold icap {deferred-connections | queued-connections} warning_threshold critical_

threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for ICAP deferred connections and queued connections.
#(config) alert threshold license-expiration {base | ssl} warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for base license and SSL license expiration.
#(config) alert threshold license-utilization users warning_threshold critical_threshold warning_

interval critical_interval
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds and intervals for Concurrent User Limit utilization.
#(config) alert threshold memory-utilization warning_threshold critical_threshold warning_interval

critical_interval
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds and intervals for memory utilization.
#(config) alert threshold network-utilization adapter[:interface] [warning_threshold critical_

threshold warning_interval critical_interval]
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds and intervals for the specified interface utilization.
#(config) alert threshold policy-services expiration warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Policy Services license expiration.
#(config) alert notification threat risk expiration warning_threshold critical_threshold
Configures critical and warning alert thresholds for Threat Risk Levels license expiration.
Example
# (config) alert threshold cpu-utilization 80 20 90 20
ok
See Also
n "Sensor and System Metrics" on the next page
n "Monitoring the Appliance" in SGOS Administration Guide
159 of 604
Sensor and System Metrics

Refer to the following when configuring "# (config) alert" on page 155 thresholds.
Sensor Health Monitoring Metrics

Hardware and environmental metrics are referred to as sensors. Sensor threshold values are not configurable and are preset to
optimal values. For example, if the CPU temperature reaches 55 degrees Celsius, it is considered to have entered the Warning
threshold.
Metric MIB Threshold States
Disk status Disk Critical: Bad
Warning: Removed, Offline
OK: Present, Not Present
Temperature Sensor Critical
n Bus temperature Warning
n CPU temperature OK
Fan Sensor Critical
n CPU Fan Warning
OK
Voltage Sensor Critical
n Bus Voltage Warning
n CPU voltage OK
n Power Supply voltage
System Resource Health Monitoring Metrics

System resources are monitored using health monitoring metrics and default thresholds. Sensor thresholds are hard-coded and
cannot be configured.
Threshold and
Metric Units Notes
Interval Defaults
CPU Utilization Percentage Critical: 95/120 Measures the value of CPU 0 on multi-processor systems--not the
average of all CPU activity.
Warning: 80/120
160 of 604
Threshold and
Metric Units Notes
Interval Defaults
Memory Utilization Percentage Critical: 95/120 Memory pressure occurs when memory resources become limited,
causing new connections to be delayed.
Warning: 90/120
Network Utilization Percentage Critical: 90/120 Measures the traffic (in and out) on the interface to determine if it is
approaching the maximum allowable bandwidth.
Warning: 60/120
License Utilization Percentage Critical: 90/0 For licenses that have user limits, monitors the number of users.
Warning: 80/0
SGOS Base, SSL Proxy Days Critical: 0/0 Warns of impending license expiration. For license expiration
License Expiration metrics, intervals are ignored.
Warning: 15/0
Cloud Services: Common 0 days / 0 Critical: 0/0 Warns of impending entitlement expiration. For license expiration
Policy Entitlement metrics, intervals are ignored.
Warning: 30/0
161 of 604
# (config) appliance-name
Synopsis
Assign a name to an appliance. Use a descriptive name that helps identify the system.
Syntax
# (config) CLI {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) appliance-name name
Associates the appliance with the specified name.
Example
# (config) appliance-name ProxyDev1
ok
162 of 604
# (config application-attributes)
Synopsis
Configures the Application Attributes service and allows you to check values of specified application attributes.
Note: Make sure to type the application and attribute name correctly in commands; the CLI
does not indicate if an application or attribute name is incorrect or does not exist in the
database.
Syntax
# (config) application-attributes
Subcommands
# (config application-attributes) disable
Disables the Application Attributes service.
# (config application-attributes) download cancel
Cancels a download in progress.
# (config application-attributes) download get-now
Downloads the latest data. The CLI displays the download progress and status. If the database is already up-to-date, the
appliance does not download it again. To cancel the download in progress, press and hold CTRL+C.
# (config application-attributes) enable
Enables the Application Attributes service. Before enabling this service, enable Application Classification using the # (config
application-classification) enable command.
# (config application-attributes) exit
Returns to #(config) mode.
# (config application-attributes) no download {password | profile | url | username}
Clears the specified download parameter. Clearing the url parameter resets the database download option to the default
(direct download from Symantec).
# (config application-attributes) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
163 of 604
Sets the encrypted form of the password used during a database download from an internal server.
# (config application-attributes) download password password
Sets the password used during a database download from an internal server.
# (config application-attributes) download profile ssl_device_profile
Specifes an existing SSL device profile to use for securing connections to the internal server.
# (config application-attributes) download url URL
Sets the URL to use when downloading the database from an internal server.
# (config application-attributes) download username username
Sets the username to use when downloading the database from an internal server.
# (config application-attributes) test application_name attribute_name
Displays the value(s) of the specified application attribute. If an application or attribute name contains spaces, enclose it in
double quotation marks (") ; see the following Examples for details.
# (config application-attributes) view
Displays the current Application Attributes service settings, including download status.
# (config application-attributes) view applications attribute_name attribute_value
Displays all applications that have the specified attribute value.
# (config application-attributes) view attributes
Displays all attributes.
# (config application-attributes) view attributes application application_name
Displays all attributes that the specified application supports.
# (config application-attributes) view attributes group {group_name | sub_group_name}
Displays attributes in the specified group or sub-group.
# (config application-attributes) view possible-values attribute_name
Displays the possible values for the specified application attribute. If an attribute name contains spaces, enclose it in double
quotation marks ("). When writing policy that includes the request.application.attribute_name= condition, use this
subcommand to ensure that the CPL parameters are valid. Modifications to the database are automatically provided in updates
via the subscription feed.
Example 1
The CLI output indicates that YouTube is not vulnerable to FREAK.
164 of 604
# (config application-attributes) test youtube "not vulnerable to freak"

true
Example 2
List the applications that support SAML authentication.
# (config application-attributes) view applications "saml support" true

15five
23Company
7Geese
8x8 Account Manager
Accellion
ACL Governance Risk Compliance
...
Example 3
List the attributes available for the Outbrain web application.
#(config application-attributes) view attributes application outbrain

Active Directory integration
Command Line Interface Reference
132
CSA STAR Self-Assessment
Consumer oriented service
Controls IP range from which login is allowed
Controls sharing with internal users
Customer data not analyzed for ad targeting
...
Example 4
List the possible values for the Type of Company attribute.
#(config application-attributes) view possible-values "type of company"

Funded Startup
Private
Public
Startup
See Also
n "Filtering Web Content" in SGOS Administration Guide
165 of 604
# (config application-classification)
Synopsis
Configure Application Classification.
Note: Make sure to type the application and attribute name correctly; the CLI does not indicate
if an application or attribute name is incorrect or does not exist in the database.
Note: If you are running a new installation of 7.2.1.1 or had Intelligence Services as the data
source for application classification before upgrading to 7.2.1.1, then the #(config
application-classification) data-source {web-filter | intelligence-services}
command is removed. Support for Symantec WebFilter will be entirely removed in a future
release of SGOS 7.x. For more information, see the behavior changes for 7.2.1.1 in the SGOS
Upgrade/Downgrade WebGuide.
Syntax
# (config) application-classification
# (config application-classification)
Subcommands
# (config application-classification) data-source {intelligence-services | web-filter}
Specifes Intelligence Services or Symantec WebFilter (BCWF) as the data source.
# (config application-classification) disable
Disables Application Classification.
# (config application-classification) download {subcommand}
The data source you specify determines the download subcommands that are available; see "Download Options for
Intelligence Services" on the facing page and "Download Options for Symantec WebFilter" on page 168.
# (config application-classification) enable
Enables Application Classification.
# (config application-classification) exit
Returns to the #(config) prompt.
166 of 604
# (config application-classification) test-url URL
Displays an application and operation for a URL.
# (config application-classification) view
Display current application classification settings and database download status.
# (config application-classification) view applications
Displays all supported applications.
# (config application-classification) view applications category category_name
Displays supported applications in a specific category.
# (config application-classification) view applications group group_name
Displays applications belonging to the specified group.
# (config application-classification) view applications operation operation_name
Displays applications that support a specific operation.
# (config application-classification) view groups [application application_name]
Displays supported application groups or the groups to which the specified application belongs.
# (config application-classification) view operations
Displays all supported operations.
# (config application-classification) view operations application application_name
Displays operations supported by a specific application.
Download Options for Intelligence Services

The following download options are available when Intelligence Services is the data source.
# (config application-classification) download cancel
Cancels a download in progress. The CLI displays a Cancelling download... message while the cancellation is in progress,
and returns to the command prompt when the download is canceled.
# (config application-classification) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Sets the encrypted form of the password used when downloading from an internal server.
# (config application-classification) download get-now
Downloads the Intelligence Services database immediately. The download occurs in the foreground and you cannot use the
CLI until the download is complete. The download process can take up to several minutes to complete. To cancel the
167 of 604
download in progress, press and hold CTRL+C. The CLI displays a Cancelling download... message while the
cancellation is in progress, and returns to the command prompt when the download is canceled. If the database is already up-
to-date, the appliance does not download it again.
# (config application-classification) download get-now background
Starts the download immediately in the background. You can continue to use the CLI while download is in progress. If the
database is already up-to-date, the appliance does not download it again.
# (config application-classification) download password
Sets the password used when downloading from an internal server.
# (config application-classification) download profile ssl_device_profile
Specifies an existing SSL device profile to use for securing connections to the internal server.
# (config application-classification) download url URL
Sets the URL to use when downloading the database from an internal server.
# (config application-classification) download username username
# (config application-classification) no download {password | profile | url | username}
Clears the specified download parameter. Clearing the url parameter resets the database download option to the default (direct
download from Symantec).
Download Options for Symantec WebFilter

The following download options are available when BCWF is the data source.
# (config application-classification) download all-day
Checks for BCWF database updates all day.
# (config application-classification) download auto
Checks for database updates automatically.
# (config application-classification) download between-hours 0-23 0-23
Specifies an interval for automatic database update checks.
# (config application-classification) download cancel
# (config application-classification) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Specifies an RSA-encrypted password for database downloads.
168 of 604
# (config application-classification) download get-now
Downloads the Intelligence Services database immediately. The download occurs in the foreground and you cannot use the
CLI until the download is complete. The download process can take up to several minutes to complete. To cancel the
download in progress, press and hold CTRL+C. If the database is already up-to-date, the appliance does not download it again.
# (config application-classification) download get-now background
Starts the download immediately in the background. You can continue to use the CLI while download is in progress. If the
# (config application-classification) download password password
Sets a plaintext password for database downloads.
# (config application-classification) download url default
Uses the default download URL.
# (config application-classification) download url URL
Specifies the download URL.
# (config application-classification) download username username
Sets a username for database downloads.
# (config application-classification) no download {auto | encrypted-password | password | url |

username}
Clears the specified download parameter.
Example
Perform automatic database update checks between the hours of 2:00 AM and 4:00 AM.
# (config application-classification) download between-hours 2 4

ok
See Also
169 of 604
# (config application-protection)
Synopsis
Configure the Application Protection service.
Syntax
# (config) application-protection
# (config application-protection)
Subcommands
# (config application-protection) disable
Disables the Application Protection service. When you issue this command, it checks if application protection policy is
installed on the appliance. If it is installed, the CLI warns that disabling the Application Protection service also disables the
policy.
# (config application-protection) download cancel
# (config application-protection) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Set the encrypted form of the password to use for downloading from an internal server.
# (config application-protection) download get-now
# (config application-protection) download get-now force
Ignores any existing data (even if the database is already up-to-date) and force a fresh download of the entire database. To
cancel the download in progress, press and hold CTRL+C.
# (config application-protection) download notify-only disable
Disables the notify-only setting.
# (config application-protection) download notify-only enable
When a new database version is available for download, a notification is sent to the administrator and also recorded in the
event log. You can use this setting only after the first successful database download. Use this setting in a test environment.
# (config application-protection) download password password
Set the password used to download the database from an internal server.
170 of 604
# (config application-protection) download profile ssl_device_profile
Specify an existing SSL device profile to use for securing database downloads from an internal server.
# (config application-protection) download url URL
Set the URL of the internal server that hosts the database.
# (config application-protection) download username username
Set the username to use when downloading the database from an internal server.
# (config application-protection) enable
Enables the Application Protection service.
# (config application-protection) exit
Exits application-protection mode and returns to the # (config) prompt.
# (config application-protection) no download {password | profile | url | username}
Clear the specified download parameter. Clearing the url parameter resets the database download option to the default (direct
download from Symantec).
# (config application-protection) view
Displays the current Application Protection service settings, including download status.
Example
Enable the notify-only setting for use in a test environment.
# (config application-protection) download notify-only enable

ok
See Also
n "Web Application Protection" in the SGOS Administration Guide
171 of 604
# (config) archive-configuration
Synopsis
Archiving a ProxySG system configuration on a regular basis is always a good idea. In the rare case of a complete system
failure, restoring an appliance to its previous state is simplified by loading an archived system configuration from a remote
server. The archive contains all system settings differing from system defaults, along with any forwarding and security lists
installed on the appliance. Unless you restore the SSL configuration-passwords-key keyring from the source device, archives
can only be restored onto the same device that was the source of the archive. This is because the encrypted passwords in the
configuration (login, enable, FTP, etc.) cannot be decrypted by a device other than that on which it was encrypted. For more
information on backing up the configuration, refer to the “Backing Up the Configuration” in the SGOS Administration Guide.
Syntax
# (config) archive-configuration {subcommand}
Subcommands
# #(config) archive-configuration archive-signing {enforce-signed {enable | disable} | signing-keyring
keyring_name | verify-ccl ccl_name}
Configures the archiving signing options. A signed archive is a configuration backup that is cryptographically signed with a key
known only to the signing entity—the digital signature guarantees the integrity of the content and the identity of the originating
device. You can then use a trusted CA Certificate List (CCL) to verify the authenticity of the archive.
The enforce-signed option enforces installation of only signed archives. The signing-keyring option specifies the keyring
that will be used to sign archives. The verify-ccl option specifies the CCL to use for verifying signed archives.
# (config) archive-configuration encrypted-password encrypted_password
Encrypted password for upload host (not required for TFTP).
# (config) archive-configuration filename-prefix prefix
Specifies the prefix that should be applied to the archive configuration on upload, such as %H%A (hour in 24-hour format and
weekday). Refer to the “Backing Up the Configuration” in the SGOS Administration Guide for a complete list of file name
prefixes.
# (config) archive-configuration host hostname
Specifies the host to which the archive configuration should be uploaded. The hostname can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a
domain name that resolves to an IPv4 or IPv6 address. If an IPv6 address is specified for the hostname, it must be enclosed in
brackets, such as # (config) archive-configuration host [2001:db8:85a3::8a2e:370:7334]
If uploading over SCP, the host-key for the host must exist in the appliance’s known hosts list. See "# (config ssh-client
known-hosts)" on page 548 for details. Use the command # (config ssh-client known-hosts) fetch-host-key
hostname [port] [force].
# (config) archive-configuration no {signing-keyring | periodic-upload}
172 of 604
Clears the specified parameters.
# (config) archive-configuration password password
Specifies the password for the host to which the archive configuration should be uploaded.
# (config) archive-configuration path path
Specifies the path to the host to which the archive configuration should be uploaded. Not required for TFTP.
# (config) archive-configuration periodic-upload {daily upload_hour | minutes minutes}
Specifies a daily upload time, where upload_hour is a value from 0 to 23. Alternatively, specify an interval at which to upload
archives, where minutes is the number of minutes.
# (config) archive-configuration port port
Specifies the port to use for uploading the archive.
# (config) archive-configuration private-key-display aes128-cbc
Specifies AES128-CBC for encrypting private keys. Before using this command, define a password using # (config)
archive-configuration private-key-display passphrase. When both the cipher and a password are defined, the private
keys are displayed in the configuration.
# (config) archive-configuration private-key-display aes256-cbc
Specifies AES256-CBC for encrypting private keys. Before using this command, define a password using # (config)
archive-configuration private-key-display passphrase. When both the cipher and a password are defined, the private
keys are displayed in the configuration.
# (config) archive-configuration private-key-display no passphrase
Clears the configured passphrase and cipher selection.
# (config) archive-configuration private-key-display none
Private keys are not displayed in the configuration archive.
# (config) archive-configuration private-key-display passphrase
Set the passphrase to use for encrypting private keys in the configuration archive. The CLI prompts you to enter the
passphrase twice.
# (config) archive-configuration protocol {ftp | tftp | http | https | scp}
Uploads the archive using the specified protocol.
# (config) archive-configuration scp-authentication {password | client-key | all | none}
Configures SCP authentication, where:
173 of 604
n password: Only the remote host’s username and password are used for authentication.
Configure the username and password using:
# (config) archive-configuration username
# (config) archive-configuration password
The password must not be empty.
n client-key: Only the appliance’s SSH client keys are used for authentication.
Configure the username and password using:
# (config ssh-client client-keys) create key_type key_type_options
You can create RSA, ECDSA, or Ed25519 keys. For more information, see "# (config ssh-client client-keys)" on
page 545.
n all: Authentication is attempted first with the SSH client keys. If unsuccessful, authentication with username and
password is attempted. The event log shows which method was used successfully. Use the CLI specified above for
both the username/password configuration and the SSH client key creation.
n none: Clears configured SCP authentication parameters.
# (config) archive-configuration ssl-device-profile ssl-device-profile name
Specifies the device profile used for SSL connections. An SSL device profile contains the information required for device
authentication, including the name of the keyring that contains the private key and certificate this device uses to authenticate
itself. The default keyring is appliance-key.
# (config) archive-configuration username username
Specifies the username for the remote host to which the archive configuration should be uploaded. Not required for TFTP.
Example
# (config) archive-configuration private-key passphrase
Enter password: ********
Confirm password: ********
ok
See Also
n "# (config ssh-client client-keys)" on page 545
n “Backing Up the Configuration” in SGOS Administration Guide
174 of 604
# (config) asymmetric-route-bypass
Synopsis
When reflect-client-ip is enabled, the ProxySG appliance is able to detect asymmetric routing for intercepted
connections. New connections from the same source and destination IP pair are dynamically bypassed after asymmetric
routing is detected (detection occurs on the first reset packet). The IP pairs are added to a table that contains the list of
dynamically bypassed asymmetric routes.
Syntax
# (config) asymmetric-route-bypass
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass)
Subcommands
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) clear
Clears all asymmetric route entries.
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) {disable | enable}
Disables or enables asymmetric route detection.
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) exit
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) max-entries number_of_entries
Sets maximum number of entries allowed in the asymmetric route bypass list.
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) remove [* | source_ip] [* | destination_ip]
Removes an asymmetric bypass route.
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) server-threshold number_of_entries
Configures threshold to trigger consolidation of entries.
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) timeout minutes
Sets the expiration timeout.
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) view
Displays the current configuration.
175 of 604
Example
# (config asymmetric-route-bypass) max-entries 25000
ok
176 of 604
# (config attack-detection)
Synopsis
Configure attack detection and prevention methods.
Syntax
# (config) attack-detection
# (config attack-detection)
Subcommands
# (config attack-detection) client
Configures client-side attack detection. Changes the prompt to "# (config client)" on page 179.
# (config attack-detection) exit
Returns to the # (config) prompt.
# (config attack-detection) server
Configures server-side attack detection. Changes the prompt to "# (config server)" on page 184.
# (config attack-detection) view {client | configuration | server}
Displays the specified attack detection settings.
Example
# (config attack-detection) view configuration
Client limits enabled: false
Client interval: 20 minutes
Default client limits:

Client concurrent request limit: unlimited
Client connection limit: 100
Client failure limit: 50
Client request limit: unlimited
Client warning limit: 10
Blocked client action: Drop
Client connection unblock time: unlimited
Monitor only mode: disabled
177 of 604
See Also
n "Preventing Denial of Service Attacks" in SGOS Administration Guide
178 of 604
# (config client)
Synopsis
Configure a client for attack detection.
Syntax
# (config client)
Subcommands
# (config client) block ip_address minutes
Blocks a specific IP address for the number of minutes listed. If the optional minutes argument is omitted, the client is blocked
until explicitly unblocked.
# (config client) clear-maximum
Clears all maximum statistics.
# (config client) create {ip_address | ip_address_and_length}
Creates a client with the specified IP address or subnet.
# (config client) default {block-action {drop | send-tcp-rst} | concurrent-request-limit number_of_

requests | connection-limit number_of_tcp_connections | failure-limit number_of_requests | monitor-
only | request-limit number_of_requests | unblock-time minutes | warning-limit number_of_warnings}
Values that are used if a client does not have specific limits set.
These settings can be overridden on a per-client basis. If they are modified on a per-client basis, the specified limits become
the default for new clients. To change the limits on a per-client basis, see # (config client) edit ip_address below.
System defaults for attack-detection limits are:
n block-action: drop
n connection-limit: 100
n failure-limit: 50
n unblock-time: unlimited
n warning-limit: 10
# (config client) delete {ip_address | ip_address_and_length}
179 of 604
Deletes the specified client.
# (config client) disable-limits
Disables client limits.
# (config client) edit ip_address
Edits the specified attack detection client. Changes the prompt to "# (config client ip_address)" on page 182.
# (config client) enable limits
Enables attack detection.
# (config client) exit
Returns to "# (config attack-detection) " on page 177 mode.
# (config client) interval minutes
Indicates the amount of time, in multiples of 10 minutes, that client activity is monitored. The default is 20. That this is a global
limit that cannot be modified for individual clients.
# (config client) no default {connection-limit | failure-limit | unblock-time | warning-limit}
Clears the specified limit settings. These settings are applied to all new clients.
# (config client) unblock ip_address
Releases a specific IP address.
# (config client) view [blocked | connections | statistics]
Displays all limits for all clients, or displays clients blocked at the network level, the client connection table, or client request
failure statistics.
Example
# (config client) view
Client limits enabled: true
Client interval: 20 minutes
Default client limits:
Client limits for 10.9.17.159:
Client connection limit: unlimited
Client failure limit: unlimited
Client warning limit: unlimited
180 of 604

Client limits for 10.9.17.134:
See Also
n "# (config attack-detection) " on page 177
n "# (config client ip_address)" on the next page
181 of 604
# (config client ip_address)

Synopsis
Edit the specified attack detection client.
Syntax
# (config client)
# (config client) edit ip_address
# (config client ip_address)
Subcommands
# (config client ip_address) block-action {drop | send-tcp-rst}
When the client is at the maximum number of connections or exceeds the warning limit, drops connections that are over the
limit or sends TCP RST for connections over the limit. The default is drop.
# (config client ip_address) concurrent-request-limit number_of_requests
Sets the maximum number of concurrent client requests.
# (config client ip_address) connection-limit number_of_tcp_connections
Sets the maximum simultaneous connections between 1 and 65535. The default is 100.
# (config client ip_address) exit
Returns to "# (config client)" on page 179 mode.
# (config client ip_address) failure-limit number_of_requests
Sets the maximum number of failed requests a client is allowed before the proxy starts issuing warnings. Default is 50. This
limit can be modified on a per-client basis.
# (config client ip_address) monitor-only
Enables monitor-only mode, which logs the defined thresholds that have been exceeded, but does not enforce the rules. The
default value is disabled. This limit can be modified on a per-client basis.
182 of 604
Note: The monitor-only mode setting has a higher precedence level than the default enforce
mode. Enabling monitor-only mode disables rule enforcement.
#(config client ip_address) no {concurrent-request-limit | connection-limit | failure-limit | monitor-

only | request-limit | unblock-time | warning-limit}
Clears the specified limits on a per-client basis. If you edit an existing client’s limits to a smaller value, the new value only
applies to new connections to that client. For example, if the old value was 10 simultaneous connections and the new value is
5, existing connections above 5 are not dropped.
#(config client ip_address) request-limit integer_between_1_and_2147483647
Sets the maximum number of HTTP requests that IP sources are allowed to make during a one-minute interval. The default
value is unlimited. This limit can be applied on a per-client basis.
#(config client ip_address) unblock-time minutes
Sets the maximum amount of time a client can be blocked at the network level before the client-warning-limit is exceeded.
Time must be a multiple of 10 minutes, up to a maximum of 1440. The default is unlimited.
#(config client ip_address) view
Displays settings for the current client.
#(config client ip_address) warning-limit number_of_warnings
Specifies the number of warnings sent to the client before the client is blocked at the network level and the administrator is
notified. The default is 10; the maximum is 100.
Example
#(config client ip_address) request-limit 3000000
ok
See Also
n "# (config client)" on page 179
183 of 604
# (config server)
Synopsis
Configure a server for attack detection.
Syntax
# (config server)
Subcommands
# (config server) create hostname
Creates a server or server group that is identified by the hostname.
# (config server) delete hostname
Deletes a server or server group.
# (config server) edit hostname
Modifies the limits for the specified server. Changes prompt to "# (config server hostname)" on page 186.
# (config server) exit
Returns to "# (config attack-detection) " on page 177 mode.
# (config server) view [statistics]
Displays attack detection server settings or server connection failure statistics.
Example
# (config server) create test1
ok
# (config server) edit test1
# (config server test1) add 10.9.17.134
ok
# (config server test1) view
Server configuration for test1:
Request limit: 1000
Host: 10.9.17.134
184 of 604
See Also
n "# (config attack-detection) " on page 177
n "# (config server hostname)" on the next page
185 of 604
# (config server hostname)

Synopsis
Configure a server for attack detection.
Syntax
# (config server)
# (config server) edit hostname
# (config server hostname)
Subcommands
# (config server hostname) add I
Add the specified host to this server group.
# (config server hostname) concurrent-request-limit number_of_requests
Sets the concurrent request limit for this server.
# (config server hostname) exit
Returns to the "# (config attack-detection) " on page 177 prompt.
# (config server hostname) remove hostname
Removes the specified host from this server group.
# (config server hostname) view
Displays settings for the current server.
Example
Show the concurrent request limit and servers belonging to the server group.
# (config server group1) view

Server configuration for group1:
Concurrent Request limit: 1000
Host: server12
Host: server13
186 of 604
See Also
n "# (config server)" on page 184
187 of 604
# (config) background-dns-updates
Synopsis
Background DNS updates allows configuration of background DNS updates used in forwarding systems.
Syntax
# (config) background-dns-updates {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) background-dns-updates failure-interval seconds
Sets the seconds between DNS resolution attempts when DNS failures.
# (config) background-dns-updates maximum-ttl {none | seconds}
Disables or sets the maximum seconds allowed before the next DNS resolution attempt.
# (config) background-dns-updates minimum-ttl seconds
Sets the minimum seconds allowed before the next DNS resolution attempt.
Example
# (config) background-dns-updates failure-interval 100
ok
188 of 604
# (config) bandwidth-gain
Synopsis
Bandwidth gain is a measure of the effective increase of server bandwidth resulting from the client’s use of a content
accelerator. For example, a bandwidth gain of 100% means that traffic volume from the ProxySG to its clients is twice as great
as the traffic volume being delivered to the ProxySG from the origin server(s). Using bandwidth gain mode can provide
substantial gains in apparent performance.
Keep in mind that bandwidth gain is a relative measure of the ProxySG’s ability to amplify traffic volume between an origin
server and the clients served by the device.
Syntax
# (config) bandwidth-gain {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) bandwidth-gain disable
Disables bandwidth-gain mode
# (config) bandwidth-gain enable
Enables bandwidth-gain mode.
Example
# (config) bandwidth-gain enable
ok
189 of 604
# (config) bandwidth-management
Synopsis
Bandwidth management allows you to classify, control, and, if required, limit the amount of bandwidth used by a class of
network traffic flowing into or out of the appliance.
Syntax
# (config bandwidth-management)
Subcommands
#(config bandwidth-management) create class_name
Creates a bandwidth-management class.
# (config bandwidth-management) delete class_name
Deletes the specified bandwidth-management class. Note that if another class has a reference to the specified class, this
command fails.
# (config bandwidth-management) disable
Disables bandwidth-management.
# (config bandwidth-management) edit class_name
Changes the prompt to "# (config bw-class class_name)" on page 192.
# (config bandwidth-management) enable
Enables bandwidth-management.
# (config bandwidth-management) exit
# (config bandwidth-management) view configuration [bandwidth_class]
Displays bandwidth-management configuration for all bandwidth-management classes or for the class specified.
# (config bandwidth-management) view statistics [bandwidth_class]
Displays bandwidth-management statistics for all bandwidth-management classes or for the class specified.
190 of 604
Example
# (config bandwidth-management) enable
ok
# (config bandwidth-management) create Office_A
ok
See Also
n "# (config bw-class class_name)" on the next page
191 of 604
# (config bw-class class_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified bandwidth-management class.
Syntax
# (config bandwidth-management)
# (config bandwidth-management) edit class_name
# (config bw-class class_name)
Subcommands
# (config bw-class class_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) bandwidth-management" on page 190 mode.
# (config bw-class class_name) max-bandwidth maximum_in_kbps
Sets the maximum bandwidth for this class.
# (config bw-class class_name) min-bandwidth minimum_in_kbps
Sets the minimum bandwidth for this class
# (config bw-class class_name) no max-bandwidth min-bandwidth
Resets the maximum bandwidth of this bandwidth-management class to the default (unlimited—no maximum)
# (config bw-class class_name) no min-bandwidth
Resets the minimum bandwidth of this bandwidth-management class to the default (no minimum).
# (config bw-class class_name) no parent
Clears the parent from this bandwidth-management class.
# (config bw-class class_name) parent class_name
Makes the specified class a parent of the class being configured.
# (config bw-class class_name) priority value_from_0_to_7
Sets the priority for this bandwidth-management class. The lowest priority level is 0 and the highest is 7.
192 of 604
# (config bw-class class_name) view [children]
Displays the settings for this bandwidth-management class or displays the settings for the children of this bandwidth-
management class.
Example
# (config bandwidth-management) edit CEO_A
# (config bw-class CEO_A) min-bandwidth 500
ok
# (config bw-class CEO_A) priority 1
ok
# (config bw-class CEO_A) exit
# (config bandwidth-management) exit
# (config)
See Also
n "# (config) bandwidth-management" on page 190
193 of 604
# (config) banner
Synopsis
Define a login banner for your users.
Syntax
# (config) banner {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) banner login string
Sets the login banner to the value of string.
# (config) banner no login
Sets the login banner to null.
Example
# (config) banner login "Sales and Marketing Intranet Web"
ok
See Also
n Notice and Consent Banner Configuration WebGuide
194 of 604
# (config) bridge
Synopsis
Configure bridging.
Syntax
# (config) bridge
# (config bridge)
Subcommands
# (config bridge) bandwidth-class bridge_name
Sets bridge bandwidth class.
# (config bridge) create bridge_name
Creates a bridge. This bridge name is case insensitive. You cannot name one bridge “ABC” and another bridge “abc”.
# (config bridge) delete bridge_name
Deletes the bridge.
# (config bridge) edit bridge_name
Changes the prompt to ."# (config bridge bridge_name)" on page 197
# (config bridge) exit
# (config bridge) no bandwidth-class
Clears the bandwidth-class settings.
# (config bridge) view {configuration | statistics | fwtable} bridge_name
Displays information for the specified bridge or fall all bridges.
Example
# (config) bridge
# (config bridge) create test
ok
195 of 604
See Also
n "# (config bridge bridge_name)" on the facing page
n "Software and Hardware Bridges" in SGOS Administration Guide
196 of 604
# (config bridge bridge_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified bridge.
Syntax
# (config) bridge
# (config bridge)
# (config bridge) edit bridge_name
# (config bridge bridge_name)
Subcommands
# (config bridge bridge_name) attach-interface adapter#:interface#
Attaches the interface to the bridge.
# (config bridge bridge_name) clear-fwtable {static}
Clears bridge forwarding table.
# (config bridge bridge_name) clear-statistics
Clears the bridge statistics.
# (config bridge bridge_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) bridge" on page 195 mode.
# (config bridge bridge_name) failover {group | mode} {parallel | serial}
Associates the bridge to a failover group or sets the bridge failover mode.
# (config bridge bridge_name) mode {disable | fail-open | fail-closed}
Sets the bridge mode on appliances equipped with a programmable adapter card. The following adapter card modes are
available:
n disable: Disables the bridge and allows the adapter interfaces to be reused as NICs or as part of another bridge.
n fail-open: If the ProxySG fails, all traffic passes through the bridge so clients can still receive data.
197 of 604
n fail-closed: If the ProxySG fails, all traffic is blocked and service is interrupted. This mode provides the same
functionality as a user-configured software bridge.
#(config bridge bridge_name) mute {enable | disable}
Specifies whether to mute the bridge interfaces upon detecting a bridge loop. By default, muting is enabled.
#(config bridge bridge_name) no {interface | failover | static-fwtable-entry}
Clears the settings as follows:
n interface: Removes the interface from the bridge.
n failover: Negates failover settings.
n static-fwtable-entry: Clears the static forwarding table entry.
#(config bridge bridge_name) spanning-tree adapter#:interface# {enable | disable}
Enables or disables spanning tree participation.
#(config bridge bridge_name) propagate-failure {enable | disable}
Enables or disables link error propagation.
#(config bridge bridge_name) static-fwtable-entry adapter#:interface# mac-address
Adds a static forwarding table entry.
# (config bridge bridge_name) mute-on-loop {enable | disable}
Enables/disables interface muting when a bridge loop is detected. Muting is enabled by default.
# (config bridge bridge_name) view {configuration | statistics | fwtable}
Displays information for the specified bridge.
Example
# (config) bridge
# (config bridge) edit b_1
# (config bridge b_1) attach interface 0:1
ok
# (config bridge b_1) failover mode parallel
ok
# (config bridge b_1) exit
# (config)
198 of 604
See Also
n "# (config) bridge" on page 195
n "Software and Hardware Bridges" in SGOS Administration Guide
199 of 604
# (config) cachepulse
Synopsis
Configure the CachePulse service.
Syntax
# (config) cachepulse
# (config cachepulse)
Subcommands
# (config cachepulse) disable
Disables the CachePulse service.
# (config cachepulse) download cancel
# (config cachepulse) download get-now
# (config cachepulse) download get-now force
cancel the download in progress, press and hold CTRL+C.
# (config cachepulse) download password password
Specify the password to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config cachepulse) download profile ssl_device_profile
Specifies the SSL device profile to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config cachepulse) download url url
Sest the URL to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config cachepulse) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Sets the encrypted form of the password to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config cachepulse) username username
200 of 604
Specifies the username to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config cachepulse) enable
Enables the CachePulse service.
# (config cachepulse) exit
Exits the cachepulse node and returns to # (config) prompt.
# (config cachepulse) view
Displays license information, license expiration date, the download URL for the CachePulse database, results of the last
download, last successful download, and database version. This subcommand produces the same output as the # show
cachepulse command.
Example
# (config cachepulse) view
License Type: Subscription
Licensed Until: Wed, 02 Oct 2019 00:00:00 UTC
Service: Enabled
Time: Wed, 01 May 2019 19:11:44 UTC
Downloaded from: https://subscription.es.bluecoat.com/cachepulse/policy
Version: 51266
See Also
n "Intercepting and Optimizing HTTP Traffic" in SGOS Administration Guide
201 of 604
# (config caching)
Synopsis
When a stored HTTP object expires, it is placed in a refresh list. The appliance processes the refresh list in the background,
when it is not serving requests. Refresh policies define how the device handles the refresh process.
The HTTP caching options allow you to specify:
n Maximum object size
n Negative responses
n Refresh parameters
In addition to HTTP objects, the appliance can store objects requested using FTP. When the device retrieves and stores an
FTP object, it uses two methods to determine how long the object should stay cached.
n If the object has a last-modified date, the appliance assigns a refresh date to the object that is a percentage of the last-
modified date.
n If the object does not have a last-modified date, the appliance assigns a refresh date to the object based on a fixed
period of time.
Syntax
# (config) caching
# (config caching)
Subcommands
# (config caching) always-verify-source
Specifies the ProxySG to always verify the freshness of an object with the object source.
# (config caching) automatic-backoff
Automatically regulates caching to maximize performance.
# (config caching) exit
# (config caching) ftp
Sets FTP caching options. Changes the prompt to "# (config caching ftp)" on page 204.
# (config caching) max-cache-size megabytes
202 of 604
Specifies the maximum size of the cache to the value indicated by megabytes.
# (config caching) negative-response minutes
Specifies that negative responses should be cached for the time period identified by minutes
# (config caching) no always-verify-source
Specifies that the ProxySG appliance should never verify the freshness of an object with the object source
# (config caching) no automatic-backoff
Disables the HTTP Disk Backoff feature. Enabled by default, this feature monitors disk activity and prevents cache reading or
writing during periods of peak activity. If disabled, this feature can be enabled by entering automatic-backoff at the (config
caching) prompt.
# (config caching) no refresh
Disables asynchronous adaptive refresh (AAR).
# (config caching) refresh bandwidth {automatic | kbps}
Automatically adjusts the amount of bandwidth necessary to refresh content, or specifies the amount of bandwidth (in kilobits
per second) that the appliance should use for asynchronous adaptive refresh activity. The range is 0-2097151 kbps; a value of
0 disables adaptive refresh.
Asynchronous adaptive refresh is disabled by default.
# (config caching) view
Displays caching parameters.
Example
# (config) caching
# (config caching) always-verify-source
ok
See Also
n "# (config caching ftp)" on the next page
203 of 604
# (config caching ftp)

Synopsis
The FTP caching options allow you to specify:
n Transparency
n Caching objects by date
n Caching objects without a last-modified date. If an FTP object is served without a last modified date, the appliance
caches the object for a set period of time.
Syntax
# (config) caching
# (config caching)
# (config caching) ftp
# (config ftp)
Subcommands
# (config caching ftp) {disable | enable}
Disables or enables caching FTP objects
# (config caching ftp) exit
Returns to "# (config caching)" on page 202 mode.
# (config caching ftp) type-m-percent percent
Specifies the TTL for objects with a last-modified time.
# (config caching ftp) type-n-initial hours
Specifies the TTL for objects with no expiration.
# (config caching ftp) view
Shows the current FTP caching settings.
204 of 604
Example
# (config caching ftp) view
Caching FTP objects is enabled
FTP objects with last modified date, cached for 10% of last modified time
FTP objects without last modified date, initially cached for 24 hours
See Also
n "# (config caching)" on page 202
205 of 604
# (config cifs)
Synopsis
Configure the CIFS proxy for SMBv1 connections.
Syntax
# (config) cifs
# (config cifs)
Subcommands
# (config cifs) directory-cache-time seconds
Determines how long SMBv1 directory information is kept in cache. Changes made to a directory by clients not using the
ProxySG may not be visible to clients until at least this much time has elapsed. The default cache time is 60 seconds.
# (config cifs) disable
Disables protocol-based acceleration for SMBv1 connections. All SMBv1 connections are passed through, allowing the CIFS
proxy to accelerate them with byte caching and compression techniques (if enabled for the CIFS service). No object caching is
performed on SMBv1 connections.
# (config cifs) enable
Enables protocol-based acceleration for SMBv1 connections.
# (config cifs) exit
Returns to # (config) submode.
# (config cifs) read-ahead {disable | enable}
Improves performance of SMBv1 connections by attempting to fetch and cache blocks of data that might be requested by a
client before the actual request occurs. This is enabled by default. Disabling this option causes the appliance to fetch and
cache only data actually requested by clients.
# (config cifs) remote-storage-optimization {disable | enable}
When this option is enabled, Windows Explorer modifies the icons of uncached folders on remote servers, indicating to users
that the contents of the folder have not yet been cached by the ProxySG. Applies to SMBv1 connections only.
# (config cifs) smb-signing domain domain
Configures the domain name to which the username belongs; the appliance will use this domain to perform SMB signing.
Specifying the domain is optional. SMB signing is supported on SMBv1 connections only.
206 of 604
# (config cifs) smb-signing encrypted-password encrypted_password
Specifies the encrypted password that the appliance sends to access the domain when performing SMB signing. Specifying
the encrypted password is optional. SMB signing is supported on SMBv1 connections only.
# (config cifs) smb-signing optimize {disable | enable}
Enable/disable CIFS optimizations on signed SMBv1 traffic.
Note: Before enabling SMB signing on the ProxySG, you must create a user in the domain that
represents the ProxySG. When SMB signing is required by the OCS, the CIFS proxy uses this
virtual user’s credentials. This user cannot be a guest or anonymous. SMB signing is supported
on SMBv1 connections only.
Note: If the client is configured to require SMB signing, which is not a common configuration,
the ProxySG cannot provide CIFS optimization; the traffic passes through with only the
benefits provided by the general ADN configuration.
# (config cifs) smb-signing password password
Specifies the user password that the appliance sends to access the domain when performing SMB signing. SMB signing is
supported on SMBv1 connections only.
# (config cifs) smb-signing username username
Specifies the user in the domain that will be used to perform SMB signing. Ensure you enter the name exactly as created.
Specifying the user name is required. SMB signing is supported on SMBv1 connections only.
# (config cifs) strict-directory-expiration {disable | enable}
When this option is enabled and directory-cache-time is past its expiration, directories are refreshed synchronously instead of
in the background. This is needed when the set of visible objects in a directory returned by a server can vary between users.
This option is disabled by default.
# (config cifs) suppress-folder-customization {disable | enable}
To speed the display of remote folders, enables Suppress Folder Customization to skip extra transactions and always display
remote folders in the default view.
# (config cifs) view {configuration | statistics}
Views the configuration or statistics for SMBv1.
# (config cifs) write-back {full | none}
207 of 604
Improves performance by acknowledging client writes immediately and sending them to the server in the background, or forces
all writes to be sent to the server synchronously. This option is set to full by default.
Example
# (config) cifs
# (config cifs) directory-cache-time 240
ok
See Also
n "Accelerating File Sharing" in SGOS Administration Guide
208 of 604
# (config clients)
Synopsis
Configure the Client Manager and client configuration options for the ProxyClient.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)
Subcommands
# (config clients) acceleration
Configures ProxyClient acceleration. Changes prompt to "# (config clients acceleration) " on page 212.
# (config clients) clear {inactive | all}
Clears (that is, sets to zero) the count of inactive ProxyClients or all ProxyClients. Clients are automatically cleared after 30
days of inactivity. After a software upgrade, clients appear twice for 30 days—one entry for the earlier version of client software
and one entry and one entry for the newer version of client software. You can optionally clear the inactive clients to avoid
seeing duplicate information. For a client to be reported as inactive, 10 minutes or more must elapse between heartbeat
packets it sends to the Client Manager.
# (config clients) enable
Sets this appliance as the Client Manager. You can have only one Client Manager in your ADN network.
# (config clients) disable
Do not use this appliance as the Client Manager.
# (config clients) client-manager host {from-client-address | ip_address | host}
Identifies this appliance as the Client Manager in one of the following ways:
n from-client-address: (Recommended) Use this command if you want clients to download the ProxyClient software,
configuration, and updates from the host from which the clients originally obtained the software.
n ip_address or host: Use this command only if you want to change the host from which clients download the
ProxyClient software, configuration, and updates. Enter a fully-qualified host name or IP address only; do not preface
the with http:// or https://or downloads will fail.
209 of 604
In other words, this option enables you to change the host from which currently-installed clients obtain future software
and configuration updates. Use caution when selecting this option because if clients are unable to connect to the host
you enter in the adjacent field, new installations from the Client Manager and updates to existing installations will fail.
Note: Symantec recommends you enter the fully-qualified host name. If you enter either
an unqualified host name or IP address and change it later, connections to all currently-
connected clients are dropped.
# (config clients) client-manager install-port port
Port on which the host you entered in the preceding option listens for requests from clients. The default is 8084.
# (config clients) client-manager keyring keyring
Name of the keyring the Client Manager will use when clients connect to it.
# (config clients) exit
# (config clients) locations
Configures locations. Changes prompt to "# (config clients locations) " on page 221.
# (config clients) software-upgrade-path url
Sets the URL used to upload updated ProxyClient software to the Client Manager so it can make the latest ProxyClient
software available to update or to install on client machines.
Note: After you update the Client Manager, whenever users connect using the ProxyClient,
they will be required to update the ProxyClient software.
Upload the ProxyClient software from a URL in the following format:
https://host:port/path/ProxyClient.car
Example:
https://myapache.example.com:8088/images/ProxyClient.car
After you set the path from which to load the updates, see "# load" on page 81.
# (config clients) [no] uninstall-password [password]
Enter a plain text password that is required if users want to uninstall the ProxyClient software.
Do either of the following to remove any previous uninstall password:
210 of 604
n Enter uninstall-password without an argument.
n Enter no uninstall-password.
# (config clients) hashed-uninstall-password [hashed_password]
Enter the uninstall password hashed by the Blowfish algorithm. You can use the hashed password in scripts when you do not
want to expose the password in plain text. The only way to know the Blowfish-hashed password is to view it using the"# show
configuration" on page 102 command.
The hashed password displays as follows:
proxy-client ;mode
hashed-uninstall-password
"$2a$05$XyjVSFGvPkTmUi6zKDmyauSArzwka62evn7c13k6qUenR.KOEz4IC"
# (config clients) update-interval minutes
Frequency clients check with the Client Manager for updated ProxyClient software. Valid values are 10-432000 (that is, 300
days). Default is 120.
# (config clients) view
Displays current Client Manager settings.
# (config clients) web-filtering
Configure ProxyClient web filtering settings. Changes the prompt to "# (config clients web-filtering) " on page 231.
Example
# (config clients) client-manager host enable
ok
# (config clients) client-manager host from-client-address
ok
# (config clients) software-upgrade-path https://myapache.example.com:8088/images/ProxyClient.car
See Also
n "# (config clients web-filtering) " on page 231
211 of 604
# (config clients acceleration)

Synopsis
Configure acceleration settings for ProxyClients.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)
Subcommands
# (config clients acceleration) adn
Configures ADN settings. Changes prompt to "# (config clients acceleration adn)" on page 214.
# (config clients acceleration) cifs
Configures CIFS settings. Changes prompt to "# (config clients acceleration cifs)" on page 218.
# (config clients acceleration) disable
Disables all acceleration for ProxyClients; that is, gzip compression, CIFS protocol optimization, and byte caching.
# (config clients acceleration) enable
Enables acceleration for ProxyClients; that is, gzip compression, CIFS protocol optimization, and byte caching.
# (config clients acceleration) exit
Returns to "# (config clients) " on page 209 mode.
# (config clients acceleration) max-cache-disk-percent percentage
Maximum percentage of client disk space to use for caching objects, such as CIFS objects. Valid values are 10—90; default is
10.
# (config clients acceleration) view
Displays current ProxyClient acceleration settings.
212 of 604
Example
# (config clients acceleration) max-cache-disk-percent 5
ok
See Also
n "# (config clients) " on page 209
n "# (config clients acceleration adn)" on the next page
n "# (config clients acceleration cifs)" on page 218
213 of 604
# (config clients acceleration adn)

Synopsis
blurb description
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)

Subcommands
# (config clients acceleration adn) backup-manager ip_address
The IP address of the backup ADN manager. Configuring a backup ADN manager is optional but recommended. If the ADN
manager becomes unavailable for any reason, the backup ADN manager takes over the task of advertising routes to all ADN
nodes, such as the ProxyClient.
# (config clients acceleration adn) {exclude-ports | include-ports} {ports_list | port_range}
Determines which TCP ports to exclude or include in ADN tunnels. Assuming clients using the ProxyClient software can
connect to an ADN peer that can optimize traffic to the destination IP address, this setting determine ports the clients can use
(or not use). Specify a comma-separated list of ports or a range of ports separated by a hyphen.
# (config clients acceleration adn) exclude-subnets
Configures the subnets excluded from ADN acceleration. Changes prompt to "# (config clients adn exclude-subnets)" on
page 216.
# (config clients acceleration adn) exit
Returns to "# (config clients acceleration) " on page 212 mode.
# (config clients acceleration adn) manager-port port
214 of 604
ADN manager and backup manager plain listen port. (To use the ProxyClient in your ADN network, the ADN manager’s
listening mode must be configured for plain-only, secure-only, or both. For more information, see "# (config) adn" on page 135.
# (config proxy-client acceleration adn) no {primary-manager | backup-manager}
Clears the backup or primary ADN manager IP address.
# (config clients acceleration adn) port-list {exclude-ports | include-ports}
Determines whether you will use the include ports list or exclude ports list.
# (config clients acceleration adn) primary-manager ip_address
The IP address of the primary ADN manager. The ADN manager keeps track of and advertises the routes of the appliances it
knows about. You must specify a primary manager. The ProxyClient obtains the routing table from the ADN manager.
Example
# (config clients acceleration adn) exclude-ports 22,443
ok
215 of 604
# (config clients adn exclude-subnets)

Synopsis
blurb description
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)


# (config clients acceleration adn) exclude-subnets
# (config clients acceleration adn exclude-subnets)
Subcommands
# (config proxy-client acceleration adn exclude-subnets) {add | remove} subnet_prefix[/prefix_length]
Adds or removes subnets from the excluded subnets list, which is the list of subnets not included in ADN tunnels. Use a
comma-separated list of IP addresses and subnets in CIDR notation.
# (config proxy-client acceleration adn exclude-subnets) clear
Removes all subnets from the current excluded subnet list. In other words, traffic from all IP addresses and subnets will be
routed through the ADN tunnel.
# (config proxy-client acceleration adn exclude-subnets) exit
Returns to "# (config clients acceleration adn)" on page 214 mode.
# (config proxy-client acceleration adn exclude-subnets) view
Displays the list of excluded subnets.
216 of 604
Example
# (config proxy-client acceleration adn exclude-subnets) add 192.168.0.1/24
ok
See Also
n "# (config clients acceleration adn)" on page 214
217 of 604
# (config clients acceleration cifs)

Synopsis
Configure CIFS settings for ProxyClients.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)

# (config clients acceleration cifs
# (config clients acceleration cifs)
Subcommands
#(config proxy-client acceleration cifs) directory-cache-time seconds
Number of seconds for directory listings to remain in the cache. Default is 30.
# (config proxy-client acceleration cifs) {disable | enable}
Disable or enable CIFS acceleration. CIFS acceleration is enabled by default.
#(config proxy-client acceleration cifs) exit
Returns to "# (config clients acceleration) " on page 212 mode.
# (config proxy-client acceleration cifs) remote-storage-optimization {disable | enable}
When enabled, Windows Explorer minimizes data transfer when users browse to remote accelerated file shares. The amount
of performance improvement from enabling ProxyClient remote storage optimization depends on how many files are in the
remote folder and how many subfolders are nested under the folder.
218 of 604
Note: This feature is not related to Windows offline folders.
It takes time for a configuration change to take effect. For example, if a client has two tunnels
open to an accelerated file share at the time the client receives a configuration update from the
Client Manager, it might take several minutes before a change from enable to disable takes
effect for these open connections.
On the other hand, the first connection opened to an accelerated file share after a configuration
change is received by the client will use the current configuration setting.
# (config proxy-client acceleration cifs) suppress-folder-customization {disable | enable}
When enabled, prevents Windows Explorer from displaying folder customizations when users browse to a remote accelerated
file share. (An example of folder customization is changing the folder’s icon.)
Note: It takes time for a configuration change to take effect. For example, if a client has two
tunnels open to an accelerated file share at the time the client receives a configuration update
from the Client Manager, it might take several minutes before a change from enable to disable
takes effect for these open connections.
On the other hand, the first connection opened to an accelerated file share after a configuration
change is received by the client will use the current configuration setting.
# (config proxy-client acceleration cifs) write-back {full | none}
Determines whether or not users can continue sending data to the appliance while the appliance is writing data on the back
end.
n full enables write-back, which in turn makes the appliance appear to the user as a file server; in other words, the
appliance constantly sends approval to the client and allows the client to send data while the back end takes advantage
of the compressed TCP connection.
n none disables write-back. Disabling write-back can introduce substantial latency as clients send data to the appliance
and wait for acknowledgement before sending more data.
One reason to set this option to none is the risk of data loss if the link from the branch to the core server fails. There is no way
to recover queued data if such a link failure occurs.
# (config proxy-client acceleration cifs) view
Displays client CIFS settings.
219 of 604
Example
# (config proxy-client acceleration cifs) enable
ok
# (config proxy-client acceleration cifs) write-back full
ok
See Also
n "# (config clients acceleration) " on page 212
220 of 604
# (config clients locations)

Synopsis
Configure ProxyClient locations.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)
Subcommands
# (config clients locations) acceleration {enable | disable}
Enables or disables acceleration as a default action if a client does not match any defined locations.
# (config proxy-client locations) clear
Remove all defined locations.
# (config clients locations) create name
Creates a location with the specified name.
# (config clients locations) delete name
Deletes the specified location.
# (config clients locations) edit name
Edits the specified location. Changes to "# (config clients name) " on page 223.
# (config clients locations) exit
# (config clients locations) {promote name | demote name}
Moves the specified location up or down in the location rulebase. When a ProxyClient connects to the Client Manager, the first
match is applied. You should order locations in the rulebase from most specific to least specific. For example, put a location
221 of 604
with a source address range from 10.3.0.0 to 10.3.255.255 before a location with the 10.3.0.0. to 10.3.255.255 source address
range first.
# (config clients locations) view
Displays proxy client location settings.
# (config clients locations) webfilter {enable | disable}
Enables or disables Web filtering as a default action if a client does not match any defined locations.
Example
# (config proxy-client locations) create Mobile
ok
# (config proxy-client locations) edit Mobile
# (config proxy-client Mobile) dns
# (config proxy-client Mobile dns) add 198.162.1.10
ok
# (config proxy-client Mobile dns) exit
# (config proxy-client Mobile) match-dns enable
See Also
222 of 604
# (config clients name)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)
Subcommands
# (config clients name) acceleration {enable | disable}
Enables or disables acceleration for this location. This setting enables or disables all forms of acceleration (that is, gzip, CIFS
protocol optimization, and byte caching).
# (config clients name) dns
Defines DNS server IP addresses as a condition for this location. Changes prompt to "# (config clients name dns) " on
page 225.
# (config clients name) exit
# (config clients name) match-dns {enable | disable}
Enable or disable the use of DNS server IP address as a location condition.
# (config clients name) match-source {enable | disable}
Enables or disables the use of source IP address ranges as a location condition.
# (config clients name) match-vnic {enable | disable}
Enables or disables the use of VNIC IP address ranges as a location condition.
# (config clients name) source
Defines source IP addresses as a condition for this location. Changes prompt to "# (config clients name source) " on page 227.
223 of 604
# (config clients name) vnic
Defines virtual NIC IP addresses as a condition for this location. Changes prompt to "# (config clients name vnic) " on
page 229.
#(config clients name) webfilter {enable | disable}
Enables or disables web filtering for this location.
Example
#(config clients name) webfilter disable
ok
See Also
n "# (config clients name) " on the previous page
n "# (config clients locations) " on page 221
224 of 604
# (config clients name dns)

Synopsis
Edit DNS entries for the specified ProxyClient location.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)
# (config clients name) dns
# (config clients name dns)
Subcommands
# (config clients name dns) add ip_address
Adds a DNS server IP address as a location condition. DNS servers are logically ANDed together so a user must match all
DNS servers defined to match this condition.
# (config clients name dns) clear
Clears all DNS server IP addresses.
# (config clients name dns) exit
Returns to "# (config clients name) " on page 223 mode.
# (config clients name dns) remove ip_address
Removes a DNS server IP address from the location condition.
# (config clients name dns) view
225 of 604
Displays the list of DNS servers in this location.
Example
See the example in "# (config clients locations) " on page 221.
See Also
226 of 604
# (config clients name source)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)
# (config clients name) source
# (config clients name source)
Subcommands
# (config clients name source) add ip_address_range
Adds a source IP address range as a location condition. Source IP address ranges servers are logically ORd together so a user
must log in from any source IP address in any range defined to match this condition. Source IP address range example:
10.0.0.0-10.255.255.255
# (config clients name source) clear
Clears all IP source address ranges.
# (config clients name source) exit
# (config clients name source) remove ip_address_range
Removes a source IP address range from the location condition. Source IP address range example: 10.0.0.0-10.255.255.255
# (config clients name source) view
227 of 604
Displays the list of IP source address ranges in this location.
See Also
228 of 604
# (config clients name vnic)

Synopsis
Configure virtual NIC IP addresses as a condition for this location. Virtual NIC IP address ranges should be used for clients
that log in using VPN software that creates a virtual network adapter (also referred to as a virtual NIC) that is assigned its own
IP address.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients)
# (config clients name) vnic
# (config clients name vnic)
Subcommands
# (config clients name vnic) add vnic_address_range
Add a VNIC IP address range as a location condition. VNIC IP address ranges servers are logically ORd together so a user
must log in from any VNIC IP address in any range defined to match this condition. VNIC IP address range example: 10.0.0.0-
10.255.255.255
# (config clients name vnic) clear
Clear all VNIC IP address ranges.
# (config clients name vnic) exit
# (config clients name vnic) remove vnic_address_range
Remove a VNIC IP address range from the location condition. VNIC IP address range example: 10.0.0.0-10.255.255.255
229 of 604
# (config clients name vnic) view
View the list of VNIC IP address ranges in this location.
See Also
230 of 604
# (config clients web-filtering)

Synopsis
Configure ProxyClient web filtering settings.
Syntax
# (config) clients
Subcommands
# (config clients web-filtering) {enable | disable}
Enables or disables ProxyClient web filtering.
# (config clients web-filtering) {allow | block | warn} category_name
Sets the default action to allow, block, or warn users and groups if they try to access content in this category. Before you can
allow, block, or warn users or groups individually using the # (config clients web-filtering) user-group-rules
category_name command, you must use this command to set the default action for the category.
Content can be from any of the following sources:
n Symantec content filtering database categories
n Local database categories
n Policy categories
n System category or Default Action
# (config clients web-filtering) clear {all | category_name}
Clears all or the specified category from the rulebase.
# (config clients web-filtering) default-action {allow | block}
Sets the default action to take in the event the user requests content that is not classified in any category you selected.
# (config clients web-filtering) exit
231 of 604
# (config clients web-filtering) failure-mode {closed | open}
Specifies the action to take if the BCWF license expires (usually because the database has not been updated in a 30-day
period). closed means users are not allowed to browse to any Web page. A Service Unavailable exception displays in the
user’s Web browser. open means users are allowed to browse anywhere; in other words, content is not filtered. Select this
option if user Web access is more critical than filtering or security.
# (config clients web-filtering) https-filtering {disable | enable}
Set to enable to use Web filtering when the content request is sent over an SSL connection using the default port 443. For
exceptions to this behavior, see the ProxyClient Release Notes. Set to disable to not filter HTTPS traffic from unsupported
browsers.
#(config clients web-filtering) inline exception {block | warn | unavailable} data EOF_marker
Sets up exception pages to display to users when they attempt to access certain content. Set the exception page for a page
when users attempt to access content that might violate company policies. Set the exception page for unavailable to display a
page when users attempt to access content that cannot be categorized because the service point is not available.
n data is the HTML to display to users.
n end-of-file-marker is discussed in "# (config) inline" on page 333.
# (config clients web-filtering) log
Configures the ProxyClient log. Changes the prompt to "# (config clients log)" on page 234.
# (config clients web-filtering) {promote | demote} category_name
Moves the specified category (including all users and groups defined for this category) up or down one position in the Web
filtering rulebase. Policy actions (allow, block, warn) are applied to the first rule that matches the URL request. Because URLs
are typically classified in more than one category, the rulebase order is important. An error is displayed if you attempt to
promote a category that is already first in the rulebase or if you attempt to demote a category that is already last in the rulebase.
# (config clients web-filtering) {promote-to-top | demote-to-bottom} category_name
Moves category_name (including all users and groups defined for this category) to the top or bottom of the web filtering
rulebase. An error displays if you attempt to promote a category that is already first in the rulebase or if you attempt to demote a
category that is already last in the rulebase.
# (config clients web-filtering) safe-search {disable | enable}
Set to enable to force a search engine that supports Safe Search.
# (config clients web-filtering) user-group-rules category_name
Sets up rules for users and user groups for the specified category. Changes the prompt to "# (config clients web-filtering
category)" on page 237. If you receive the message % Default action not set for category category_name,
you must set the default action for the category using # (config clients web-filtering) {allow | block | warn}
category_name first.
# (config clients web-filtering) view
232 of 604
Displays current ProxyClient Web filtering settings
Example
# (config clients web-filtering) enable
ok
# (config clients web-filtering) allow News/Media
ok
See Also
n "# (config clients log)" on the next page
233 of 604
# (config clients log)

Synopsis
Configure the ProxyClient log.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients web-filtering) log
# (config clients log)
Subcommands
# (config clients log) {disable | enable}
Enable or disable uploading of ProxyClient Web filtering user logs to an anonymous FTP server.
# (config clients log) early-upload megabytes
Enter the maximum log file size, in megabytes, to trigger a log file upload. This value takes precedence over the periodic-
upload parameter. In other words, if you specify periodic-upload 24 and early-upload 10, if the client log file size reaches 10
megabytes after only 10 hours, the ProxyClient attempts to upload its log files to the FTP server.
# (config clients log) exit
Returns to ."# (config clients web-filtering) " on page 231.
# (config clients log) ftp-client {{primary | alternate} {host host_or_IP_address [port port]} {path
path}}
Specifies the anonymous FTP server to which users upload ProxyClient Web filtering logs and the path to which to upload the
files. You can optionally precede the relative path with the / character; uploads will succeed whether or not the first character is
/.
Examples:
/path/to/log/directory
path/to/log/directory
To upload logs to the FTP server’s home directory, leave the field blank.
234 of 604
Note: Entering / in the field (with no path following the / character) causes uploads to fail.
Because log files are uploaded using anonymous FTP, Symantec strongly recommends you put your FTP server behind the
corporate firewall. In addition, you should configure the FTP server as follows:
n To prevent the possibility of data loss, do not allow file overwrites.
n For security reasons, do not allow files on the FTP server’s upload directory to be browsed.
n The FTP server must support passive FTP clients.
n If the FTP server is deployed behind a firewall, the firewall must be configured to allow FTP data connections over TCP
ports greater than 1024.
n Placing an FTP server outside the firewall has the advantage that even mobile users can upload log files to it; however,
it exposes the server and your company to potentially serious malicious activity.
# (config clients log) mode {all-requests | exceptions-only}
Enter all-requests to upload the entire client log. Enter exceptions-only to upload only exceptions.
# (config clients log) periodic-upload upload-interval {hours [minutes]}
Enter the number of hours for clients to attempt to upload their logs to the anonymous FTP server. Optionally enter the number
of minutes, in addition to hours.
Note: If you enter a non-zero value for both hours and minutes, the total amount of time is
used. For xample, if you enter periodic-upload 24 10, the client waits 24 hours and 10 minutes
to upload log files.
A change to the upload period does not take effect immediately. In other words, if the upload period is 24 hours and you change
it to 20 hours, clients with the 24 hour configuration wait 24 hours to upload their current logs before the 20 hour upload period
takes effect.
# (config clients log) view
Displays current ProxyClient Web filtering log settings.
Example
# (config clients log) mode all-requests
ok
235 of 604
See Also
n "# (config clients web-filtering) " on page 231
236 of 604
# (config clients web-filtering category)

Synopsis
Configure rules for users and user groups for the specified category.
Syntax
# (config) clients
# (config clients web-filtering) user-group-rules category
# (config clients web-filtering category)
Subcommands
# (config clients web-filtering category) {allow | block | warn} user_group_name
Allows, blocks, or warns users and groups accessing content in this category. Before you can use this command, you must
set the default action for the category. If the user_group_name you enter does not already exist, it is created. User and group
names can be in any of the following formats:
Fully qualified account names (for example, domain_name\\user_name). You should avoid using isolated names (for example,
user_name).
n Fully qualified DNS names (for example, example.example.com\\user_name)
n User principal names (UPN) (for example, someone@example.com).
# (config clients web-filtering category) clear user_group_name
Removes the specified user group from this category.
# (config clients web-filtering category) {promote | demote} user_group_name
Moves user_group_name up or down one position in category the Web filtering rulebase. Policy actions (allow, block, warn) are
applied to the first rule that matches the URL request. An error displays if you attempt to promote a user-group rule that is
already first in the category or if you attempt to demote a user-group rule that is already last in the category.
# (config clients web-filtering category) {promote-to-top | demote-to-bottom} user_group_name
237 of 604
Moves user_group_name to the top or bottom in category in the Web filtering rulebase. An error displays if you attempt to
promote a category that is already first in the rulebase or if you attempt to demote a category that is already last in the rulebase.
# (config clients web-filtering category) view
For the selected category, displays the default action and all user-group rules.
238 of 604
# (config) clock
Synopsis
To manage objects in the cache, a ProxySG must know the current Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) time. By default, the
device attempts to connect to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server to acquire the UTC time. The ProxySG includes a list of
NTP servers available on the Internet, and attempts to connect to them in the order they appear in the NTP server list on the
NTP tab. If the ProxySG cannot access any of the listed NTP servers, you must manually set the UTC time using the clock
command.
Syntax
# (config) clock {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) clock day 1_to_31
Sets the Universal Time Code (UTC) day to the specified calendar day.
# (config) clock hour 0_to_23
Sets the UTC hour to the specified hour.
# (config) clock minute 0_to_59
Sets the UTC minute to the specified minute.
# (config) clock month 1_to_12
Sets the UTC month to the specified month.
# (config) clock second 0_to_59
Sets the UTC second to the specified second.
# (config) clock year YYYY
Sets the UTC year to the specified year.
Example
# (config) clock year 2020
ok
See Also
n "# (config) timezone" on page 599
239 of 604
# (config cloud-service)
Synopsis
Use the cloud-service commands to configure options relating to the Symantec Cloud Service. The Symantec Cloud Service
enables all subscribed devices to share the same common policy, whether on-premise or off-premise. The policy can also be
modified on the appliance to conform to local conditions. In this way, you can create general policies that apply to all locations
while overriding rules that conflict with local requirements. To use this service, you must first obtain a Symantec Cloud Service
account (contact your Symantec sales representative).
The Advanced Lab Network (ALN) is a Symantec cloud service testing environment. It includes all current functionality plus
yet-to-be released new features. ALN access is limited to specific Symantec customers, and is not available with all cloud
service subscriptions. Contact your local Symantec Sales Engineer to inquire about accessing the ALN to preview and test
new features and provide feedback to Symantec.
Syntax
# (config) cloud-service
# (config cloud-service)
Subcommands
# (config cloud-service) common-policy {disable | enable}
Enables or disables subscription to the policy installed on the Symantec cloud service. To use this service, Symantec
WebFilter must be enabled and the appliance must be registered with the cloud service. Enabling the cloud common-policy
enables all subscribed devices to share the same policy configuration, whether on-premises or off-premises. The policy
synchronizes with the master file every 15 minutes from last boot time. This interval cannot be changed but you can force an
immediate update.
# (config cloud-service) deregister [force]
Removes the appliance from the Symantec cloud service. The force option forces deregistration even if there are errors (the
appliance removes all cloud-provisioned policy and returns the system to the pre-registration state).
# (config cloud-service) exit
Returns to the # (config) submode.
#(config cloud-service) register location_name cloud_service_username [password]
Registers the appliance with the Symantec cloud service. Before registering the appliance, you must have obtained a
Symantec cloud service account.
# (config cloud-service) update-now [force]
240 of 604
Synchronizes the installed common policy with the master file in the cloud. You can use this command to re-download the
common policy even if the ProxySG appliance has the latest copy of policy as this may be useful when troubleshooting.
# (config cloud-service) cloud-network {advanced-labs | production}
Selects the cloud service network to use, the Advanced Labs Network (ALN) or production. By default the appliance will
always use the production portal. To view this option, you must enter the reveal-advanced all command from the config or
enable prompt.
Tip: You must first use # reveal-advanced all to show this command. You require an ALN
account for this command to be useful; for details, contact your Symantec sales
representative.
# (config cloud-service) view
View Symantec cloud service status for the appliance.
Example
# (config cloud-service) register chicago2 admin@example.com Admin
ok
# (config cloud-service) common-policy enable
ok
# (config cloud-service) view
Location: chicago2
Last successful update time: 2012-07-11 14:42:04-07:00PDT
Last attempted update time: 2012-07-12 08:03:38-07:00PDT
Failed update attempts: 0
Entitlements:
Common Policy: enabled, expires on 2014-02-28
# (config cloud-service) update-now
241 of 604
# (config connection-forwarding)
Synopsis
Configure TCP connection forwarding for ADN transparent tunnel load balancing and asymmetric routing.
Syntax
# (config) connection-forwarding
# (config connection-forwarding)
Subcommands
# (config connection-forwarding) {add | remove} IP_address
Adds or removes a ProxySG appliance to a connection forwarding peer group.
# (config connection-forwarding) clear
Clears the list of forwarding peers from this appliance.
# (config connection-forwarding) {enable | disable}
Enables or disables connection forwarding on this appliance.
# (config connection-forwarding) exit
# (config connection-forwarding) port number
Specifies the port used by all peers in the peer group to communicate connection information (each peer in the group must use
the same port number). The default is 3030.
# (config connection-forwarding) view
Displays the TCP connection forwarding information.
Example
# (config) connection-forwarding
# (connection-forwarding) add 10.9.59.100
ok
# (config connection-forwarding) port 3030
ok
# (config connection-forwarding) enable
ok
242 of 604
See Also
n "TCP Connection Forwarding" in SGOS Administration Guide
243 of 604
# (config) content
Synopsis
Manage and manipulate content distribution requests and re-validate requests for HTTP, FTP, CIFS, and streaming content.
Note: These commands are not compatible with transparent FTP.
Syntax
# (config) content {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) content cancel outstanding-requests
Cancels all outstanding content distribution requests and re-validates requests.
# (config) content cancel url URL
Cancels outstanding content distribution requests and re-validates requests for the specified URL. See "URL Formats for File
Types" on the facing page for details.
# (config) content delete regex regular_expression
Deletes content based on the specified regular expression.
# (config) content delete url URL
Deletes content for the specified URL. See "URL Formats for File Types" on the facing page for details.
# (config) content distribute URL [from from_URL]
Content associated with the specified URL should be distributed from the OCS and put in the ProxySG cache. Specify the
[from from_URL] when users will be accessing content from a different location than what is specified when pre-populating
the cache. For example, the [from from_URL] is useful when you are pre-populating content in a lab environment using a
different host from the one that will be used once the appliance is deployed. See "URL Formats for File Types" on the facing
page for details.
# (config) content priority regex priority_0-7 regular_expression
Adds a content deletion policy based on the specified regular expression.
# (config) content priority url priority_0-7 URL
Adds a content deletion policy for the specified URL. See "URL Formats for File Types" on the facing page for details.
# (config) content revalidate regex regular_expression
244 of 604
Revalidates the content associated with the specified regular expression.
# (config) content revalidate url URL [fromfrom_URL]
Revalidates the content associated with the URL. See "URL Formats for File Types" below for details.
URL Formats for File Types

n To pre-populate a CIFS file, use the URL format:
cifs://domain;username:password@server/share/path-to-file
n To pre-populate HTTP content, use the URL format:
http://username:password@host:port/path-to-file
n To pre-populate FTP content, use the URL format:
ftp://username:password@host:port/path-to-file
n To pre-populate Flash video on demand (VOD) content, use one of the URL formats:
rtmp://hostip[:port]/path-to-file
rtmpt://hostip[:port]/path-to-file
rtmpe://hostip[:port]/path-to-file
rtmpte://hostip[:port]/path-to-file
Note: Conversion from encrypted content to unencrypted content, such as from RTMPE
to RTMP, is not supported.
n To pre-populate streaming content using RTSP or MMS, use one of the URL formats:
rtsp://username:password@host:port/path-to-file
mms://username:password@host:port/path-to-file
The sub-fields in the URL are subject to the following requirements:
245 of 604
URL field Requirements
domain For CIFS content only
Can contain the following characters only:
a-z A-Z 0-9 ~!$%&*()-_=+.;’,
Note: Credentials (domain;username:password) must be supplied in the URL that is being sent to the server. The
credentials will be part of the url field unless the from_url is specified; in this case, the credentials are specified as part
of the from_url.
username Can contain the following characters only:
a-z A-Z 0-9 ~!$%&*()-_=+’.,
password Can contain any character except spaces and the following:
< > : “ / \ | ? *
server/host Can contain the following characters only: a-z A-Z 0-9 ~!$%&*()-_=+;.’,
Spaces are not allowed.
share For CIFS content only
Can contain any characters except the following:
< > : “ / \ | ? *
path-to-file Can reference a specific file or a directory. If you specify a directory (without a filename), all files and subdirectories in
that directory will be pre-populated. • Can contain any characters except the following:
< > : “ / \ | ? *
If the path-to-file contains spaces, enclose the entire URL in quotation marks, or substitute each space with the
following escape code: %20. If the path-to-file contains a percent sign, substitute the % with %25.
Note for CIFS URLs: If you do not specify a path, all files and directories in the specified share will be pre-populated.
Example
# (config) content cancel outstanding-requests
ok
See Also
n "Managing Streaming Media" in SGOS Administration Guide
246 of 604
# (config content-analysis)
Synopsis
Configure Content Analysis.
Use the edit ICAP commands to configure the ICAP service used to integrate the ProxySG with a virus scanning server. The
configuration is specific to the virus scanning server and includes the server IP address, as well as the supported number of
connections. If you are using the appliance with multiple virus scanning servers or multiple scanning services on the same
server, add an ICAP service for each server or scanning service.
Note: When you define virus scanning policies, use the same service name. Make sure you
type the ICAP service name accurately when configuring the service on the ProxySG
appliance or defining policies. The name retrieves the other configuration settings for that
service.
Syntax
# (config) content-analysis
# (config content-analysis)
Subcommands
# (config content-analysis) create icap icap_service_name
Creates an ICAP service.
# (config content-analysis) create service-group service_group_name
Creates an ICAP service group.
# (config content-analysis) delete name
Deletes a content analysis service.
# (config content-analysis) edit icap_service_name
Edits the specified ICAP service. Changes the prompt to "# (config icap service_name)" on page 249.
# (config content-analysis) edit service_group_name
Edits the specified ICAP service group. Changes the prompt to "# (config service-group group_name)" on page 252.
# (config content-analysis) exit
247 of 604
# (config content-analysis) icap feedback interactive patience-page {seconds}
For traffic associated with a Web browser, display a patience page after the specified duration.
# (config content-analysis) icap feedback {interactive {trickle-start {seconds} | trickle-end

{seconds} | none} | non-interactive {trickle-start {seconds} | trickle-end {seconds} | none}}
For interactive traffic (associated with a Web browser) or non-traffic (originating from a client other than a Web browser),
employ a data trickling method so the user receives a small amount (trickle-start) or large amount (trickle-end) of object data
while waiting for the results of the content scan (ICAP). Begin trickling after the specified duration.
# (config content-analysis) inline http icap-patience {details eof | header eof | help eof | summary
eof}
Customizes ICAP patience page details for HTTP connections.
# (config content-analysis) inline ftp icap-patience text eof
Customizes ICAP patience page details for FTP connections.
# (config content-analysis) view
Shows Content Analysis and external service groups.
Example
# (config) content-analysis
# (config content-analysis) create icap testicap
ok
See Also
n "# (config icap service_name)" on the facing page
n "# (config service-group group_name)" on page 252
248 of 604
# (config icap service_name)

Synopsis
Edits the specified ICAP service.
Syntax
# (config content-analysis) edit ICAP_service_name
# (config icap service_name)
Subcommands
# (config icap service_name) defer-threshold threshold
Sets the threshold at which the appliance defers the oldest ICAP connection that has not yet received a full object. The
threshold can be from 0 to 100 percent.
# (config icap service_name) exit
Returns to "# (config content-analysis)" on page 247.
# (config icap service_name) event-log connection-failure
Enables logging of connection failures.
# (config icap service_name) max-conn number
Sets the maximum number of connections for the ICAP service.
# (config icap service_name) methods [REQMOD | RESPMOD}
Enables support for request modification or response modification.
# (config icap service_name) no subcommand
Negates the specified subcommand.
# (config icap service_name) notify virus-detected
If the ICAP scan detects a virus, the event is noted in the event log and a notification is emailed to the administrator and the
event log email list.
# (config icap service_name) persistent-connection
Enables persistent connection to the ICAP server.
# (config icap service_name) port {number | default}
249 of 604
Specifies the plain ICAP port or use default port 1344.
# (config icap service_name) preview-size bytes
Sets the preview size for the RESPMOD service if one of the following applies to your deployment:
n If you use file scanning policies based on file extensions on the ProxyAV appliance, specify 0 bytes so that only
response headers are sent to the ICAP server. More object data is sent if the ICAP server requests it.
n If you have enabled the Kaspersky Apparent Data Types feature on the ProxyAV appliance, specify a non-zero value
(512 is recommended). The ICAP server reads the object up to the specified byte total. The ICAP server either
continues with the transaction (that is, receives the remainder of the object for scanning) or opts out of the transaction.
# (config icap service_name) secure-port {number | default}
Specifies the secure ICAP port or use default port 11344. In addition, make sure that you specify an SSL device profile for
secure ICAP connections.
# (config icap service_name) send {authenticated-groups | authenticated-user | client-address |

server-address }
Forwards the specified additional information to the ICAP server.
# (config icap service_name) sense-settings
Automatically configures the ICAP service using the ICAP server parameters.
# (config icap service_name) service-type {dlp | threat-protection | other }
Identifies the ICAP service type as being DLP, Threat Protection, or other. Use this option if you are migrating appliance policy
to the Symantec Web Security Service.
# (config icap service_name) ssl-device-profile profile_name
Specifies the SSL device profile to use for secure ICAP connections. This is required for secure ICAP.
# (config icap service_name) timeout seconds
Specifies a value from 1 to 65535. This is the number of seconds that the appliance waits for replies from the ICAP server. The
default timeout is 70.
# (config icap service_name) url URL
Specifies the ICAP server URL, which can be the URL schema, ICAP server hostname, or IP address. If you use third-party
ICAP, refer to the vendor for the appropriate URL format.
# (config icap service_name) use-vendor-virus-page
If applicable, uses the default ICAP vendor's error exception page.
# (config icap service_name) view
Displays the service's current configuration.
250 of 604
Example
# (config icap ICAP_1) ssl-device-profile ssl_1
ok
# (config icap ICAP_1) secure-port 90
ok
See Also
n "# (config content-analysis)" on page 247
n "# (config service-group group_name)" on the next page
251 of 604
# (config service-group group_name)

Synopsis
Edits the specified ICAP service group.
Syntax
# (config content-analysis) edit service_group_name
# (config service-group group_name)
Subcommands
# (config service-group group_name) add service_name
Adds an existing ICAP service to the group.
# (config service-group group_name) edit service_name
Edits the specified service. The service must be a member of the current group. Changes the prompt to "# (config service-
group group_name service_name)" on the facing page.
# (config service-group group_name) exit
Returns to "# (config content-analysis)" on page 247.
# (config service-group group_name) remove service_name
Removes the specified service from the current group.
# (config service-group group_name) view
Displays the service group's current configuration.
Example
# (config service-group serviceCA1) add ICAP_2
ok
See Also
n "# (config icap service_name)" on page 249
252 of 604
# (config service-group group_name service_name)

Synopsis
Edits the settings of the current ICAP service within the service group.
Syntax
# (config service-group group_name) edit service_name
# (config service-group group_name service_name)
Subcommands
# (config service-group group_name service_name) exit
Returns to "# (config service-group group_name)" on the previous page.
# (config service-group group_name service_name) view
Display the current service's settings.
# (config service-group group_name service_name) weight 0_to_25
Sets the current service's weight within the group.
Example
# (config service-group groupCA service2) view
service2
weight 1
See Also
n "# (config icap service_name)" on page 249
n "# (config service-group group_name)" on the previous page
253 of 604
# (config content-filter)
Synopsis
The ProxySG appliance offers the option of using content filtering to control the type of retrieved content and to filter requests
made by clients. The appliance supports the following content filtering methods:
n Local database
This method allows you to create and maintain your own content-filtering list locally, through the ProxySG CLI or
Management Console.
n Symantec Coat Web Filter (BCWF)
BCWF is a highly effective content-filtering service that can quickly learn and adapt to the working set of its users.
Also, BCWF can use Dynamic Real Time Rating (DRTR) to analyze requested Web pages in real time, blocking new,
unrated content on the fly, while providing the database with instant updates that impact all users without service
interruption.
n Internet Watch Foundation® (IWF)
The IWF is a non-profit organization that provides enterprises with a list of known child pornography URLs. The IWF
database features a single category called IWF-Restricted, which is detectable and blockable using policy. IWF can be
enabled along with other content-filtering services.
n Vendor-based content filtering
This method allows you to block URLs using vendor-defined categories. For this method, use content-filtering solutions
from the following vendors:
o Optenet
o Proventia™
You can also combine this type of content filtering with the ProxySG policies, which use CPL.
n YouTube™
You can enable YouTube categories and then add policy that refers to these categories to control traffic. For example,
you could block videos that YouTube categorizes as Entertainment and Movies. You can enable and disable this
feature in the CLI.
This feature is provided on an "as-is" basis. Symantec has no control of, and is not responsible for, information and
content provided (or not) by YouTube. Customer is required to apply and use its own API key in order to activate this
feature, and therefore obligated to comply with all terms of use regarding the foregoing (for example, see
https://developers.google.com/youtube/terms), including quotas, restrictions and limits on use that may be imposed by
YouTube. Symantec shall not be liable for any change, discontinuance, availability or functionality of the features
described herein.
254 of 604
n Denying access to URLs through policy
This method allows you to block by URL, including filtering by scheme, domain, or individual host or IP address. For
this method, you define ProxySG policies, which use CPL.
Syntax
# (config) content-filter
Subcommands
# (config content-filter) bluecoat
Enters configuration mode for the Blue Coat provider. Changes prompt to "# (config bluecoat)" on page 259.
# (config content-filter) categories
Shows available categories.
# (config content-filter) cpu-throttle {enable | disable}
Specifies whether to limit CPU utilization to 25% for content filtering database updates. By default, this option is enabled
(meaning that CPU is limited for database downloads).
# (config content-filter) exit
# (config content-filter) iwf
Enters configuration mode for IWF. Changes prompt to "# (config iwf)" on page 263.
# (config content-filter) local
Enters configuration mode for local databases. Changes prompt to "# (config local)" on page 266.
# (config content-filter) memory-allocation {high | low | normal}
Sets the amount of RAM that the content filter service can use.
Note: The default memory allocation (normal) is ideal for most deployments. Changing the
memory allocation might have significant impacts on performance of the appliance. Be sure
that the setting you choose is appropriate for your deployment.
255 of 604
Content filtering databases are becoming larger and can cause CPU spikes, restarts and issues with the ProxySG appliance’s
performance. If you find this is the case, you can change the amount of RAM (the ceiling) that the content filtering service
(CFS) is allowed to use. The high option maximizes memory use for content-filtering, and the low option minimizes memory
use for content- filtering.
Adjust the amount of memory allocated to the database in the following situations:
n If you are not using ADN and have a high transaction rate for content filtering, you can increase the memory allocation
setting to high. This helps content filtering run more efficiently.
n If you are using both ADN and content filtering but the transaction rate for content filtering is not very high, you can
reduce the memory allocation setting to low. This makes more resources available for ADN, allowing it to support a
larger number of concurrent connections.
The command causes a reload of all enabled content filter providers, with the new effective ceiling in place.
If you downgrade the SGOS, memory allocation reverts to normal for the platform. When re-upgraded, the selected setting is
reinstated on the ProxySG appliance.
# (config content-filter) no review-message
Specifies that vendor categorization review be turned off.
# (config content-filter) provider bluecoat {disable | enable | lookup-mode {always | uncategorized}}
Enables or disables the Blue Coat provider. The lookup-mode option specifies whether every URL should be categorized by
the downloaded filter.
# (config content-filter) provider local {disable | enable | lookup-mode {always | uncategorized}}
Enables or disables the default local database. The lookup-mode option specifies whether every URL should be categorized by
the downloaded filter.
# (config content-filter) provider local {disable database_name | enable database_name | lookup-mode

{always database_name | uncategorized database_name}}
Enables or disables the specified local database. The lookup-mode option specifies whether every URL should be categorized
by the downloaded filter.
# (config content-filter) provider iwf {disable | enable | lookup-mode {always | uncategorized}}
Enables or disables IWF filtering. The lookup-mode option specifies whether every URL should be categorized by the
downloaded filter.
# (config content-filter) provider 3rd-party lookup-mode
Sets lookup mode for a third-party provider for content filtering.
# (config content-filter) provider 3rd-party none
Specifies that a third-party vendor not be used for content filtering.
256 of 604
# (config content-filter) provider 3rd-party optenet
Selects Optenet content filtering.
# (config content-filter) provider 3rd-party proventia
Selects Proventia Web Filter content filtering.
# (config content-filter) provider youtube {disable | enable}
Disables or enables YouTube categories. It is disabled by default. See "# (config youtube)" on page 271 for requirements
before you can enable or disable the feature.
# (config content-filter) review-message
Used for categorization review for certain providers. The review-message setting enables two substitutions that can be used in
exceptions pages to allow users to review or dispute content categorization results.
# (config content-filter) test-url URL
Displays categories (defined by the system, policy, and enabled providers) and category groups (defined by the system,
policy, and the Blue Coat provider if enabled) for the specified URL.
# (config content-filter) view
Shows the current settings for the local database (if it is in use) and the selected provider (if one is selected).
# (config content-filter) view categories
Displays all categories defined by the system and policy. If the Blue Coat provider is enabled, displays all categories and
category groups.
# (config content-filter) view categories group group
(Requires enabled Blue Coat provider) Displays system, policy, and Blue Coat categories that belong to the specified category
group or subgroup. Enclose group names with spaces with double quotes, such as # (config content-filter) view
categories group "file transfer". If the Blue Coat provider is disabled, the CLI returns none for this command.
# (config content-filter) view groups
If the Blue Coat provider is enabled, displays all category groups and subgroups defined by the system, policy, and Blue Coat.
If the Blue Coat provider is disabled, the CLI returns only system-defined category groups for this command.
# (config content-filter) youtube
Configures YouTube categories. Changes prompt to "# (config youtube)" on page 271.
Example
# (config content-filter) test netflix.com
Testing URL 'http://netflix.com/'
categories:
257 of 604
Policy: none
Blue Coat: TV/Video Streams; Entertainment
groups:
Blue Coat: Multimedia; Non-Productive; Leisure
See Also
n "# (config bluecoat)" on the facing page
n "# (config iwf)" on page 263
n "# (config local)" on page 266
n "# (config youtube)" on page 271
258 of 604
# (config bluecoat)
Synopsis
Configure Symantec WebFilter and Intelligence Services for content filtering. Commands for downloading the database from
an internal server are available only if Intelligence Services is selected as the data source.
Syntax
# (config bluecoat)
Subcommands
# (config bluecoat) data-source web-filter
Specifies Symantec WebFilter for the data source.
# (config bluecoat) data-source intelligence-services
Specifies Intelligence Services for the data source.
# (config bluecoat) download all-day
Checks for database updates all day.
# (config bluecoat) download auto
Enables automatic database downloads.
# (config bluecoat) download between-hours start_hour stop_hour
Sets the interval for automatic database update checks.
# (config bluecoat) download cancel
# (config bluecoat) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Specifies the encrypted password for the database download server. If Intelligence Services is selected as the data source,
specifies the encrypted password when downloading from an internal server.
259 of 604
# (config bluecoat) download get-now
# (config bluecoat) download get-now background
Downloads the latest data in the background. You can continue to use the CLI while the download is in progress. If the
# (config bluecoat) download password password
Specifies the password for the database download server. If Intelligence Services is selected as the data source, specifies the
password to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config bluecoat) download profile ssl_device_profile
Specifies the SSL device profile to secure connections to the internal server.
# (config bluecoat) download url {default | url}
Specifies using either the default URL or a specific URL for the database download server. If Intelligence Services is selected
as the data source, only url is available, and it specifies the URL for an internal server for database download.
# (config bluecoat) download username username
Specifies the username for the database download server. If Intelligence Services is selected as the data source, specifies the
username for the internal server for database download.
# (config bluecoat) exit
Returns to "# (config content-filter)" on page 254 mode.
# (config bluecoat) no download auto
(WebFilter only) Disables automatic download.
# (config bluecoat) no download encrypted-password
Clears the encrypted password for the database download server.
# (config bluecoat) no download password
(WebFilter only) Clears the password for the database download server.
# (config bluecoat) no download url
Clears the URL for the database download server. If Intelligence Services is the data source and an internal server is
specified, clearing this parameter resets the database download option to the default (direct download from Symantec).
# (config bluecoat) no download username
Clears the username for the database download server.
260 of 604
# (config bluecoat) service clear-cache
Clears the WebPulse cache, effective whether WebFilter or Intelligence Services is the data source. Use this command
instead of disabling and re-enabling the WebPulse service, for example, when a URL is categorized incorrectly.
# (config bluecoat) service {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the dynamic categorization service.
# (config bluecoat) service forward {host_or_group_alias | none}
Configures the forwarding host for use with dynamic categorization; stops forwarding of dynamic service requests.
# (config bluecoat) service send-https-url {full | path | disable}
Configures the HTTPS mode and level of information sent in dynamic categorization requests for HTTPS transactions sent to
WebPulse:
n full — Send entire URL (domain, path, and query string).
n path — Send only the domain and path.
n disable — Do not send a rating request for HTTPS transactions.
# (config bluecoat) service socks-gateway {gateway_alias | none}
Configures the SOCKS gateway for use with dynamic categorization; stops the use of a SOCKS gateway with dynamic
service requests .
# (config bluecoat) service mode {background | realtime | none}
Configures the default dynamic categorization to run in the background, run in real time, or to not run.
# (config bluecoat) service send-request-info {enable | disable}
Configures default dynamic rating service information handling.
# (config bluecoat) service send-malware-info {enable | disable}
Configures malware found notifications to the WebPulse service.
# (config bluecoat) view
Shows the current Blue Coat content filtering settings.
Example
# (config bluecoat) service mode background
ok
261 of 604
See Also
n "# (config content-filter)" on page 254
262 of 604
# (config iwf)
Synopsis
Configure Internet Watch Foundation content filtering.
Syntax
# (config iwf)
Subcommands
# (config iwf) download all-day
Checks for database updates all day.
# (config iwf) download auto
Enables automatic database downloads.
# (config iwf) download between-hours start_hour stop_hour
Sets the interval for automatic database update checks.
# (config iwf) download cancel
# (config iwf) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Specifies the encrypted password for the database download server.
# (config iwf) download get-now
# (config iwf) download get-now background
263 of 604
# (config iwf) download password password
Specifies the password for the database download server.
# (config iwf) download url {default | url}
Specifies using either the default URL or a specific URL for the database download server.
# (config iwf) download username username
Specifies the username for the database download server.
# (config iwf) exit
# (config iwf) no download auto
(WebFilter only) Disables automatic download.
# (config iwf) no download encrypted-password
Clears the encrypted password for the database download server.
# (config iwf) no download password
(WebFilter only) Clears the password for the database download server.
# (config iwf) no download url
Clears the URL for the database download server. If Intelligence Services is the data source and an internal server is
specified, clearing this parameter resets the database download option to the default (direct download from Symantec).
# (config iwf) no download username
Clears the username for the database download server.
# (config iwf) view
Shows the current IWF content filtering settings.
Example
# (config iwf) download password password
ok
264 of 604
See Also
265 of 604
# (config local)
Synopsis
Configure the default local content filtering database. You require access to a web server to host a local database.
Syntax
# (config local)
Subcommands
# (config local) clear
Clears the local database.
# (config local) create database_name
Creates an additional local database with the specified name. You can create up to seven named local databases in addition to
the default. See "# (config local database_name) " on page 268.
# (config local) delete database_name
Deletes the specified local database.
# (config local) edit database_name
Edits settings for the specified non-default local database. Changes prompt to "# (config local database_name) " on page 268.
# (config local) exit
# (config local) view
Shows the default local database settings.
# (config local) view databases
Displays the list of all local databases.
266 of 604
Example
# (config local) view databases
default
local1
local2
...
See Also
n "# (config local database_name) " on the next page
267 of 604
# (config local database_name)

Synopsis
Configures the default content filtering database and custom local databases. As with the default local database, you require a
web server to create additional local databases. You can create up to seven additional databases.
To enable a custom local database after it is configured, you must use the # (config content-filter) provider local
enable database_name command.
Syntax
# (config local)
# (config local) edit database_name
# (config database_name)
Subcommands
# (config local database_name) clear
Clears the current local database from the system.
# (config local database_name) download all-day
Checks for updates all day for the current local database.
# (config local database_name) download auto
Enables automatic downloads of the current local database.
# (config local database_name) download between-hours start_hour stop_hour
Sets the interval for automatic update checks for the current local database.
# (config local database_name) download cancel
# (config local database_name) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
268 of 604
Specifies the encrypted password for the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) download get-now
Initiates an immediate download of the current local database.
# (config local database_name) download password password
Specifies the password for the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) download url URL
Specifies the URL of the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) download username username
Specifies the username for the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) exit
Returns to "# (config local)" on page 266 mode.
# (config local database_name) no download auto
Disables automatic download.
# (config local database_name) no download encrypted-password
Clears the encrypted password for the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) no download password
Clears the password for the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) no download url
Clears the URL for the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) no download username
Clears the username for the current local database download server.
# (config local database_name) source
Shows the current local database source file.
# (config local database_name) view
Shows the current local database settings.
269 of 604
Example
Configure a custom local database named BadUrls and then enable it. You must enable it to download the database and use
the categories in policy.

# (config local) create BadUrls
Creating BadUrls
ok
# (config local) edit BadUrls
# (config local BadUrls) download url URL
ok
# (config local BadUrls) exit
# (config local) exit
# (config content-filter) provider local enable BadUrls
View the source of the local database named region3.
# (config local) edit region3
# (config local region3) source
; Local Database source:
;
define category region_sites
list_of_URLs
end
...
See Also
n "# (config local)" on page 266
270 of 604
# (config youtube)
Synopsis
Configure YouTube categories.
Syntax
# (config content-filter) youtube
# (config youtube)
Subcommands
# (config youtube) exit
# (config youtube) no server-key
Clears the server key.
Note: You must disable YouTube categories before using this command. You can disable the
feature in the Management Console or using the # (config content-filter) provider
youtube disable command.
# (config youtube) server-key server_key
Sets the server key for YouTube API v3. Refer to TECH245050:
http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH245050
# (config youtube) view
Displays the status and server key (if one is set).
Example
# (config youtube) view
Status: Enabled
271 of 604
Server-key: xxxxxxxxxxxx-_xx_xxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
See Also
272 of 604
# (config diagnostics)
Synopsis
Configure the remote diagnostic feature Heartbeat.
Syntax
# (config) diagnostics
Subcommands
# (config diagnostics) cpu-monitor {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the CPU monitor (the CPU monitor is enabled by default).
# (config diagnostics) cpu-monitor interval seconds
Sets the periodic interval of the CPU monitor from 1 to 59 seconds (the default setting is 5 seconds).
# (config diagnostics) edit snapshot_name
Configures the specified snapshot job. Changes the prompt to "# (config snapshot snapshot_name) " on page 278.
# (config diagnostics) exit
# (config diagnostics) heartbeat {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the appliance Heartbeat features.
# (config diagnostics) monitor {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the Symantec monitoring feature.
# (config diagnostics) no syslog
Clears the Syslog host that is configured for diagnostics upload via the diagnostics probe policy. Refer to define probe in the
Content Policy Language Reference.
# (config diagnostics) send-heartbeat
Triggers a heartbeat report.
# (config diagnostics) service-info
Configures service info. Changes the prompt to "# (config service-info)" on page 282.
273 of 604
# (config diagnostics) snapshot (create | delete} snapshot_name
Create or delete a snapshot job. By default, the sysinfo snapshot job keeps the last 100 snapshots. The sysinfo_stats
snapshot job keeps the last 168 snapshots.
# (config diagnostics) syslog tcp {hostname | IP_address} [port]
Adds a TCP Syslog host for diagnostics uploads when syslog is the delivery method for the diagnostics probe. Refer to
define probe in the Content Policy Language Reference.
# (config diagnostics) syslog tls {hostname | IP_address} [port] [ssl_device_profile_name]
Adds a TLS Syslog host for diagnostics uploads when syslog is the delivery method for the diagnostics probe. Refer to
define probe in the Content Policy Language Reference.
# (config diagnostics) view configuration
Displays diagnostics settings for Heartbeats, CPU monitor, automatic service-info, and snapshots.
# (config diagnostics) view cpu-monitor
Displays the CPU Monitor results.
# (config diagnostics) view service-info
Displays service-info settings and progress.
# (config diagnostics) view snapshot snapshot_name
Displays the snapshot settings (target, status, interval, to keep, to take, and next snapshot) for the snapshot name specified.
# (config diagnostics) view syslog
Displays the configuration settings for the Syslog of the diagnostics probe. Refer to define probe in the Content Policy
Language Reference.
Example
# (config diagnostics) heartbeat enable
ok
See Also
n "# (config service-info)" on page 282
n "# (config snapshot snapshot_name) " on page 278
274 of 604
# (config service-info)
Synopsis
Send service information reports to Symantec.
Note: Some subcommands require a Symantec Support case number.
Syntax
Subcommands
# (config service-info) auto {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the automatic service information feature.
# (config service-info) auto no sr-number
Clears the Support case number for the automatic service information feature.
# (config service-info) auto sr-number sr_number
Sets the Support case number for the automatic service information feature.
# (config service-info) bandwidth-class bandwidth_class_name
Sets a bandwidth class used to manage the bandwidth of service information uploads. In order to do bandwidth-manage
service information uploads, bandwidth management must be enabled. You must also create a bandwidth class for service
information uploads (in bandwidth-management mode) before you can select it here.
# (config service-info) cancel all
Cancel all service information uploads in progress.
# (config service-info) cancel one_or_more_from_view_status
Cancel the specified service information upload(s).
275 of 604
# (config service-info) exit
# (config service-info) no bandwidth-class
Disables bandwidth-management for service information uploads.
# (config service-info) periodic count
Maximum number of periodic service information reports to send.
# (config service-info) periodic custom [custom_reports]
Configure custom service information reports to send.
# (config service-info) periodic disable
Disable periodic sending of service info to Symantec.
# (config service-info) periodic enable
Enable periodic sending of service information reports to Symantec.
# (config service-info) periodic interval interval
Sets the interval (in hours) for periodic upload. For example, type 12 to send reports every 12 hours.
# (config service-info) periodic no {custom | sr-number}
Clear the specified periodic upload parameter.
# (config service-info) periodic sr-number sr_number
Set the Support case number for periodic service information uploads.
# (config service-info) send sr_number one_or_more_commands_from_view_available
Sends a specific Support case number along with a specific command or commands (chosen from the list provided by #
(config service-info) view available) to Symantec.
# (config service-info) view available
Shows list of service information reports than can be sent to Symantec.
# (config service-info) view status
Shows transfer status of service information reports to Symantec.
Example
276 of 604

Service information that can be sent to Symantec
Name Approx Size (bytes)
Event_log 188,416
System_information Unknown
Snapshot_sysinfo Unknown
Snapshot_sysinfo_stats Unknown
See Also
n "# (config diagnostics)" on page 273
277 of 604
# (config snapshot snapshot_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified snapshot job.
Syntax
# (config diagnostics) snapshot edit snapshot_name
# (config snapshot snapshot_name)
Subcommands
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) clear-reports
Clears all stored snapshots reports.
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) {disable | enable}
Disables or enables this snapshot job.
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) exit
Returns to # (config diagnostics) mode.
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) interval minutes
Specifies the interval between snapshots reports in minutes.
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) keep number_to_keep (value_from_1_to_1000)
Specifies the number of snapshot reports to keep.
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) take {infinite | number_to_take}
Specifies the number of snapshot reports to take.
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) target object_to_fetch
Specifies the object to snapshot.
# (config snapshot snapshot_name) view
Displays snapshot status and configuration.
278 of 604
Example
# (config diagnostics) snapshot testshot
# (diagnostics snapshot testshot) enable
ok
See Also
279 of 604
# (config disk-monitor)
Synopsis
The purpose of the disk monitor is to detect problematic drives on physical ProxySG appliances and to proactively stop using
the object store on a drive when disk issues are detected. Disk monitor failure detection is based on error codes received from
the drives in the system, SMART monitoring results, and disk response times.
Note: This command has no impact to appliances that have only a single disk installed.
The offline policies for disk-monitor set how the appliance will handle performance issues with each object store disk or
partition in the system. Performance is measured as a combination of Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology
(SMART) error reports and disk response time. If a disk or partition is performing poorly, disk-monitor will enact the configured
offline policy.
n Disabled: This is the default offline-policy state.
n Conservative Policy: The least intensive policy, the Conservative Policy takes action only when performance issues
are the result of physical errors on disk.
n Moderate Policy: This policy builds on the Conservative policy, with activity based on additional hard disk error code
monitoring.
n Aggressive policy: This policy includes the monitoring activities of the above two policies, and includes SMART disk
errors and disk response time monitoring as well.
Syntax
# (config) disk-monitor
# (config disk-monitor)
Subcommands
# (config disk-monitor) no offline-policy
Disables the disk monitor.
# (config disk-monitor) offline-policy {conservative | moderate | aggressive}
Sets the disk-monitor policy for taking poor-performing object store partitions offline.
# (config diagnostics) view
Shows the current disk-monitor policy
280 of 604
# (config diagnostics) exit
Returns to # (config) prompt.
Example
# (config) disk-monitor
# (config disk-monitor) offline-policy moderate
offline-policy: moderate
281 of 604
Synopsis
Send service information reports to Symantec.
Note: Some subcommands require a Symantec Support case number.
Syntax
Subcommands
# (config service-info) auto {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the automatic service information feature.
# (config service-info) auto no sr-number
Clears the Support case number for the automatic service information feature.
# (config service-info) auto sr-number sr_number
Sets the Support case number for the automatic service information feature.
# (config service-info) bandwidth-class bandwidth_class_name
Sets a bandwidth class used to manage the bandwidth of service information uploads. In order to do bandwidth-manage
service information uploads, bandwidth management must be enabled. You must also create a bandwidth class for service
information uploads (in bandwidth-management mode) before you can select it here.
# (config service-info) cancel all
Cancel all service information uploads in progress.
# (config service-info) cancel one_or_more_from_view_status
Cancel the specified service information upload(s).
282 of 604
# (config service-info) exit
# (config service-info) no bandwidth-class
Disables bandwidth-management for service information uploads.
# (config service-info) periodic count
Maximum number of periodic service information reports to send.
# (config service-info) periodic custom [custom_reports]
Configure custom service information reports to send.
# (config service-info) periodic disable
Disable periodic sending of service info to Symantec.
# (config service-info) periodic enable
Enable periodic sending of service information reports to Symantec.
# (config service-info) periodic interval interval
Sets the interval (in hours) for periodic upload. For example, type 12 to send reports every 12 hours.
# (config service-info) periodic no {custom | sr-number}
Clear the specified periodic upload parameter.
# (config service-info) periodic sr-number sr_number
Set the Support case number for periodic service information uploads.
# (config service-info) send sr_number one_or_more_commands_from_view_available
Sends a specific Support case number along with a specific command or commands (chosen from the list provided by #
(config service-info) view available) to Symantec.
Shows list of service information reports than can be sent to Symantec.
# (config service-info) view status
Shows transfer status of service information reports to Symantec.
Example
283 of 604

Service information that can be sent to Symantec
Name Approx Size (bytes)
Event_log 188,416
System_information Unknown
Snapshot_sysinfo Unknown
Snapshot_sysinfo_stats Unknown
See Also
284 of 604
# (config) dns
Synopsis
Modify the DNS settings for the ProxySG appliance. Alternate DNS servers are only checked if the servers in the standard
DNS list return “Name not found.”
Syntax
# (config) dns {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) dns clear imputing
Sets all entries in the name imputing list to null.
# (config) dns client-affinity {disable | enable}
Disables or enables client-affinity. When enabled, requests from the same client resolve the hostname in the same order.
www.google.com resolves to 66.102.7.99, 66.102.7.147, and 66.102.7.104. If client-affinity is enabled and the appliance
receives a request (http, streaming or other proxy request) for www.google.com, it uses the client’s IP address to determine
the order of the resolved addresses. If client-affinity is disabled, the order of the resolved addresses changed each time the
appliance receives a request.
# (config) dns edns {disable | enable}
Disables or enables extension mechanisms for DNS (EDNS), which allows DNS requesters to receive DNS UDP messages
longer than the default 512 bytes.
# (config) dns imputing name
Specifies the filename of the name imputing list.
# (config) dns negative-cache-ttl-override seconds
Sets the DNS negative cache time-to-live value for seconds. A DNS request to an unknown domain name is cached by the
ProxySG appliance. This type of caching is called a negative cache because it does not resolve to an actual IP address. The
TTL value for a negative cache entry can be overwritten by this command.
# (config) dns no imputing imputed_name
Removes the imputed name identified by imputed_name from the name imputing list.
# (config) dns no negative-cache-ttl-override
Do not override the negative cache time-to-live value.
# (config) dns recursion (disable | enable)
285 of 604
Disables or enables DNS recursion. By default, recursion is disabled. When recursion is enabled, if a server returns
authoritative server information instead of an A record, the ProxySG follows the referrals until it receives an answer or detects
a recursion loop. If there are more than eight referrals, the ProxySG assumes that there is a loop and aborts the request.
Example
# (config) dns imputing symantec.com
ok
286 of 604
# (config dns-forwarding)
Synopsis
Create, delete, and edit DNS forwarding groups for the appliance.
Syntax
# (config) dns-forwarding
Subcommands
# (config dns forwarding) create group_alias [host_ip]
Creates a DNS forwarding group.
# (config dns forwarding) delete group_alias
Deletes a DNS forwarding group.
# (config dns forwarding) edit {primary | alternate | group_alias}
Edits the specified forwarding group. Changes the prompt to # (config dns forwarding group_name).
# (config dns forwarding) exit
# (config dns forwarding) view
Displays snapshot status and configuration.
Example
# (config dns forwarding) create testgroup 1.1.1.1
ok
See Also
n "# (config) dns" on page 285
287 of 604
# (config dns-forwarding group_name)

Synopsis
Edit a DNS forwarding group.
Syntax
# (config) dns-forwarding
# (config dns forwarding) edit {primary | alternate | group_alias}
# (config dns forwarding group_name)
Subcommands
# (config dns fowarding group_name) add {domain domain | server server_ip}
Adds domains or DNS servers to this group. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6.
# (config dns fowarding group_name) clear {domain | server}
Clears the domain or server list for this group.
#(config dns fowarding group_name) demote server_ip [slots]
Demotes the specified server IP address.
# (config dns fowarding group_name) exit
Returns to the "# (config dns-forwarding)" on the previous page prompt.
# (config dns fowarding group_name) promote server_ip [slots]
Promotes the specified server IP address in the DNS server list the number of places indicated. Must be a positive number. If
the number is greater than the number of servers in the list, the server is promoted to the first entry in the list.
# (config dns fowarding group_name) remove {domain | server}
Removes a domain or server from the list.
# (config dns fowarding group_name) routing-domain routing_domain_name
Associates a DNS forwarding group with a configured Routing Domain.
# (config dns fowarding group_name) view
288 of 604
Displays the DNS forwarding configuration for this group.
Example
# config dns forwarding primary) add server 192.0.2.0
ok
# (config dns forwarding primary) demote 192.0.2.0
% Server is already last in the list.
# (config dns forwarding primary) promote 192.0.2.0
# (config dns forwarding primary) view
Group: primary
Servers:
1.1.1.1
1.2.1.1
Domains:
See Also
n "# (config) dns" on page 285
n "# (config dns-forwarding)" on page 287
289 of 604
# (config event-log)
Synopsis
Configure the ProxySG appliance to log system events as they occur. Event logging allows you to specify the types of system
events logged, the size of the event log, and to configure Syslog monitoring. The appliance can also notify you by e-mail if an
event is logged.
Note: When configuring Syslog monitoring, make sure that the transport protocol (UDP, TCP,
or TLS) is enabled on the Syslog loghost server. Symantec recommends that you use TLS for
best security instead of UDP or TCP. Before configuring a Syslog host using TLS, create client
and server certificates and import them to the respective systems. For details, refer to the
SGOS Administration Guide, “Monitoring the Appliance” chapter.
Syntax
# (config) event-log
# (config event-log)
Subcommands
# (config event-log) exit
# (config event-log) level configuration
Writes severe and configuration change error messages to the event log.
# (config event-log) level informational
Writes severe, configuration change, policy event, and information error messages to the event log.
# (config event-log) level policy
Writes severe, configuration change, and policy event error messages to the event log.
# (config event-log) level severe
Writes only severe error messages to the event log.
# (config event-log) level verbose
Writes all error messages to the event log.
# (config event-log) log-size megabytes
290 of 604
Specifies the maximum size of the event log in megabytes.
# (config event-log) mail add email_address
Specifies an e-mail recipient for the event log output.
# (config event-log) mail clear
Removes all e-mail recipients from the event log e-mail output distribution list.
# (config event-log) mail remove email_address
Removes the e-mail recipient indicated by email_address from the event log e-mail output distribution list.
# (config event-log) syslog add [udp] {host_name | ip_address} [port]
Adds a Syslog loghost with UDP. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of your loghost server, or specify a domain name that
resolves to an IPv4 or IPv6 address. If you do not specify a port number, port 514 is used by default.
# (config event-log) syslog add tcp {host_name | ip_address} [port]
Adds a Syslog loghost with TCP. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of your loghost server, or specify a domain name that
resolves to an IPv4 or IPv6 address. If you do not specify a port number, port 6514 is used by default.
# (config event-log) syslog add tls {host_name | ip_address} [port] [ssl_device_profile_name]
Adds a Syslog loghost with TLS. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of your loghost server, or specify a domain name that
resolves to an IPv4 or IPv6 address. If you do not specify a port number, port 6514 is used by default. Specify an existing SSL
device profile to secure the appliance’s communication with the Syslog server.
# (config event-log) syslog clear
Removes all Syslog loghosts from system logging notification.
# (config event-log) syslog {disable | enable}
Disables or enables Syslog logging notifications.
# (config event-log) syslog facility {auth | daemon | kernel | local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 |
local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 | lpr | mail | news | syslog | user | uucp}
Sets the facility that is used when sending to a Syslog server.
# (config event-log) syslog remove [udp] {host_name | ip_address}
Removes the specified UDP Syslog loghost.
# (config event-log) syslog remove tcp {host_name | ip_address}
Removes the specified TCP Syslog loghost.
# (config event-log) syslog remove tls {host_name | ip_address}
291 of 604
Removes the specified TLS Syslog loghost.
# (config event-log) view [configuration] [start [YYYY-mm-dd] [HH:MM:SS]] [end [YYYY-mm-dd]

[HH:MM:SS]] [regex regular_expression | substring string]
Displays the event-log configuration using the # (config event-log) configuration command, or displays the contents of
the event-log using the filters as needed.
# (config event-log) when-full {overwrite | stop}
Specifies what should happen to the event log when the maximum size has been reached. overwrite overwrites the oldest
information in a FIFO manner; stop disables event logging.
Example
# (config) event-log
# (config event-log) syslog enable
ok
See Also
n “Monitoring the Appliance" in SGOS Administration Guide
292 of 604
# (config exceptions)
Synopsis
Configure built-in and user-defined exception response objects.
Syntax
# (config) exceptions
Subcommands
# (config exceptions) create exception_id
Creates the given exception.
# (config exceptions) company-name name
Sets the name used for the $(exception.company_name) substitution. For details, refer to the ProxySG Log Fields and CPL
Substitutions Reference.
# (config exceptions) delete exception_id
Deletes the exception specified by exception_id.
# (config exceptions) edit {exception_id | user_defined_exception_id}
Edits a built-in exception or a user-defined exception. Changes the prompt to "# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_
id)" on page 296.
# (config exceptions) exit
# (config exceptions) http-code HTTP_code
Specifies the default HTTP response code for all built-in exceptions.
# (config exceptions) inline contact eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.contact) substitution for all built-in exceptions.
# (config exceptions) inline details eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.details) substitution for all built-in exceptions.
# (config exceptions) inline format eof_marker
293 of 604
Sets the format for all built-in exceptions.
# (config exceptions) inline help eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.help) substitution for all built-in exceptions.
# (config exceptions) inline http {contact eof_marker | details eof_marker | format eof_marker | help
eof_marker | summary eof_marker} | summary eof_marker}
Configures the specified substitution fields for built-in HTTP exceptions only.
# (config exceptions) user-defined inline summary eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.summary) substitution for all user-defined exceptions.
# (config exceptions) load exceptions
Downloads new exceptions.
# (config exceptions) no path
Clears the network path to download exceptions.
# (config exceptions) path URL
Specifies the network path to download exceptions.
# (config exceptions) user-defined http-code numeric_http_response_code}
Sets the default HTTP response code for all user-defined exceptions.
# (config exceptions) user-defined inline contact eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.contact) substitution for all user-defined exceptions.
# (config exceptions) user-defined inline details eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.details) substitution for all user-defined exceptions.
# (config exceptions) user-defined inline format eof_marker
Sets the format for all user-defined exceptions.
# (config exceptions) user-defined inline help eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.help) substitution for all user-defined exceptions.
# (config exceptions) user-defined inline http {contact eof_marker | details eof_marker | format eof_
marker | help eof_marker | summary eof_marker} | summary eof_marker}
Configures the specified substitution fields for user-defined HTTP exceptions only.
# (config exceptions) user-defined inline summary eof_marker
294 of 604
Sets the $(exception.summary) substitution for all user-defined exceptions.
Example
# (config exceptions) default contact
ok
See Also
n Content Policy Language Reference
n ProxySG Log Fields and CPL Substitutions Reference
295 of 604
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id)

Synopsis
Edit a built-in exception or a user-defined exception.
Syntax
# (config exceptions) [user-defined.]exception_id
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id)
Subcommands
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) exit
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) http-codeHTTP_code
Specifies the default HTTP response code for the specified exception.
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) inline contact eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.contact) substitution for the specified exception.
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) inline details eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.details) substitution for the specified exception..
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) inline format eof_marker
Sets the format for the specified exception.
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) inline help eof_marker
Sets the $(exception.help) substitution for the specified exception.
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) inline http {contact eof_marker | details eof_marker

| format eof_marker | help eof_marker | summary eof_marker} | summary eof_marker}
Configures the specified substitution fields for the specified HTTP exception.
# (config exceptions [user-defined.]exception_id) user-defined inline summary eof_marker
296 of 604
Sets the $(exception.summary) substitution for the specified exception.
Example
# (config exceptions) edit testname
# (config exceptions user-defined.testname) http-code 503
ok
See Also
n Content Policy Language Reference
n ProxySG Log Fields and CPL Substitutions Reference
297 of 604
# (config) exit
Synopsis
Exit configuration mode and return to privileged mode. From standard and privileged modes, the exit command closes the CLI
session.
Syntax
# (config) exit
Example
# (config) exit
#
298 of 604
# (config failover)
Synopsis
Configure redundancy in your network.
Syntax
# (config) failover
# (config failover)
Subcommands
# (config failover) create group_address
Creates a failover group.
# (config failover) delete group_address
Deletes a failover group.
# (config failover) edit group_address
Edits the failover group specified by the group address. Changes the prompt to "# (config failover)" above.
# (config failover) exit
# (config failover) view {configuration [group_address] | statistics}
Displays the configuration of all groups or a specified group, or displays all statistics.
Example
# (config) failover
# (config failover) create 10.9.17.135
ok
See Also
n "# (config failover group_address)" on the next page
n "Configuring Failover" in SGOS Administration Guide
299 of 604
# (config failover group_address)

Synopsis
Configure redundancy in your network.
Syntax
# (config) failover
# (config failover)
Subcommands
# (config failover group_address) {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the specified failover group.
# (config failover group_address) encrypted-secret encrypted_secret
Specifies an encrypted password shared only with the group.
# (config failover group_address) exit
Returns to "# (config failover)" on the previous page mode.
# (config failover group_address) interval interval_in_seconds
(Optional) Refers to the time between advertisements from the master to the multicast address. The default is 40 seconds.
# (config failover group_address) master
Defines the current system as the master and all other systems as slaves.
# (config failover group_address) multicast-address multicast_address
Refers to a multicast address where the master sends the keepalives (advertisements) to the slave systems.
# (config failover group_address) no interval
Resets the interval to the default value (40 seconds).
# (config failover group_address) no multicast-address
Removes the multicast address from the failover group.
# (config failover group_address) no master
Removes as configured master.
# (config failover group_address) no priority
300 of 604
Resets the priority to the default value (100).
# (config failover group_address) no secret
Clears the secret from the failover group.
# (config failover group_address) priority relative_priority
Specifies the rank of slave systems. The range is from 1 to 253. The master system, whose IP address matches the group
address, is ranked 254.
# (config failover group_address) secret secret
(Optional but recommended) Refers to a password shared only with the group. You can create a secret, which is then hashed.
# (config failover group_address) view
Shows the current settings for the specified failover group.
Example
# (config) failover
# (config failover) edit 10.9.17.135
# (config failover 10.9.17.135) master
ok
See Also
n "# (config failover)" on page 299
n "Configuring Failover" in SGOS Administration Guide
301 of 604
# (config forwarding)
Synopsis
Configure forwarding of content requests to defined hosts and groups through policy.
Syntax
# (config) forwarding
Subcommands
# (config forwarding) create host host_alias host_name [http[=port] [https[=port]] [ftp[=port]] [mms
[=port]] [rtsp[=port]] [tcp[=port]] [telnet[=port]] [ssl-verify-server[={yes | no}] [group=group_name]
[server | proxy]
Creates a forwarding host with the specified properties. The host name can be an IPv4 or IPv6 host or address. The port
number can be defined explicitly (such as http=8080), or it can take on the default port value of the protocol, if one exists (for
example, type http, and the default port value of 80 is used automatically).
To create a host group, you must also include the group=group_name command. If a group with the specified name does not
already exist, the group is automatically created with this host as its first member. Do not use this subcommand when creating
an independent host.
# (config forwarding) create group group_name
Creates a forwarding group with the specified name.
# (config forwarding) default-sequence add host_or_group_alias
Adds an alias to the end of the default failover sequence.
# (config forwarding) default-sequence clear
Clears the default failover sequence.
# (config forwarding) default-sequence demote host_or_group_alias
Demotes an alias one place toward the end of the default failover sequence.
# (config forwarding) default-sequence promote host_or_group_alias
Promotes an alias one place toward the start of the default failover sequence.
# (config forwarding) default-sequence remove host_or_group_alias
Removes an alias from the default failover sequence.
302 of 604
# (config forwarding) delete all
Deletes all forwarding hosts and groups.
# (config forwarding) delete group group_name
Deletes the specified group.
# (config forwarding) delete host host_alias
Deletes the specified host.
# (config forwarding) download-via-forwarding {disable | enable}
Disables or enables configuration file downloading using forwarding.
# (config forwarding) edit group_alias
Edits the specified forwarding group. Changes the prompt to "# (config forwarding group_alias)" on page 306.
# (config forwarding) edithost_alias
Edits the specified forwarding host. Changes the prompt to "# (config forwarding group_alias)" on page 306
# (config forwarding) exit
# (config forwarding) failure-mode {closed | open}
Sets the default forwarding failure mode to closed or open.
# (config forwarding) host-affinity http method {accelerator-cookie [host_or_group_alias] | client-ip-

address [host_or_group_alias] | default [host_or_group_alias] | none [host_or_group_alias]}
Selects a host affinity method for HTTP. If a host or group alias is not specified for the accelerator-cookie, client-ip-address, or
none options, the global default is used. Use the default option to specify default configurations for all the settings for a
specified host or group.
# (config forwarding) host-affinity ssl method {accelerator-cookie [host_or_group_alias] | client-ip-

address [host_or_group_alias] | default [host_or_group_alias] | none [host_or_group_alias] | ssl-
session-id [host_or_group_alias]}
Selects a host affinity method for SSL. If a host or group alias is not specified for the accelerator-cookie, client-ip-address,
none, or ssl-session-id options, the global default is used. Use the default option to specify default configurations for all the
settings for a specified host or group.
# (config forwarding) host-affinity other method {client-ip-address [host_or_group_alias] | default

[host_or_group_alias] | none [host_or_group_alias]}
303 of 604
Selects a host affinity method (non-HTTP or non-SSL). If a host or group alias is not specified for the client-ip-address, or none
options, the global default is used. Use the default option to specify default configurations for all the settings for a specified
host or group.
# (config forwarding) host-affinity timeout minutes
Sets the timeout in minutes for the host affinity.
# (config forwarding) integrated-host-timeout minutes
Sets the timeout for aging out unused integrated hosts.
# (config forwarding) load-balance group {default [group_alias] | domain-hash [group_alias] | least-

connections [group_alias] | none [group_alias] | round-robin [group_alias] | url-hash [group_alias]}
Sets if and how load balancing hashes between group members. If a group alias is not specified for the domain-hash, least-
connections, round-robin, url-hash, or none options, the global default is used. Use the default option to specify default
configurations for all the settings for a specified group.
# (config forwarding) load-balance host {default [host_alias] | least-connections [host_alias] | none

[host_alias] | round-robin [host_alias]}
Sets the load balancing method for hosts. If a host alias is not specified for the least-connections, round-robin, or none options,
the global default is used. Use the default option to specify default configurations for all the settings for a specified host.
# (config forwarding) no path
Negates certain forwarding settings.
# (config forwarding) path URL
Sets the network path to download forwarding settings.
# (config forwarding) view
Displays the currently defined forwarding groups or hosts.
Example
# (config forwarding) download-via-forwarding disable
ok
# (config forwarding) failure-mode closed
ok
# (config forwarding) host-affinity method client-ip-address
ok
# (config forwarding) load-balance hash domain group_name1
ok
304 of 604
See Also
n "# (config forwarding group_alias)" on the next page
n "# (config forwarding host_alias)" on page 308
n "Configuring the Upstream Network Environment" in SGOS Administration Guide
305 of 604
# (config forwarding group_alias)

Synopsis
Edit the specified forwarding group.
Syntax
# (config forwarding) edit group_alias
# (config forwarding group_alias)
Subcommands
# (config forwarding group_alias) add
Adds a new group.
# (config forwarding group_alias) exit
Returns to "# (config forwarding)" on page 302 mode.
# (config forwarding group_alias) host-affinity http {accelerator-cookie | client-ip-address | default

| none}
Changes the host affinity method (non-SSL) for this group.
# (config forwarding group_alias) host-affinity other {client-ip-address | default | none}
Changes the other host affinity method for this group.
# (config forwarding group_alias) host-affinity ssl {accelerator-cookie | client-ip-address | default

| ssl-session-id | none}
Changes the host affinity method (SSL) for this group.
# (config forwarding group_alias) load-balance {default | domain-hash | least-connections | none |

round-robin | url-hash}
Sets the load balancing method.
# (config forwarding group_alias) remove
Removes an existing group.
306 of 604
# (config forwarding group_alias) view
Displays the current settings for this forwarding group.
Example
# (config forwarding) edit test_group
# (config forwarding test_group) load-balance hash domain
ok
# (config forwarding test_group) exit
See Also
n "# (config forwarding)" on page 302
n "# (config forwarding host_alias)" on the next page
307 of 604
# (config forwarding host_alias)

Synopsis
Edit the specified forwarding host.
Syntax
# (config forwarding) edit host_alias
# (config forwarding host_alias)
Subcommands
# (config forwarding host_alias) exit
Returns to "# (config forwarding)" on page 302 mode.
# (config forwarding host_alias) ftp [port]
Changes the FTP port. If a port number is not specified, the default port is used.
# (config forwarding host_alias) host host_name
Changes the host name.
# (config forwarding host_alias) host-affinity http {accelerator-cookie | client-ip-address | default

| none}
Changes the host affinity method (non-SSL) for this host.
# (config forwarding host_alias) host-affinity other {client-ip-address | default | none}
Changes the other host affinity method for this host.
# (config forwarding host_alias) host-affinity ssl {accelerator-cookie | client-ip-address | default |

ssl-session-id | none}
Changes the host affinity method (SSL) for this host.
# (config forwarding host_alias) http [port]
Changes the HTTP port. If a port number is not specified, the default port is used.
# (config forwarding host_alias) https [port]
308 of 604
Changes the HTTPS port. If a port number is not specified, the default port is used.
# (config forwarding host_alias) load-balance {default | domain-hash | least-connections | none |

round-robin | url-hash}
Sets the load balancing method.
# (config forwarding host_alias) mmps [port]
Changes the MMS port. If a port number is not specified, the default port is used.
# (config forwarding host_alias) no {ftp | http | https | mms | rtsp | ssl-verify-server | tcp |
telnet}
Clears the specified setting.
# (config forwarding host_alias) proxy
Makes the host a proxy instead of a server; any HTTPS or TCP ports are deleted.
# (config forwarding host_alias) rtsp [port]
Changes the RTSP port to the default port or to a port that you specify.
# (config forwarding host_alias) server
Makes the host a server instead of a proxy.
# (config forwarding host_alias) ssl-verify-server
Sets SSL to verify server certificates.
Note: This command sets the default for the server.certificate.validate()

CPL property. For details, refer to the Content Policy Language Reference.
# (config forwarding host_alias) tcp [port]
Changes the TCP port to the default port or to a port that you specify.
# (config forwarding host_alias) telnet [port]
Changes the Telnet port to the default port or to a port that you specify.
# (config forwarding host_alias) view
Displays the current settings for this forwarding group.
309 of 604
Example
# (config forwarding) edit test_host
# (config forwarding test_host) server
ok
# (config forwarding test_host) exit
See Also
n "# (config forwarding)" on page 302
n "# (config forwarding group_alias)" on page 306
310 of 604
# (config front-panel)
Synopsis
Configure the appliance's front panel.
Syntax
# (config) front-panel
# (config front-panel)
Subcommands
# (config front-panel) backlight flash
Configures the front-panel LCD to flash. For example, a flashing LCD can help you locate a particular appliance in a room full of
appliances.
# (config front-panel) backlight state {off | on | timeout}
Sets the front-panel LCD to be always turned on, always turned off, or to turn off after a specified length of time (use the
backlight timeout subcommand to configure the length of time).
# (config front-panel) backlight timeout seconds
Sets the length of time before the front-panel LCD turns off. You must also set the backlight state timeout subcommand
to configure timeout mode.
# (config front-panel) exit
# (config front-panel) no backlight flash
Stops the front-panel LCD from flashing.
# (config front-panel) view
Displays the front panel settings.
Example
# (config) front-panel
# (config front-panel) backlight state timeout
ok
# (config front-panel) backlight timeout 60
ok
311 of 604
# (config) ftp
Synopsis
Configure FTP parameters.
Syntax
# (config) ftp {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) ftp login-syntax {raptor | checkpoint}
Toggles between Raptor and Checkpoint login syntax. The default is Raptor.
Note: Neither proxy authentication for transparent FTP nor proxy chaining are supported with
the Checkpoint syntax. When native FTP traffic from an FTP client (such as WSFtp) is being
authenticated by the ProxySG appliance using the Raptor syntax, the recommended
authentication mode is auto or proxy.
# (config) ftp no welcome-banner
Clears the FTP welcome banner text.
# (config) ftp passive-mode {enable | disable}
Enables or disables support for passive mode to clients. This applies to allowing PASV method when IPv4 is in use, and
applies to allowing EPSV method when IPv6 is in use.
# (config) ftp welcome-banner banner banner_text
Customizes the text displayed to an FTP client upon connection.
Example
# (config) ftp login-syntax checkpoint
ok
See Also
n "# (config caching ftp)" on page 204
312 of 604
# (config general)
Synopsis
Set global defaults for user behavior when license or resource limits are exceeded, or to reflect client IP addresses when
forwarding requests, or to trust client-provided destination IP addresses.
Syntax
# (config) general
# (config general)
Subcommands
# (config general) exit
# (config general) reflect-client-ip {disable | enable}
Configures the client IP reflection.
# (config general) multi-tenant {disable | enable | criterion}
Enables, disables, or sets a tenant criterion for multi-tenant functionality. A license is required to enable multi-tenant support.
n When enabled, several command-line based options become available, and two new policy slots are added: landlord
and tenant.
n Enabling multi-tenant support automatically disables Universal Policy (cloud/on-premises SG hybrid) support.
n The default state for this command is disable.
n Define how tenants are identified with # (config general) multi-tenant criterion CPL_substitution or via landlord policy.
# (config general) multi-tenant persist-policies {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the persisting of multi-tenant policies between reboots.
n Disabling this command will result in multi-tenant policies being cleared between appliance reboots.
n The default state for this command is enable.
For more information on multi-tenant deployments, refer to the Multi-Tenant Deployment Guide.
# (config general) resource-overflow-action {bypass | drop}
Configures the resource overflow action by choosing to either bypass or drop new connections when resources are scarce.
313 of 604
# (config general) trust-destination-ip {enable | disable}
Allows the ProxySG appliance to trust a client-provided destination IP address and not do a DNS lookup.
n Proxy Edition default: disable
n MACH5 Edition default: enable
# (config general) tunnel-on-protocol-error {enable | disable}
Enables this option to have the appliance tunnel traffic when protocol errors occur. This option applies to the SSL proxy and the
HTTP proxy:
n The SSL proxy tunnels the connection when non-SSL traffic arrives at the SSL port (by default, port 443).
n The HTTP proxy tunnels the connection when it receives non-HTTP traffic or a broken HTTP request.
# (config general) user-overflow-action {bypass | none | queue}
Sets overflow behavior when there are more licensed-user connections going through the system than is allowed by the model
license. If set to none, the licensed user limit is not enforced.
# (config general) view
Displays general mode settings.
Example
# (config general) trust-destination-ip enable
ok
314 of 604
# (config geolocation)
Synopsis
Specify download parameters, disable geolocation settings, and view current geolocation settings.
Syntax
# (config) geolocation
# (config geolocation)
Subcommands
# (config geolocation) disable
Disables the Geolocation service.
# (config geolocation) download cancel
# (config geolocation) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Sets the encrypted form of the password used to download the database from an internal server.
# (config geolocation) download get-now
# (config geolocation) download get-now background
# (config geolocation) download get-now background force
Ignores any existing data (even if the database is already up-to-date) and force a fresh download of the entire database. The
download occurs in the background, and you can continue to use the CLI while download is in progress.
# (config geolocation) download get-now force
cancel the download, press and hold CTRL+C.
# (config geolocation) download password password
Sets the password used to download the database from an internal server.
315 of 604
# (config geolocation) download profile ssl_device_profile
Specifies an existing SSL device profile to use for securing database downloads from an internal server.
# (config geolocation) download url URL
Sets the URL of the internal server that hosts the database.
# (config geolocation) download username username
# (config geolocation) enable
Enables the Geolocation service.
# (config geolocation) exit
# (config geolocation) no download {password | profile | url | username}
Clears the specified download parameter. Clearing the url parameter resets the database download option to the default
(direct download from Symantec).
# (config geolocation) test-url URL [allow | deny] locations
where:
n URL is a space-separated list of geolocation codes
n locations is a space-separated list of geolocation codes
Tests a fully-qualified URL and perform a DNS lookup to the IP addresses mapped to the geolocation codes you enter.
# (config geolocation) view
Displays license information, license expiration date, the download URL for the geolocation database, results of the last
download, last successful download, and database version. This subcommand produces the same output as the # show
geolocation command.
# (config geolocation) view countries
Displays the list of countries defined in the geolocation database (if one has been downloaded). This subcommand produces
the same output as # show geolocation countries.
Example
# (config geolocation) view
Licensed Until: Thu, 01 Jan 2015 00:00:00 UTC
Service: Enabled
316 of 604

Time: Wed, 10 Apr 2013 17:16:54 UTC
Downloading from: https://subscription.es.bluecoat.com/geoip/database
Version: 20130402
See Also
n "Geolocation" in SGOS Administration Guide
317 of 604
# (config health-check)
Synopsis
Configure health check settings.
Note: Some subcommands refer to specific health checks; to determine health check names,
see the table in "# (config health-check health_check_name)" on page 321.
Syntax
# (config) health-check
Subcommands
# (config health-check) copy source_health_check target_health_check
Copies settings from an existing user-defined health check to another health check of the same type. If the target health check
does not exist, a new health check is created with the specified name and source settings.
# (config health-check) create {composite health_check | http health_check URL | https health_check
URL | icmp health_check hostname | ssl health_check hostname [port] | tcp health_check hostname
[port]}
Creates a user-defined health check of the specified type. Hostnames can be an IPv4 or IPv6 host or address. URLs must
include the protocol.
# (config health-check) default e-mail {healthy {enable | disable} | report-all-ips {enable | disable}
| sick {enable | disable}}
Configures defaults for e-mail options.
# (config health-check) default event-log {healthy {disable | information | severe}| report-all-ips

{enable | disable} | sick {information | disable | severe}}
Configures defaults for event-log options. An informational or a severe event-log message is logged depending on the setting
chosen.
# (config health-check) default failure-trigger {none | count}
Configures defaults for the failure-trigger options.
# (config health-check) default interval {healthy seconds | sick seconds}
Configures defaults for interval options.
318 of 604
# (config health-check) default severity {critical | no-effect | warning}
Configures default severity for health checks.
# (config health-check) default snmp {healthy {enable | disable} | report-all-ips {enable | disable} |
sick {enable | disable}}
Configures defaults for SNMP options.
# (config health-check) default threshold {healthy count | response-time milliseconds | sick count}
Configures defaults for threshold options.
# (config health-check) delete health_check
Deletes the specified health check.
# (config health-check) disable {healthy health_check | sick health_check}
Disable the specified health check and have it always report health or sick.
# (config health-check) edit health_check
Configures options for the specified health check. Changes the prompt to "# (config health-check health_check_name)" on
page 321.
# (config health-check) enable health_check
Enables the health check of the specified name.
# (config health-check) exit
# (config health-check) perform-health-check health_check
Runs the specified health check.
#(config health-check) view {configuration | quick-statistics | statistics}
Displays the configuration or statistics for all health checks. You can also view a summary of the health-check statistics.
Example
# (config health-check) view
Health Check Configuration
Authentication
auth.test
Authentication realm: test
Type of test: Authentication Enable state: Enabled
319 of 604
E-Mail Notifications: Use default

Event Log Notifications: Use default
SNMP Notifications: Use default
Monitoring Notifications: Use default
Limits: Use default
DNS Server
dns.8.8.8.8
DNS Server: 8.8.8.8
Type of test: DNS Server Enable state: Enabled
Limits: Use default
Hostname: Use default: www.bluecoat.com
External Services
drtr.rating_service
Type of test: DRTR Enable state: Enabled
Limits:
Healthy interval: 10800 seconds Sick interval: Use default
Healthy threshold: Use default Sick threshold: Use default
Response time threshold: Use default Failure trigger: 1
Hostname: webpulse.es.bluecoat.com
See Also
n "# (config health-check health_check_name)" on the facing page
320 of 604
# (config health-check health_check_name)

Synopsis
Edits the specified health check. You can edit a user-defined health check that was created in the CLI, as well as system-
defined health checks. To determine the names of all health checks on the appliance, issue the # (config health-check) view
command or go to the Management Console (Statistics > Health Checks). The command prompt changes when you edit a
health check, as follows:
Service Health Check Name Command Prompt
Authentication realm auth.realm_name # (config health-check

auth.SAML1)
Example: auth.SAML1
Content analysis service icap.service_name # (config health-check

icap.proxyAV1)
Example: icap.proxyAV1
DNS server dns.DNS_server # (config health-check

dns.8.8.8.8)
Example: dns.8.8.8.8
Forwarding group fwd.group_name # (config health-check

fwd.forwarding2)
Example: fwd.forwarding2
Forwarding host fwd.host_name # (config health-check

fwd.fwgroup1)
Example: fwd.fwgroup1
SOCKS gateway socks.gateway_name # (config health-check

socks.socks2)
Example: socks.socks2
WebPulse drtr.rating_service # (config health-check

drtr.rating_service)
User-defined health checks: composite, HTTP, user.user_defined_health_check # (config health-check

HTTPS, ICMP, SSL, and TCP user.composite2)
Example: user.composite2
Syntax
# (config) health-check
# (config health-check) edit health_check_name
# (config health-check health_check_name)
321 of 604
where health_check_name depends on the health check type, as described in the table in " Synopsis" on the previous page.
Subcommands
Note: The following subcommands are available for all health checks unless specified
otherwise.
# (config health-check health_check_name) add member_name
(Composite health check only) Adds the specified member to the composite health check group.
# (config health-check health_check_name) authentication {basic | disable | encrypted-password

encrypted_password | password password | username username}
(Forwarding host/group and user-defined only) Configures authentication settings for the health check.
# (config health-check health_check_name) clear-statistics
Clears statistics for this health check.
# (config health-check health_check_name) combine {all-healthy | any-healthy | some-healthy}
(Composite and forwarding group/host only) Requires that all, some, or any members of the group report as healthy to have the
health check report as healthy.
# (config health-check health_check_name) e-mail {healthy {default | enable | disable} | report-all-

ips {healthy {default | enable | disable} | sick {default | enable | disable}}
Sends e-mail notification when a health check reports healthy or sick, whether or not those reports are for all IP addresses.
# (config health-check health_check_name) event-log {healthy {default | disable | information |

severe} | report-all-ips {healthy {default | enable | disable} | sick {default | enable | disable}}
Logs an event when a health check reports healthy or sick, whether or not those reports are for all IP addresses.
# (config health-check health_check_name) exit
Returns to "# (config health-check) " on page 318 mode.
# (config health-check health_check_name) failure-trigger {default | none | count}
Configures options for the failure-trigger.
# (config health-check health_check_name) hostname {default | hostname}
(DNS only) Sets the hostname for the health check to the default hostname or to a user-defined hostname.
# (config health-check health_check_name) interval {healthy {default | seconds} | sick {default |

seconds}}
322 of 604
(All except composite) Configures intervals before the health check is re-run. The intervals can be different for health checks
that are reporting healthy and health checks that are reporting sick.
# (config health-check health_check_name) perform-health-check
Performs a health check immediately and reports the result.
# (config health-check health_check_name) proxy-authentication {basic | disable | encrypted-password

encrypted_password | password password | username username}
(Forwarding host/group and user-defined only) Configures authentication settings for the health check when intermediate
proxies exist between the appliance and the target. Specify the username and password for the intermediate proxy.
# (config health-check health_check_name) remove member_name
(Composite only) Removes a member from the composite group.
# (config health-check health_check_name) response-code {add code | remove code}
(Forwarding host/group and all user-defined except composite) Manages a list of HTTP/HTTPS codes that are considered
successes. You can specify multiple codes, separated by semi-colons. If a success code is received by the health check, the
health check considers the HTTP/ HTTPS test to be successful.
# (config health-check health_check_name) severity {critical | default | no-effect | warning}
Sets the severity level of the health check, which determines how this health check affects the overall health of the device.
# (config health-check health_check_name) snmp {healthy {default | enable | disable} | report-all-ips

{healthy {default | enable | disable} | sick {healthy {default | enable | disable} }
(All except WebPulse) Sends an SNMP trap when the health check reports healthy or sick, whether or not those reports are for
all IP addresses.
# (config health-check health_check_name) threshold {healthy {default | count} | response-time

{default | none | milliseconds} | sick {default | count}}
(All except composite) Sets the level when health checks report as healthy or sick.
# (config health-check health_check_name) type (http URL | https URL | icmp hostname | ssl hostname
[port] | tcp hostname [port]}
(Forwarding host/group, SOCKS, and all user-defined except composite) Sets the number of consecutive healthy or sick test
results before the health check actually reports as healthy or sick.
# (config health-check health_check_name) use-defaults
Resets the defaults of the health check to use the global defaults instead of any explicitly set values.
# (config health-check health_check_name) view {configuration | events | statistics}
Displays the health check’s configuration, event log messages, or statistics.
323 of 604
Example
# (config health-check user.ssl1) clear-statistics
ok
See Also
n "# (config health-check) " on page 318
324 of 604
# (config) hide-advanced
See "# hide-advanced" on page 75.
325 of 604
# (config) http
Synopsis
Configure HTTP settings.
Syntax
# (config) http {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) http [no] add-header {client-ip | front-end-https | via | x-forwarded-for }
Adds or removes the specified HTTP header in forwarded requests.
# (config) http [no] allow-upstream-407
Enables or (after it has already been enabled) disables upstream HTTP error code 407 authentication challenges.
# (config) http [no] byte-ranges
Enables HTTP byte-range support. If byte-range support is disabled, then HTTP treats all byte range requests as non-
cacheable. This means that HTTP never even checks to see if the object is in the cache, but forwards the request to the origin-
server and does not cache the result. So the range request has no affect on the cache. For instance, if the object was in the
cache before a range request, it would still be in the cache afterward—the range request does not delete any currently cached
objects. Also, the Range header is not modified when forwarded to the origin-server. If the requested byte range is type 3 or 4,
then the request is treated as if byte-range support is disabled. That is, the request is treated as non-cacheable and has no
affect on objects in the cache.
# (config) http [no] cache authenticated-data
Caches any data that appears to be authenticated.
# (config) http [no] cache expired
Retains cached objects older than the explicit expiration.
# (config) http [no] cache personal-pages
Caches objects that appear to be personal pages.
# (config) http [no] clientless-requests
Limits the number of clientless requests (used for caching and optimization) and prevent overwhelming an OCS.
# (config) http [no] exception-on-network-error
Using the no option prevents the appliance from sending exception pages to clients when upstream connection errors occur.
# (config) http [no] force-ntlm
326 of 604
Uses NTLM for Microsoft Internet Explorer proxy.
# (config) http ftp-proxy-url root-dir
URL path is absolute in relation to the root.
# (config) http ftp-proxy-url user-dir
URL path is relative to the user’s home directory.
# (config) http [no] location-header-rewrite
Auto rewrite location header in reverse proxy.
# (config) http [no] parse meta-tag {cache-control | expires | pragma-no-cache}
Parses HTML objects for the cache-control, expires, and pragma-no-cache meta-tags.
# (config) http [no] persistent client
Enables support for persistent client requests from the browser.
# (config) http [no] persistent server
Enables support for persistent server requests to the Web server.
# (config) http [no] persistent-timeout clien seconds
Sets persistent connection timeout for the client to the specified number of seconds.
# (config) http [no] persistent-timeout server seconds
Sets persistent connection timeout for the server to the specified number of seconds.
# (config) http [no] pipeline client {requests | redirects}
Prefetches either embedded objects in client requests or redirected responses to client requests. Disabled by default.
# (config) http [no] pipeline prefetch {requests | redirects}
Prefetches either embedded objects in pipelined objects or redirected responses to pipelined requests. Disabled by default.
# (config) http [no] proprietary-headers bluecoat
Enables Symantec (Blue Coat)-proprietary HTTP header extensions. By default the proprietary headers are disabled. This is a
deprecated method for troubleshooting HTTP responses. Symantec recommends that you refer to the access log and use the
Advanced URLS for troubleshooting HTTP responses instead.
# (config) http receive-timeout client seconds
Sets receive timeout for client to the specified number of seconds.
# (config) http receive-timeout refresh seconds
327 of 604
Sets receive timeout for refresh the specified number of seconds.
# (config) http receive-timeout server seconds
Sets receive timeout for server to the specified number of seconds.
# (config) http [no] revalidate-pragma-no-cache
Revalidates "Pragma: no-cache". The no parameter clears the setting.
# (config) http [no] strict-expiration refresh
Forces compliance with explicit expirations by never refreshing objects before their explicit expiration. The no parameter clears
the setting.
# (config) http [no] strict-expiration serve
Forces compliance with explicit expirations by never serving objects after their explicit expiration. The no parameter clears the
setting.
# (config) http [no] strip-from-header
Removes HTTP information from headers. The no parameter clears the setting.
# (config) http [no] substitute conditional
Uses an HTTP "get" in place of HTTP 1.1 conditional get. The no parameter clears the setting.
# (config) http [no] substitute ie-reload
Uses an HTTP "get" for Microsoft Internet Explorer reload requests. The no parameter clears the setting.
# (config) http [no] substitute if-modified-since
Uses an HTTP "get" instead of "get-if-modified". The no parameter clears the setting.
# (config) http [no] substitute pragma-no-cache
Uses an HTTP "get" instead of "get pragma: no-cache".
# (config) http [no] tolerant-request-parsing
Enables or disables the HTTP tolerant-request-parsing flag.
# (config) http upload-with-pasv [disable | enable]
Disables pr enables uploading with Passive FTP.
# (config) http version {1.0 | 1.1 | preserve}
Indicates the version of HTTP that should be used by the ProxySG appliance. The preserve option preserves the inbound
HTTP version.
# (config) http [no] www-redirect
328 of 604
Redirects to www.host.com if host not found.
# (config) http [no] xp-rewrite-redirect
Rewrites origin server 302s to 307s for Windows XP IE requests.
Example
# (config) http pipeline client requests
ok
329 of 604
# (config) http2
Synopsis
Configure HTTP2 settings.
Note: If you change the HTTP/2 connection, frame, and stream values from their defaults, see
"HTTP/2 Communication Requirements" below below for appropriate settings.
Syntax
# (config) http2 {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) http2 connection-window-size size_in_bytes
Sets the window size in bytes for HTTP/2 connections.
# (config) http2 header-table-size size_in_bytes
Sets the header table size in bytes for HTTP/2.
# (config) http2 max-concurrent-http1-streams number_of_streams
Sets the maximum number of concurrent streams allowed by the appliance when the upstream connection is detected to
be HTTP/1.1. Applies only when the appliance is translating client-side HTTP/2 to server-side HTTP/1.1.
# (config) http2 max-concurrent-streams number_of_streams
Sets the maximum number of concurrent HTTP/2 streams.
# (config) http2 max-frame-size size_in_bytes
Sets the maximum frame size in bytes for HTTP/2 connections.
# (config) http2 stream-window-size size_in_bytes
Sets the window size in bytes for HTTP/2 streams.
HTTP/2 Communication Requirements

Minimum Default Maximum
Subcommand Recommended or Required Setting
Value Value Value
connection- 65535 524286 8388480 For better performance, should be equal to or greater than the value of
window-size stream-window-size.
330 of 604
Minimum Default Maximum

Subcommand Recommended or Required Setting
Value Value Value
max-concurrent- 1 15 150 For better performance, should be less than the max-concurrent-streams
http1- streams setting.
max-concurrent- 1 100 150 For better performance, should be greater than the max-concurrent http-
streams streams setting.
max-frame-size 1024 16384 65535 Must be less than or equal to the value of stream-window-size.
stream-window- 16384 65535 262144 Must be equal to or greater than the value of max-frame-size. For better
size performance, should be less than or equal to the value of connection-
window size.
Example
# (config) http2 max-concurrent-streams 75
ok
331 of 604
# (config identd)
Synopsis
Configure the IDENTD protocol.
Syntax
# (config) identd
# (config identd)
Subcommands
# (config identd) client server-query-port port
Specifies the IDENTD server port to query.
# (config identd) client timeout seconds
Sets the timeout period for client IDENTD queries. Specify between 1 and 300 seconds.
# (config identd) client trim-whitespace {disable | enable}
Disables or enables trimming of whitespace in the response username.
# (config identd) exit
# (config identd) server {disable | enable}
Disables or enables IDENTD services.
# (config identd) view
Displays configured IDENTD settings.
Example
# (config identd) server enable
ok
332 of 604
# (config) inline
See "# inline" on page 76.
333 of 604
# (config) load
See "# load" on page 81.
334 of 604
# (config installed-systems)
Synopsis
Manage the system images installed on the appliance.
Syntax
# (config) installed-systems
# (config installed-systems)
Subcommands
# (config installed-systems) default system_number [ignore-warnings]
Sets the default system to the specified system.
The ignore-warnings option allows you to set the default system even if you receive a disk layout compatibility warning.
Keep in mind that if you use the ignore-warnings option to forcing a change to a default system that is incompatible with your
disk layout may result in configuration and/or data loss.
# (config installed-systems) delete system_number
Deletes the specified system.
# (config installed-systems) enforce-signed {enable | disable}
Restricts system image download and installation to signed images only. The default, disable, allows all images to be
downloaded.
# (config installed-systems) exit
Exits configure installed-systems mode and returns to configure mode.
# (config installed-systems) [no] lock system_number
Locks or unlocks the specified system.
# (config installed-systems) [no] replace system_number
Specifies that the specified system is to be replaced next, or clears the setting.
# (config installed-systems) view
Shows all installed SGOS system images. Use this command to determine the system numbers to specify in other
commands.
335 of 604
Example
# (config installed-systems) view
ProxySG Appliance Systems
1. Version: SGOS 7.2.1.0, Release ID: 242101
Friday September 13 2019 11:11:08 UTC,
Attributes: Signed
Boot Status: Last boot succeeded, Last Successful Boot: Friday September 13 2019 14:04:50 UTC
Disk Layout: Compatible
Wednesday September 11 2019 16:02:58 UTC,
Attributes: Signed
Boot Status: Last boot succeeded, Last Successful Boot: Wednesday September 11 2019 19:23:45 UTC
Friday September 6 2019 02:49:00 UTC,
Attributes: Signed, FIPS capable
Friday August 30 2019 19:42:37 UTC,
Attributes: Signed
Thursday August 22 2019 04:05:23 UTC,
Attributes: Signed
Boot Status: Last boot succeeded, Last Successful Boot: Thursday August 22 2019 17:50:02 UTC
Default system to run on next hardware restart: 1
System to replace next: 5
#(config installed-systems) delete 4
Are you sure you want to delete system 4? (y or n) y
ok
336 of 604
# (config) interface
Synopsis
Configure the network interfaces (both physical and Virtual LAN). The built-in Ethernet adapter is configured for the first time
using the setup console. Use these commands to modify the built-in adapter configuration or if you have multiple adapters.
Syntax
# (config) interface {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) interface fast-ethernet interface_number
Sets the number of the fast Ethernet connection to the specified interface. Valid interface numbers are 0 through 3.
# (config) interface adapter_number:interface_number
Configures the specified interface. Changes the prompt to"# (config interface interface)" on page 340.
# (config) interfaceaggr:number
Configures the specified interface. Changes the prompt to "# (config interface aggr:number)" on the next page.
# (config) interface adapter_number:interface_number.vlan_id
Associates the specified VLAN ID with the specified physical interface.
Example
# (config) interface fast-ethernet 0
ok
See Also
n "# (config interface aggr:number)" on the next page
n "# (config interface interface)" on page 340
337 of 604
# (config interface aggr:number)

Synopsis
Edit the aggregated link. The identifier value must be between 0 and 31.
Syntax
# (config) interface aggr:number
# (config interface aggr:number)
Subcommands
# (config interface aggr:number) add adapter:interface
Adds a physical interface to the aggregate interface
# (config interface aggr:number) clear adapter:interface
Clears aggregate interface settings.
# (config interface aggr:number {disable|enable}
Disables or enables the interface.
# (config interface aggr:number) label
Configures the interface label.
# (config interface aggr:number) remove adapter:interface
Removes a physical interface from the aggregate interface
# (config interface aggr:number) transit-delay 0-65535
Specifies the link aggregation transit delay time in milliseconds (ms). The default value is 3000 ms.
The transit delay setting determines how much settle time LACP requires to switch from sending packets from an unlinked port
to sending from a linked port. During the settle time, all packets for an unlinked port are dropped. The settle time is required to
ensure packets are not received out-of-order when switching to a linked port to send the traffic. Setting a smaller transit-delay
time will reduce the number of packets lost during the port transition, while increasing the possibility of out-of-order packets.
# (config interface aggr:number) view
Displays interface settings.
338 of 604
Example
# (config) interface aggr:1
# (config interface aggr:1) add 5:2
ok
# (config interface aggr:1) add 5:1
ok
# (config interface aggr:0) view
Ethernet aggregate aggr:1
Status: enabled
MTU size: 1500
LACP state: 2 Up
VLAN trunk: enabled
Native VLAN:
IPv6 auto-linklocal: enabled
Member interfaces:
Ethernet interface 5:1 (LAN)
Status: enabled
LACP state: Up
Internet address: 192.0.2.0 netmask 255.255.255.0
Link status: autosensed to full duplex, 1 gigabit/sec network
Ethernet interface 5:2 (WAN)
Status: enabled
LACP state: Up
Internet address: 2001:cdba:0:0:0:3257:9652 prefixlen 64
Link status: autosensed to full duplex, 1 gigabit/sec network
339 of 604
# (config interface interface)

Synopsis
Edit the interface. Valid interface numbers are 0 through 3.
Syntax
# (config) interface interface
# (config interface interface)
Subcommands
# (config interface interface) allow-intercept {enable | disable}
Allows interception on this interface. See "Allow Intercept and Reject Inbound" on page 342 for usage details.
# (config interface interface) clear-all-vlans
Resets all VLAN parameters to their default values.
# (config interface interface) {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the specified interface.
Note: You will not see a loss of connectivity warning message when using CLI to shut down a
Management Console interface. If you lose connection to the Management Console, reconnect
with an active IP address.
# (config interface interface) exit
# (config interface interface) full-duplex
Configures the interface for full-duplex.
# (config interface interface) half-duplex
Configures the interface for half-duplex.
# (config interface interface) ip-address ip_address [subnet_mask_for_IPv4] | [prefix_length_for_IPv6]
Sets the IPv4 address and subnet mask or IPv6 address and prefix length for this interface.
# (config interface interface) ipv6 auto-linklocal {enable | disable}
340 of 604
Enables or disables the automatic generation of link-local addresses for this interface. After a link-local address is generated
for an interface, it will stay configured until it is manually removed using the no ip-address command or until the ProxySG
appliance is rebooted.
# (config interface interface) label label_name
Give the interface a name for easy identification.
# (config interface interface) link-autosense {enable | disable}
Specifies that the interface should autosense speed and duplex.
# (config interface interface) mtu-size size
Specifies the MTU (maximum transmission unit) size.
Jumbo frames are Ethernet frames with more than 1500 bytes of payload. By configuring the mtu size of an interface to 1500
bytes or more you are enabling jumbo frames. You can configure jumbo frames between 1500 and 9000 MTUs. The max mtu
size depends on the NIC you are using. If you have attempted to configure the mtu size to one that is not compatible with the
NIC you are using, an error message will be displayed.
Note: If the appliance receives frames over 1500 bytes, but the mtu size has not been set to
enable jumbo frames, packets may be dropped. Configure the interfaces on a software bridge
with identical MTU settings. Using different MTU interface settings on a bridge can cause
unpredictable behavior.
# (config interface interface) native-vlan number
Sets the native VLAN value for this interface.
# (config interface interface) no {ip-address | label}
Removes the IP address or label from the interface.
# (config interface interface) reject-inbound {enable | disable}
Rejects inbound connections on the interface. See "Allow Intercept and Reject Inbound" on the next page for usage details.
# (config interface interface) speed {10 | 100 | 1gb | 10gb }
Specifies the interface speed.
# (config interface interface) vlan-trunk {enable | disable}
Enables VLAN trunking on this interface.
# (config interface interface) view
Displays the interface settings.
341 of 604
Allow Intercept and Reject Inbound

The allow-intercept and reject-inbound commands are interface-level configurations and are not bridge-specific. The
reject-inbound command always has precedence. The following table describes how traffic is handled for the three possible
settings of these options.
reject- Non-proxy ports (mgmt-console, Explicit proxy Transparent proxy

allow-intercept Other ports
inbound ssh, etc) ports ports
Disabled Enabled Terminated Terminated Terminated Forwarded
Disabled Disabled Terminated Terminated Forwarded Forwarded
Enabled Enabled/Disabled Silently dropped Silently dropped Silently dropped Silently

dropped
Example
# (config) interface 0
# (config interface 0) ip-address 10.252.10.54 255.255.255.0
ok
# (config interface 0) exit
# (config) interface 0:1
# (config interface 0:1) 10.252.10.72
ok
# (config interface 0:1) exit
342 of 604
# (config) ip-default-gateway
Synopsis
A key feature of the ProxySG appliance is the ability to distribute traffic originating at the cache through multiple IP gateways.
Further, you can fine tune how the traffic is distributed among gateways. This feature works with any routing protocol (for
example, static routes or RIP).
Note: Load balancing through multiple IP gateways is independent from the per-interface load
balancing that the ProxySG appliance automatically does when more than one network
interface is installed.
Syntax
# (config) ip-default-gateway {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) ip-default-gateway ip_address [preference-group 1_to_10] [weight 1_to_100]
Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the default gateway to be used by the ProxySG appliance.
Example
# (config) ip-default-gateway 10.25.36.47
ok
343 of 604
# (config) ipv6
Synopsis
Configure global IPv6 settings.
Syntax
# (config) ipv6 {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) ipv6 auto-linklocal {enable | disable}
Enables or disables automatic generation of link-local addresses on all interfaces. When this parameter is enabled (as it is by
default), individual interface configuration values will override this setting. When this setting is disabled, it will be disabled for
all interfaces (regardless of the per-interface setting). After link-local addresses are generated for the appliance interfaces, they
will stay configured until they are manually removed using the no ip-address command or until the ProxySG appliance is
rebooted.
# (config) ipv6 force-bypass {enable | disable}
Enables or disables IPv6 force-bypass. When force-bypass is enabled, all IPv6 traffic will be bridged or routed. This option is
disabled by default.
# (config) ipv6 forwarding {enable | disable}
Enables or disables IPv6 forwarding. This is a layer-3 configuration. When IPv6 forwarding is disabled (as it is by default), the
appliance will discard bypassed traffic at the IPv6 layer; this setting is appropriate for most situations, since by default, the
ProxySG appliance is not configured to function as a router.
Example
# (config) ipv6 auto-linklocal disable
ok
See Also
n "Using the ProxySG in an IPv6 Environment" in SGOS Administration Guide
344 of 604
# (config) isatap
Synopsis
Use this command to configure appliance behavior with Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP) traffic.
When ISATAP is enabled with the isatap commands, the ProxySG appliance looks inside the encapsulated 6-in-4 packet to
determine the service and then chooses a proxy to use:
n If the service is intercepted, the ISATAP traffic is processed by the appropriate application proxy (HTTP, CIFS, FTP,
etc.). Traffic is optimized with all applicable acceleration techniques and sent through an ADN tunnel if an ADN peer is
found.
n If the service is not intercepted, the traffic is processed by the ISATAP proxy. Traffic is with byte caching and
compression inside an ADN tunnel (assuming an ADN peer is found).
Syntax
# (config) isatap {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) isatap allow-intercept {enable | disable}
When enabled, 6-in-4 packets of intercepted services are processed by the appropriate application proxy (for example, CIFS,
HTTP, or Flash). When allow-intercept is disabled, this traffic is processed by the ISATAP proxy. For full ISATAP
functionality, enable this command and adn-tunnel.
# (config) isatap adn-tunnel {enable | disable}
When enabled, the ISATAP proxy processes 6-in-4 traffic for services (such as ICMPv6) that aren’t intercepted. When adn-
tunnel is disabled, the ISATAP proxy is not used: any traffic that would have been processed by this proxy is bypassed. For
full ISATAP functionality, enable this command and allow-intercept.
# (config) isatap adn-tunnel adn-byte-cache {enable | disable}
Applies to traffic that the ISATAP proxy is processing. It controls whether to optimize this traffic using the byte caching
optimization technique when connecting upstream in an ADN tunnel. This option is enabled
by default.
# (config) isatap adn-tunnel adn-compress {enable | disable}
Applies to traffic that the ISATAP proxy is processing. It controls whether to optimize this traffic using GZIP compression
when connecting upstream in an ADN tunnel. This option is enabled by default.
# (config) isatap adn-tunnel byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
Applies to traffic that the ISATAP proxy is processing. You can adjust retention priority of byte cache data. If you want to keep
streams in the byte cache for as long as possible, set a high retention priority. Or for streams that aren’t likely to get much
345 of 604
benefit from byte caching, you can set a low retention priority. ISATAP is set to normal priority by default. Note that unless
adn-byte-cache is enabled for ISATAP, the priority setting will have no effect; if you try to set a retention priority when byte
caching is disabled, a warning message displays to inform you that the byte-cache-priority attribute has no effect when adn-
byte-cache is disabled.
Example
# (config) isatap allow-intercept enable
ok
# (config) isatap adn-tunnel enable
ok
346 of 604
# (config) license-key
Synopsis
Configure license key settings.
Syntax
# (config) license-key {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) license-key auto-update {disable | enable}
Disables or enables auto-update of the Symantec license key.
#(config) license-key no path
Negates certain license key settings.
#(config) license-key path URL
Specifies the network path to download the license key.
Example
# (config) license-key no path
ok
See Also
n "Licensing" in SGOS Administration Guide
347 of 604
# (config line-vty)
Synopsis
When you have a CLI session, that session remains open as long as there is activity. If you leave the session idle, the
connection eventually times out and you must reconnect. The default timeout is five minutes. You can set the timeout and
other session-specific options using the line-vty command.
Syntax
# (config) line-vty
# (config line-vty)
Subcommands
# (config line-vty) exit
Exits configure line-vty mode and returns to configure mode.
# (config line-vty) length number_of_lines
Specifies the number of lines of code that should appear on the screen at one time. Specify 0 to scroll without pausing.
# (config line-vty) no length
Disables screen paging.
# (config line-vty) telnet no transparent
Carriage returns are sent to the Telnet console as a carriage return plus linefeed.
# (config line-vty) telnet transparent
Carriage returns are sent to the Telnet console as a carriage return.
# (config line-vty) timeout minutes
Sets the line timeout to the specified number of minutes.
# (config line-vty) view
Displays running system information.
# (config line-vty) width
Sets the width of the display terminal.
348 of 604
Example
# (config) line-vty
# (config line-vty) timeout 60
ok
349 of 604
# (config) load
See "# load" on page 81.
350 of 604
# (config management-services)
Synopsis
The ProxySG appliance provides the following console services:
n HTTP (Not enabled by default)
n HTTPS
n SSH
n Telnet (Not created by default; a Telnet proxy service is created by default on port 23.)
The ProxySG appliance also provides SNMP management services.
Syntax
# (config) management-services
# (config management-services)
Subcommands
# (config management-services) create {http-console | https-console | ssh-console | snmp | telnet-
console } service_name
Creates a console or SNMP service with the specified name.
Note: If you create a console name with spaces, the name must be enclosed in quotes; for
example, "My Console1".
# (config management-services) delete service_name
Deletes the specified console name or SNMP service name.
# (config management-services) edit service_name
Edits the specified service. Changes the prompt to one of the following:
n "# (config http_console)" on page 353
n "# (config https_console)" on page 355.
n "# (config ssh_console)" on page 357
351 of 604
n "# (config snmp_service)" on page 359
n "# (config telnet_console)" on page 361
# (config management-services) exit
# (config management-services) view
Displays all console services.
Example
# (config management-services) create https-console HTTPS1
See Also
n "# (config http_console)" on the facing page
n "# (config https_console)" on page 355
352 of 604
# (config http_console)
Synopsis
This console service intercepts HTTP traffic, usually on port 80. This console service is created but not enabled due to
security concerns.
Syntax
# (config management-services) edit http_console
# (config http_console)
Subcommands
# (config http_console) add {all | proxy_ip_address} port {enable | disable}
Adds a listener to the console service. All selects all IPv4 and IPv6 addresses on the proxy; alternatively, you can select a
specific proxy’s IPv4/IPv6 address. When specifying IPv6 addresses, only global (not linklocal) addresses can be used. You
must always choose a port. By default the listener is enabled.
# (config http_console) disable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
Disables the specified listener or all listeners.
# (config http_console) enable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
Enables the specified listener or all listeners.
# (config http_console) exit
Returns to "# (config management-services)" on page 351.
# (config http_console) remove {all | proxy_ip_address port}
Removes the specified listener(s).
# (config http_console) view
Displays a summary of the console service’s configuration.
Example
# (config management-services) edit HTTP1
# (config HTTP1) add 10.25.36.47
ok
# (config HTTP1) enable 10.25.36.47 80
ok
353 of 604
See Also
n "# (config https_console)" on the facing page
n "# (config management-services)" on page 351
354 of 604
# (config https_console)
Synopsis
The HTTPS management console permits secure access to the management console, by default on port 8082. You can create
additional HTTPS console services if necessary.
Syntax
# (config management-services) edit https_console
Subcommands
# (config https_console) add {all | proxy_ip_address} port {enable | disable}
Add a listener to the console service. All selects all IPv4 and IPv6 addresses on the proxy; alternatively, you can select a
specific IPv4/IPv6 address on the appliance. When specifying IPv6 addresses, only global (not link-local) addresses can be
used. You must always choose a port. By default the listener is enabled.
# (config https_console) attribute cipher-suite [cipher_suite]
Associates the specified cipher suite(s) with the current HTTPS console service. Pressing ENTER without specifying cipher
suites displays a list of available ciphers and a prompt to select ciphers.
You can use interactive mode or non-interactive mode. Interactive mode does not support specifying cipher suites. Symantec
Director uses non-interactive commands in profiles and overlays to create cipher suites.
If specifying cipher suites, type them in a space-separated list such as AES128-GCM-SHA256 DHE-DSS-AES256-SHA256.
Refer to TECH247556 for an overview of cipher suites shipped with the appliance:
# (config https_console) attribute keyring keyring_ID
Specifies the keyring ID you want to use with this console.
# (config https_console) attribute ssl-versions {tlsv1.1| tlsv1.2 | tls1.3}
Selects the SSL version or versions to use. Changing the protocol version/versions in use resets the list of available cipher
suites.
# (config https_console) disable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
Disables the specified listener.
# (config https_console) enable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
355 of 604
Enables the specified listener.
# (config https_console) exit
Returns to "# (config management-services)" on page 351 prompt.
# (config https_console) remove {all | proxy_ip_address port}
Removes the specified listener(s).
# (config https_console) view
Example
# (config management-services) create https-console https-console2
# (config management-services) edit https-console2
# (config https-console2) add 10.25.36.47 443
# (config https-console2) enable 10.25.36.47 443
# (config https-console2) attribute cipher-suite AES128-GCM-SHA256 DHE-DSS-AES256-SHA256
See Also
n "# (config ssh_console)" on the facing page
356 of 604
# (config ssh_console)
Synopsis
The SSH console service allows to you to securely connect to the CLI. By default, SSHv2 is enabled and assigned to port 22.
You do not need to create a new host key unless you want to change the existing configuration.
To manage new host keypairs or global settings for all SSH console services, use the "# (config) ssh-console" on page 552
command.
Syntax
# (config management-services) create ssh-console ssh_console
# (config management-services) edit ssh_console
# (config ssh_console)
Subcommands
# (config ssh_console) add {all | proxy_ip_address} port {enable | disable}
specific proxy’s IPv4/IPv6 address. When specifying IPv6 addresses, only global (not linklocal) addresses can be used. You
must always choose a port. By default the listener is enabled.
# (config ssh_console) disable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
# (config ssh_console) enable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
# (config ssh_console) exit
# (config ssh_console) remove {all | proxy_ip_address port}
Removes the specified listener(s) or all listeners.
# (config ssh_console) view
357 of 604
Example
# (config ssh_console_name) add 10.25.36.47 80
ok
See Also
n "# (config snmp_service)" on the facing page
358 of 604
# (config snmp_service)
Synopsis
The SNMP management service provides an explicit connection for communicating with the ProxySG appliance. You can
create an SNMP listener for any available port and for all available ProxySG appliance. IP addresses or for a specific IPv4 or
IPv6 address.
Syntax
# (config management-services) edit snmp_service
# (config snmp_service)
Subcommands
# (config snmp_service) add {all | proxy_ip_address port} {enable | disable}
Add an SNMP listener to the management service. All selects all IPv4 and IPv6 addresses on the proxy; alternatively, you can
select a specific proxy’s IPv4/IPv6 address. You must always choose a port. By default, the listener is enabled.
# (config snmp_service) disable {all | proxy_ip_address port}
Disables the specified SNMP listener or all listeners.
# (config snmp_service) enable {all | proxy_ip_address port}
Enables the specified SNMP listener or all listeners.
# (config snmp_service) exit
#(config snmp_service) remove {all | proxy_ip_address port}
Removes the specified SNMP listener or all listeners.
# (config snmp_service) view
Displays the SNMP listener configuration.
Example
# (config management-services) create snmp mysnmp
ok
# (config management-services) edit mysnmp
# (config mysnmp) view
359 of 604
Service name: my-snmp

Service: SNMP
Destination IP Port Range
<All> 161 Enabled
See Also
n "# (config telnet_console)" on the facing page
360 of 604
# (config telnet_console)
Synopsis
This console service provides access to the administrative CLI through Telnet. Due to security concerns, use of this console
is not recommended.
A shell Telnet proxy service is created on port 23. If you do decide to create a Telnet console, you must first remove the Telnet
proxy service and apply the changes. You can later re-add the Telnet proxy service on a different port.
Syntax
# (config management-services) edit telnet_console
# (config telnet_console)
Subcommands
# (config telnet_console) add {all | proxy_ip_address} port {enable | disable}
specific IPv4/IPv6 address on the appliance. When specifying IPv6 addresses, only global (not linklocal) addresses can be
used. You must always choose a port. By default the listener is enabled.
# (config telnet_console) disable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
# (config telnet_console) enable {all | proxy_ip_address} port
# (config telnet_console) exit
Returns to "# (config management-services)" on page 351 prompt.
# (config telnet_console) remove {all | proxy_ip_address port}
Removes the specified listener(s) or all listeners.
# (config telnet_console) view
Example
# (config telnet_console) add 10.25.36.47 80
ok
361 of 604
# (config telnet_console) enable 10.25.36.47 80

ok
See Also
362 of 604
# (config mapi)
Synopsis
Configures MAPI.
Syntax
# (config) mapi
# (config mapi)
Subcommands
# (config mapi) batching {enable | disable}
Enables or disables batching. The default is enabled.
# (config mapi) cas-virtual-ip ip_address
Configures the virtual IPv4 address of a Client Access Server (CAS) array so that the ProxySG appliance can create a new
listener for this VIP. After this is configured, the MAPI connections to the CAS array virtual host can be intercepted and
optimized. This setting must be configured on each Branch peer that will handle MAPI traffic to an Exchange server with a third
party load balancer, and must be set before Outlook connects to the Exchange Server. Only one VIP can be configured per
ProxySG appliance.
# (config mapi) encrypted-acceleration {enable | disable}
Enables or disables acceleration of encrypted MAPI. The default is enabled.
# (config mapi) exchange-domain domain_name_alias
Selects the MAPI exchange domain name alias to use. This command is required for accelerating encrypted MAPI.
# (config mapi) exit
# (config mapi) handoff {enable | disable}
Enables or disables MAPI-HTTP handoff.
# (config mapi) keep-alive duration 1_to_168
Sets the length of time, in hours, that the session is active. The default is 72 hours.
# (config mapi) keep-alive {enable | disable}
Enables the keep-alive configuration. The default is disabled.
363 of 604
# (config mapi) keep-alive interval 15_to_60
Sets the length of time, in minutes, before the service checks for new e-mail. The default is 30 minutes.
# (config mapi) keep-alive max-sessions 1_to_200
Sets the maximum number of active sessions at any given point. The default is 100 sessions. If the limit is reached, the oldest
session is dropped.
# (config mapi) no {exchange-domain | cas-virtual-ip}
Clears the settings for Exchange domain alias or CAS virtual IP address.
# (config mapi) view
Displays the MAPI configuration.
Example
# (config mapi) view
Batching: enabled
Keep-Alive: disabled
Keep-Alive Duration (hours): 72
Keep-Alive Interval (minutes): 30
Keep-Alive Maximum Sessions: 100
Endpoint Mapper Handoff: enabled
See Also
n # (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service)
364 of 604
# (config netbios)
Synopsis
Use this command to configure NetBIOS.
Syntax
# (config) netbios
# (config netbios)
Subcommands
# (config netbios) exit
# (config netbios) nbstat {requester {retries | timeout} | responder {enable | disable}}
Requester is enabled by default and cannot be disabled, with three retries and a five second timeout. Responder is disabled by
default. Note that the requestor is used only if you write policy that uses it. If no features that trigger request are used, no traffic
is sent.
# (config netbios) view
Displays the NetBIOS settings.
Example
# (config) netbios
# (config netbios) nbstat responder enable
ok
365 of 604
# (config netflow)
Synopsis
NetFlow is a network protocol developed by Cisco Systems to monitor and export IP traffic information. After you configure
NetFlow on the appliance, direct the flow data to the collectors that you have already set up. If you enable NetFlow on the
ProxySG appliance (it is disabled by default), it observes network flows on all interfaces and keeps track of flow statistics,
such as source and destination IP addresses, the size of the flow (in terms of packets and bytes), and when the flow was sent.
After the appliance gathers the flow statistics, it exports them in NetFlow records to a remote system called a collector.
Caution: Because NetFlow runs on UDP, the ProxySG appliance cannot verify collector
configuration. Make sure that collector IP address and port are correct before setting up
NetFlow in the CLI.
Currently, SGOS supports NetFlow v5, which is restricted to collecting flow statistics for IPv4 packets only.
Terminology
Symantec documentation uses the following terms to describe the NetFlow feature in SGOS.
n Network flow: A sequence of packets from a source application to a destination application. A network flow has
attributes such as IP address, port, protocol, and inbound/outbound interfaces. A flow is exported to the collectors
when:
o it is reported as being finished (for example, traffic for an existing flow stops)
o it has been inactive for a period of time exceeding the inactive-timeout value (for example, the connection is
stale)
o it has been active for a period of time exceeding the active-timeout value (for example, it is a long-running flow)
o it exceeds the record byte count limit of 2^32 bytes
n Flow records: Contain information about a flow, such as source and destination IP addresses, the amount of data
transferred (in terms of packets and bytes), and the flow start and end times.
n Inbound/outbound interfaces: Flow records sent to the ProxySG appliance are exported on inbound interfaces. Flow
records originating from the ProxySG appliance are exported on outbound interfaces.
n NetFlow packets: NetFlow-formatted packets, which contain copies of expired flows. These packets are sent to a
collector once they reach the maximum of 30 records, or two minutes after the first flow record is collected.
Syntax
# (config) netflow
366 of 604
# (config netflow)
Subcommands
# (config netflow) active-timeout timeout_seconds
Specifies the age of an active flow, after which it is reported. When an active flow exceeds the maximum time, the flow is
reported containing the flow statistics up to that point. The default is 1800 seconds.
Note: The active-timeout value must be greater than the inactive-timeout value.
# (config netflow) collectors
Configures NetFlow collector(s). Changes prompt to "# (config netflow collectors) " on page 369.
# (config netflow) disable
Sends the remaining flow data to the collectors and disables the capture of any more Netflow information. This is the default
setting.
# (config netflow) enable
Enables the appliance to begin monitoring if one or more collectors have been configured. See "# (config netflow collectors) "
on page 369. If no collectors are defined when you enter this command, the CLI warns you to configure at least one collector.
# (config netflow) exit
# (config netflow) inactive-timeout timeout_seconds
Specifies the maximum amount of time a flow is considered active without seeing network traffic. When the maximum is
exceeded, the appliance determines that the flow is inactive and exports a flow record. The default is 15 seconds.
Note: The inactive-timeout value must be less than the active-timeout value.
# (config netflow) interfaces
Configures NetFlow interfaces. Changes prompt to "# (config netflow interfaces)" on page 371.
# (config netflow) view
Displays NetFlow configuration settings and statistics:
n NetFlow state
n Number of active flows
367 of 604
n Collector information
n Active timeout value
n Inactive timeout value
The # show netflow command also displays these settings and statistics.
Example
# (config) netflow
# (config netflow) enable
ok
See Also
n "# (config netflow collectors) " on the facing page
n "# (config netflow interfaces)" on page 371
n "Statistics" in SGOS Administration Guide
368 of 604
# (config netflow collectors)

Synopsis
Use this command to configure NetFlow collectors. A NetFlow collector is a software application, such as ManageEngine®
NetFlow Analyzer, that accumulates the data from the ProxySG appliance, which acts as the flow record exporter.
You define a collector uniquely by both address and port. This allows you to configure multiple collectors on different ports for
the same machine. You can configure up to four collectors to collect the flow records from the ProxySG appliance. Note that
collectors on the same machine are counted separately.
Caution: The appliance exports NetFlow records over UDP, which does not guarantee that the
data will be sent to a destination; thus, the appliance cannot verify if collector configuration is
correct. Symantec recommends that you ensure collectors are configured correctly before
setting up NetFlow. Then, when you add a collector in the CLI, be sure to enter the correct IP
address and port.
In addition, because UDP does not attempt to re-send lost data, configuring more than collector can help establish some
redundancy in your NetFlow setup. For example, consider a NetFlow setup with two collectors. The NetFlow data streams
sent to both collectors may lose different packets and different amounts of data, but you can inspect both sets of partial data to
gain a more complete picture of those specific flows.
Syntax
# (config) netflow
# (config netflow)
Subcommands
# (config netflow collectors) add IP_address port
Adds a collector on either an IPv4 or IPv6 address. Specify the collector's IP address and the port on which it is listening. You
can add multiple collectors on different ports on the same machine. If NetFlow is disabled, adding collectors does not enable
NetFlow. To enable NetFlow, use the # (config netflow) enable command.
369 of 604
Caution: If you specify IPv4 addresses to configure collectors, you must use unique IP
addresses and ports. If you use different strings to specify the same logical IP address (for
example, canonical and abbreviated forms for the same address), the ProxySG appliance
detects the duplicate IP address.
##(config netflow collectors) clear
Clears the list of all configured collectors.
# (config netflow collectors) exit
Exits collector mode.
# (config netflow collectors) remove IP_address port
Removes a collector from the list. Specify the collector’s IPv4 or IPv6 IP address and the port on which it is listening. If
NetFlow is enabled and you remove all collectors, a warning message appears and NetFlow collection will be suspended,
although the feature remains enabled.
# (config netflow collectors) view
Displays the list of configured collectors.
Example
# (config) netflow
# (config netflow collectors) add 192.0.2.0 9800
ok
See Also
n "# (config netflow)" on page 366
370 of 604
# (config netflow interfaces)

Synopsis
Configure NetFlow interfaces.
Syntax
# (config) netflow
# (config netflow)
# (config netflow) interfaces
# (config netflow interfaces)
Subcommands
# #(config netflow interfaces) add all
Adds all interfaces for NetFlow processing.
# (config netflow interfaces) add adapter:interface [in | out | inout]
Adds an interface used for processing NetFlow input (in), output (out), or both (inout). If no parameter is specified, the default is
used (inout).
Note: By default, all interfaces are included for NetFlow processing. You need only add
interfaces that you removed previously.
# (config netflow interfaces) remove all
Removes all interfaces for NetFlow processing.
# (config netflow interfaces) remove adapter:interface [in | out | inout]
Removes the interface used for processing NetFlow input (in), output (out), or both (inout). If no parameter is specified, the
default is used (inout).
If you remove all interfaces from NetFlow processing, and NetFlow is enabled, the CLI warns you that no interfaces are
available for processing and that collection will be disabled.
371 of 604
Example
# (config netflow interfaces) add 1:0 inout
ok
See Also
n "# (config netflow collectors) " on page 369
372 of 604
# (config) no
Synopsis
Negate the current settings for the archive configuration, content priority, IP default gateway, SOCKS machine, or system
upgrade path.
Syntax
# (config) no {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) no archive-configuration
Clears the configured archive configuration upload site.
# (config) no bridge
Clears the bridge configuration
# (config) no content outstanding-requests {delete | priority | revalidate } regex
Deletes a specific regular expression command in-progress (revalidation, priority, or deletion).
# (config) no content priority {regex regex | url url}
Removes a deletion regular expression policy or a deletion URL policy.
# (config) no ip-default-gateway
Sets the default IP gateway to zero
# (config) no socks-machine-id
Removes the SOCKS machine id
# (config) no upgrade-path
Clears the configured upgrade image download path.
Example
# (config) no content priority regex http://.*cnn.com
ok
373 of 604
# (config) ntp
Synopsis
Set NTP parameters. Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that is used to synchronize computer clock times in a
network of computers. The ProxySG appliance sets the UTC time by connecting to an NTP server. The ProxySG appliance
includes a list of NTP servers available on the Internet. If an NTP server is not available, you can set the time manually using
the Management Console.
Syntax
# (config) ntp {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) ntp clear
Removes all entries from the NTP server list.
# (config) ntp disable
Disables NTP.
# (config) ntp encrypted-server {domain_name | IP_address} key_id key_type encrypted_key
Adds a server to the server list, where encrypted_key is a key in an encrypted format. See # (config) ntp server for
details.
# (config) ntp enable
Enables NTP.
# (config) ntp interval minutes
Specifies how often to perform NTP server queries.
# (config) ntp no server {domain_name | IP_address}
Removes the NTP server named domain_name from the NTP server list.
# (config) ntp server {domain_name | IP_address} [key_id key_type [key]]
Adds a server to the NTP server list, using either the domain name of an NTP server that resolves to an IPv4 or IPv6 address,
or the IPv4 or IPv6 address of an NTP server.
If the server supports authentication, you can specify the authentication key information provided to you by the NTP server
authority:
n key_id is a value from 1 to 65534
n key_type is the string sha1
374 of 604
n key is the plaintext shared secret from the NTP authority
Example
# (config) ntp server clock.tricity.wsu.edu
ok
375 of 604
# (config) policy
Synopsis
Specify central and local policy file location, status, and other options.
Syntax
# (config) policy {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) policy builtin-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the builtin policy file.
# (config) policy central-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the central policy file.
# (config) policy classification-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the VPM object enforcement classification file.
# (config) policy delete tenant tenant_id
Specifies the tenant policy file to delete.
# (config) policy forward-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the forward policy file.
# (config) policy hmac encrypted-key encrypted_key
Sets the encrypted key used by the :hmac policy substitution function to perform digital signatures.
Note: If you administer multiple ProxySG appliances using Director, use this command to
synchronize the HMAC secret key across all appliances and to restore the key when an
appliance is remanufactured.
# (config) policy hmac generate-key
Generates a new random key to use for :hmac policy substitution function to perform digital signatures.
# (config) policy landlord-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the landlord policy file.
# (config) policy local-path url
376 of 604
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the local policy file.
# (config) policy no central-path
Specifies that the current central policy file URL setting should be cleared.
# (config) policy no classification-path
Specifies that the current classification file URL setting should be cleared.
# (config) policy no forward-path
Specifies that the current forward policy file URL setting should be cleared.
# (config) policy no landlord-path url
Clears the current landlord policy file URL.
# (config) policy no local-path
Specifies that the current local policy file URL setting should be cleared.
# (config) policy no notify
Specifies that no e-mail notification should be sent if the central policy file should change.
# (config) policy no quota
Disables the time and volume quotas library. If quota policy exists on the appliance, you must remove the policy or disable the
policy layer before disabling the library. If you do not remove or disable the policy before issuing this command, the CLI warns
that policy failed to compile. The quota library is disabled by default.
# (config) policy no subscribe
Specifies that the current policy should not be automatically updated in the event of a central policy change.
# (config) policy no subscribe classification
Specifies that the current VPM classification should not be automatically updated in the event of a classification change.
# (config) policy no tenant-path url
Clears the current default tenant policy file URL.
# (config) policy no vpm-cpl-path
Clears the network path to download VPM CPL policy.
# (config) policy no vpm-xml-path
Clears the network path to download VPM XML policy.
# (config) policy notify
377 of 604
Specifies that an e-mail notification should be sent if the central policy file should change.
# (config) policy order order of v)pm, l)ocal, c)entral, f)orward, t)enant
Specifies the policy evaluation order.
# (config) policy poll-interval minutes
Specifies the number of minutes that should pass between tests for central policy file changes.
# (config) policy poll-interval classification minutes
Specifies the number of minutes that should pass between tests for classification file changes.
# (config) policy poll-now
Tests for central policy file changes immediately.
# (config) policy poll-now classification
Tests for classification file changes immediately.
# (config) policy proxy-default {allow | deny}
Specifies the default proxy policy as allow or deny.
# (config) policy quota
Enables the time and volume quotas library. The library is disabled by default; if you do not enable it before trying to install time
or volume quota policy in the VPM, you receive a “variable not defined” error.
Note: Enabling time and volume quotas might have a performance impact on CPU utilization.
# (config) policy reset
Clears all policies.
# (config) policy restrict-dns {all | none}
Specifies DNS restriction:
• all restricts all DNS lookups.
• none (default) allows DNS lookups.
Note: To protect against misuse of DNS lookups from malicious third parties, Symantec
recommends that you restrict all DNS lookups.
378 of 604
# (config) policy restrict-rdns {all | none}
Specifies RDNS restriction:
• all (default) restricts all RDNS lookups.
• none allows RDNS lookups.
Note: By default, all RDNS lookups are restricted. The restriction protects against the misuse
of RDNS lookups from malicious third parties.
# (config) policy subscribe
Indicates that the current policy should be automatically updated in the event of a central policy change.
# (config) policy subscribe classification
Indicates that the current policy should be automatically updated in the event of a VPM classification file change.
# (config) policy tenant-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the default tenant policy file.
# (config) policy vpm-cpl-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the vpm-cpl policy file.
# (config) policy vpm-xml-path url
Specifies the network path (indicated by url) from which to download the vpm-xml policy file.
Example
# (config) policy local-path http://www.server1.com/local.txt
ok
# (config) policy central-path http://www.server2.com/central.txt
ok
379 of 604
# (config policy-services)
Synopsis
Configure settings for the Policy Services subscription.
Syntax
# (config) policy-services
# (config policy-services)
Subcommands
# (config policy-services) disable
Disables the Policy Services service.
Note: Disabling the service prevents database downloads, but does not disable or remove any
Access Security or Content Security policies. To remove related policy, use the Web Visual
Policy Manager.
# (config policy-services) download cancel
# (config policy-services) download encrypted-password encrypted_password
Sets the encrypted form of the password used when downloading from an internal server.
# (config policy-services) download get-now
# (config policy-services) download password password
Sets the password used during offline HTTP downloads.
# (config policy-services) download profile ssl_device_profile
Specifies an existing SSL device profile to use for securing connections to the internal server.
# (config policy-services) download url URL
Sets the URL to use when downloading from an internal server.
380 of 604
# (config policy-services) download username username
Sets the username to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config policy-services) enable
Enables the Policy Services service.
# (config policy-services) no download {password | profile | url | username}
# (config policy-services) view
Displays the download URL for the Policy Services database, results of the last download, last successful download, and
database version. This subcommand produces the same output as the # show policy-services command.
Example
# (config policy-services) download profile default
ok
See Also
n ProxySG Security Best Practices
n ProxySG Web Visual Policy Manager
n "Using Policy Services" in SGOS Administration Guide
381 of 604
# (config private-network)
Synopsis
Configure information on the private network(s) in your environment.
Syntax
# (config) private-network
# (config private-network)
Subcommands
# (config private-network) add {subnet subnet_prefix [/prefix_length] | domain domain_name}
Allows you to add specific private network subnets or domains.
# (config private-network) clear-all {subnets | domains}
Clears or removes all private network subnets and domains.
# (config private-network) exit
Exits the private network configuration and brings you back to the configuration prompt.
# (config private-network) remove {subnet subnet_prefix [/prefix_length] | domain domain_name}
Allows you remove specific private network subnets or domains.
# (config private-network) restore-non-routable-subnets
Restores the default non-routable subnets to the private network configuration.
# (config private-network) view
Displays configured private netwoirks and domains.
Example
# (config private-network) add 1.2.3.4
# (config private-network) add 1.2.0.0/16
# (config private-network) remove domain bluecoat.com
382 of 604
# (config) profile
Synopsis
Configure the system profile.
Syntax
# (config) profile {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) profile bwgain
Sets your system profile to bandwidth gain.
# (config) profile normal
Sets your system profile to normal. This is the default option.
# (config) profile portal
Sets your system profile to portal.
Example
# (config) profile bwgain
ok
383 of 604
# (config proxy-services)
Synopsis
Manage the proxy services on the ProxySG appliance.
Syntax
# (config) proxy-services
Subcommands
# (config proxy-services) create service_type service_name [service_group]
Creates a proxy service of the type and name that you specify. Optionally, specify a service group. If no service group is
specified the service is placed in the service group “Other.”
For more information on creating specific proxy services, see "Available Service Types" on the facing page.
# (config proxy-services) delete service_name
Deletes the specified proxy service.
# (config proxy-services) dynamic-bypass
Manages dynamic bypass settings. Changes the prompt to "# (config dynamic-bypass) " on page 390.
# (config proxy-services) edit service_name
Allows you to edit a proxy service of the specified name. For more information on editing specific proxy services, see
"Available Service Types" on the facing page.
# (config proxy-services) exit
# (config proxy-services) force-bypass {disable | enable}
Allows you to temporarily bypass all proxy services when enabled. Disabling force bypass returns proxy services to normal
operation.
# (config proxy-services) import {predefined-service | overwrite}
Imports a predefined service from the library. Optionally, an existing service may be replace by a service from the library by
entering the keyword overwrite.
# (config proxy-services) restricted-intercept
384 of 604
Restricts interception to a limited number of clients and servers. Changes the prompt to "# (config restricted-intercept)" on
page 407.
# (config proxy-services) static-bypass
Manages static bypass settings. Changes the prompt to "# (config static-bypass)" on page 418.
# (config proxy-services) view {dynamic-bypass | services | static-bypass}
Displays proxy service parameters.
Available Service Types

n "# (config cifs_proxy_service) " on the next page
n "# (config dns_proxy_service) " on page 388
n "# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) " on page 392
n "# (config ftp_proxy_service) " on page 394
n "# (config ftps_proxy_service) " on page 396
n "# (config http) " on page 399
n "# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) " on page 402
n "# (config mms)" on page 405
n "# (config rtmp proxy_service) " on page 409
n "# (config rtsp) " on page 411
n "# (config socks) " on page 413
n "# (config ssl) " on page 415
n "# (config tcp-tunnel)" on page 420
n "# (config telnet)" on page 423
Example
# (config proxy-services) create tcp-tunnel tcp_tunnel_2
ok
385 of 604
# (config cifs_proxy_service)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the CIFS proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create cifs cifs_proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit cifs_proxy_service
# (config cifs_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config cifs_proxy_service) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |
destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept | bypass]
Adds a listener with the specified parameters. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4) or prefix
length (for IPv6). When the destination address on a listener is defined as transparent or all, it applies to IPv4 and IPv6
addresses.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
Controls whether ADN is enabled for the service. Enabling ADN does not guarantee the connections are accelerated by ADN.
The actual decision is determined by ADN routing (for explicit deployment) and network setup (for transparent deployment).
# (config cifs_proxy_service) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
Controls whether to optimize traffic using the byte caching optimization technique when connecting upstream in an ADN
tunnel.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
Controls whether to optimize traffic using GZIP compression when connecting upstream in an ADN tunnel.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
Adjusts retention priority of byte cache data. If you want to keep certain types of streams in the byte cache for as long as
possible, set a high retention priority for the service. Or for streams that aren’t likely to get much benefit from byte caching, you
can set a low retention priority for the related service. Most services are set to normal priority by default. Note that unless the
underlying service has adn-byte-cache enabled, the priority setting will have no effect; if you try to set a retention priority when
386 of 604
byte caching is disabled, the CLI displays a warning message to inform you that the byte-cache-priority attribute has no effect
when adn-byte-cache is disabled.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port}
Changes the behavior from intercept to bypass for the specified listener.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) exit
Returns to ."# (config proxy-services)" on page 384.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) group service_group
Moves the service to the specified service group.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

Changes the behavior from bypass to intercept for the specified listener.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) proxy-type proxy_type
Changes the service's proxy type to the specified type.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

Removes the specified listener.
# (config cifs_proxy_service) view
Displays the current proxy service details.
Example
# (config proxy-services) create cifs CIFS2
# (config proxy-services) edit CIFS2
# (config CIFS2) attribute adn-byte-cache disable
ok
See Also
n "# (config proxy-services)" on page 384
387 of 604
# (config dns_proxy_service)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the DNS proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create dns proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit dns_proxy_service
# (config dns_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config dns_proxy_service) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept | bypass]
length (for IPv6). When the destination address on a listener is defined as transparent, explicit, or all, it applies to IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses.
# (config dns_proxy_service) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

| all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port}
Changes the behavior from intercept to bypass for the specified listener. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet
mask (for IPv4) or prefix length (for IPv6). When the destination address on a listener is defined as transparent, explicit, or all, it
applies to IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
# (config dns_proxy_service) exit
Returns to ."# (config proxy-services)" on page 384.
# (config dns_proxy_service) group service_group
#(config dns_proxy_service) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

explicit | all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port}
Change the behavior from bypass to intercept for the specified listener. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask
(for IPv4) or prefix length (for IPv6). When the destination address on a listener is defined as transparent, explicit, or all, it
388 of 604
# (config dns_proxy_service) proxy-type proxy_type
Changes the current service's proxy type to the specified type.
# (config dns_proxy_service) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

Removes a listener with the specified parameters.
# (config dns_proxy_service) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create cifs CIFS2
# (config proxy-services) edit CIFS2
# (config CIFS2) attribute adn-byte-cache disable
ok
See Also
389 of 604
# (config dynamic-bypass)
Synopsis
Dynamic bypass provides a maintenance-free method for improving performance of the ProxySG appliance by automatically
compiling a list of requested URLs that return various kinds of errors.
Syntax
# (config dynamic-bypass)
Subcommands
# (config dynamic-bypass) clear
Clears all dynamic bypass entries.
# (config dynamic-bypass) disable
Disables dynamic bypass.
# (config dynamic-bypass) enable
Enables dynamic bypass.
# (config dynamic-bypass) exit
Exits to the #(config proxy-services) prompt.
# (config dynamic-bypass) max-entries number_of_entries
Specifies the maximum number of dynamic-bypass entries. Connections that match entries in the dynamic bypass list are not
intercepted by the application proxies. Entries in the dynamic bypass list eventually time out based on the configuration. If the
list grows beyond its configured size, the oldest entry is removed
#(config dynamic-bypass) no trigger {all | connect-error | non-http | receive-error | 400 | 401 | 403
| 405 | 406 | 500 | 502 | 503 | 504}
Disables dynamic bypass for the specified HTTP response code, all HTTP response codes, or all non-HTTP responses.
# (config dynamic-bypass) server-threshold number_of_entries
Specifies the number of client entries for all clients to bypass a server. Each dynamic entry can be identified by a server
address or client/server address pair. A dynamic entry without a client address means the client address is a wildcard address.
For example, if the server threshold is set to 10 and there are already nine dynamic entries with different client addresses for
390 of 604
the same server address, the next time a new dynamic entry is added to the same server address but contains a different client
address, the ProxySG appliance compresses the nine dynamic entries into one dynamic entry with server address only; all
clients going to that server address are bypassed.
# (config dynamic-bypass) timeout minutes
Sets the dynamic-bypass timeout interval in minutes.
#(config dynamic-bypass) trigger {all | connect-error | non-http | receive-error | 400 | 401 | 403 |
405 | 406 | 500 | 502 | 503 | 504}
Enables dynamic bypass for the specified HTTP response code, all HTTP response codes, or all non-HTTP responses.
# (config dynamic-bypass) view [configuration | filter {* | all | client_ip_address | client_ip_

address/subnet_mask} {* | all | server_ip_address | server_ip_address/subnet_mask}]
Displays the dynamic-bypass configuration or to filter the dynamic-bypass list on the parameters above.
Example
# (config dynamic-bypass) clear
ok
# (config dynamic-bypass) enable
WARNING:
Requests to sites that are put into the dynamic bypass list
bypass future policy evaluation. This could result in subversion
of on-box policy. The use of dynamic bypass is cautioned.
ok
# (config dynamic-bypass) trigger all
ok
391 of 604
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the Endpoint Mapper proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create endpoint-mapper proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit endpoint_mapper_proxy_service
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |
explicit | all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept
| bypass]
IPv6 addresses.
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
Adjust retention priority of byte cache data. If you want to keep certain types of streams in the byte cache for as long as
byte caching is disabled, a warning message displays to inform you that the byte-cache-priority attribute has no effect when
adn-byte-cache is disabled.
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
392 of 604
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask}

{destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port}
Change the behavior from intercept to bypass for the specified listener.
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) exit
Returns to "# (config proxy-services)" on page 384.
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) group service_group
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask}

{destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port}
Change the behavior from bypass to intercept for the specified listener.
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) proxy-type proxy_type
Changes the proxy type of the current service.
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask}

{destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept | bypass]
# (config endpoint_mapper_proxy_service) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create endpoint-mapper epmapper1
# (config proxy-services) edit epmapper1
# (config epmapper1) add all 10003
ok
See Also
393 of 604
# (config ftp_proxy_service)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the FTP proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create ftp proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit ftp_proxy_service
# (config ftp_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config ftp_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
IPv6 addresses.
# (config ftp_service_name) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config ftp_service_name) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config ftp_service_name) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
# (config ftp_service_name) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
394 of 604
# (config ftp_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |

all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port}
# (config ftp_service_name) exit
Returns to "# (config proxy-services)" on page 384 prompt.
# (config ftp_service_name) group service_group
Moves a particular service to another service group.
# (config ftp_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

Changes the behavior from bypass to intercept for the specified listener. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet
# (config ftp_service_name) proxy-type proxy_type
Changes the proxy type of the service to the specified type.
# (config ftp_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |

Removes a listener with the specified parameters. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4) or prefix
length (for IPv6).
# (config ftp_service_name) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create ftp ftp1
# (config proxy-services) edit ftp1
# (config ftp1) intercept all 10004
ok
See Also
395 of 604
# (config ftps_proxy_service)
Synopsis
Manage services that use the FTPS protocol in implicit mode.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create ftps proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit ftps_proxy_service
# (config ftps_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config ftps_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
IPv6 addresses.
# (config ftps_service_name) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config ftps_service_name) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config ftps_service_name) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
# (config ftps_service_name) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
396 of 604
# (config ftps_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

# (config ftps_service_name) exit
# (config ftps_service_name) groupservice_group
Moves a particular service to another service group.
# (config ftps_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

# (config ftps_service_name) proxy-typeproxy_type
Changes the proxy type.
# (config ftps_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

| all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept |
bypass]
length (for IPv6).
# (config ftps_service_name) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create ftps ftps1
The service group for "ftps1" is not specified; default to group "Standard".
ok
# (config proxy-services) edit ftps1
# (config ftps1) group "bypass recommended"
ok
397 of 604
See Also
398 of 604
# (config http)
Synopsis
Manages services that are controlled by the HTTP proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create http proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit http_proxy_service
# (config http_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config http_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
IPv6 addresses.
# (config http_service_name) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config http_service_name) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config http_service_name) attribute authenticate-401 {disable | enable}
All transparent and explicit requests received on the port always use transparent authentication (cookie or IP, depending on the
configuration). This is especially useful to force transparent proxy authentication in some proxy-chaining scenarios.
# (config http_service_name) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
399 of 604
# (config http_service_name) attribute connect {disable | enable}
This command is deprecated. Use policy instead, such as:
; To block CONNECT destined to ports other then 443

<Proxy>
url.port=!443 http.method=CONNECT deny
# (config http_service_name) attribute detect-protocol {disable | enable}
Protocols that can be detected include: HTTP, P2P (eDonkey, BitTorrent, FastTrack, Gnutella), SSL, and Endpoint Mapper.
# (config http_service_name) attribute head (disable | enable}
This command is deprecated. Use policy instead, such as:
; To block HEAD methods

<Proxy>
http.method=HEAD deny
# (config http_service_name) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
# (config http_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

# (config http_service_name) exit
Returns to the "# (config proxy-services)" on page 384 prompt.
# (config http_service_name) group service_group
Moves the service to the specified group.
# (config http_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

Changes the behavior from bypass to intercept for the listener you specify. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet
# (config http_service_name) proxy-type proxy_type
400 of 604
# (config http_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

length (for IPv6).
# (config http_service_name) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create http http2
# (config proxy-services) edit http2
# (config http2) attribute authenticate-401 enable
ok
See Also
401 of 604
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the HTTPS reverse proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create http-reverse-proxy proxy_service service_group
# (config proxy-services) edit https_reverse_proxy_service
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |
explicit | all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept
| bypass]
IPv6 addresses.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
402 of 604
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute ccl list_name
CA Certificate List used for verifying client certificates.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute cipher-suite [list_of_cipher_suites]
Specifies the cipher suites you want to use with the HTTPS reverse proxy service. The default is to use all cipher suites. If you
want to change the default, you have two choices:
n interactive mode
n non-interactive mode
The optional list of cipher suites is a space-separated list, such as rc4-md5 exp-des-cbc-sha. You may specify more than
one cipher suite. If you want to use the interactive mode, do not specify a cipher suite.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute forward-client-cert {disable | enable}
When used with the verify-client attribute, puts the extracted client certificate information into a
header that is included in the request when it is forwarded to the OCS. The name of the header is
Client-Cert. The header contains the certificate serial number, subject, validity dates and issuer (all as
name=value pairs). The actual certificate is not forwarded.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute keyring [keyring_id | keylist_id]
Allows you to specify the keyring or keylist you want to use with this service.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute ssl-versions {sslv3 | tlsv1 | tlsv1.1 | tlsv1.2 |

tlsv1.3 }
Selects the versions of SSL you want to support.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) attribute verify-client {disable | enable}
Requests and validates the SSL client certificate.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

403 of 604
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) exit
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) group service_group
#(config https_reverse_proxy_service) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent

| explicit | all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet_mask} {port | first_port-last_port}
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) proxy-type proxy_type
Changes the proxy type of the current service.
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

length (for IPv6).
# (config https_reverse_proxy_service) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create https-reverse-proxy HTTPS_RP1
# (config proxy-services) edit HTTPS_RP1
# (config HTTPS_RP1) attribute use-adn enable
ok
See Also
404 of 604
# (config mms)
Synopsis
Manages services that are controlled by the MMS proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create mms proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit mms_proxy_service
# (config mms_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config mms_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
all | destination_ip | destination_ip/subnet-mask} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept | bypass]
Adds a listener with the specified parameters.
# (config mms_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |

# (config mms_service_name) exit
Returns to the ."# (config proxy-services)" on page 384 prompt.
# (config mms_service_name) group service_group
# (config mms_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

# (config mms_service_name) proxy-type proxy_type
# (config mms_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |

405 of 604
# (config mms_service_name) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create mms mms1
# (config proxy-services) edit mms1
# (config mms1)
See Also
406 of 604
# (config restricted-intercept)
Synopsis
By default, all clients and servers evaluate the entries in proxy services where the decision is made to intercept or bypass a
connection. To restrict or reduce the clients and servers that can be intercepted by proxy services, use the restricted intercept
list. The restricted intercept list is useful in a rollout, prior to full production, where you only want to intercept a subset of the
clients. After you are in full production mode, the restricted intercept list can be disabled.
Enabling restricted intercept only intercepts traffic specified in the client/server list. Disabling restricted intercept results in
normal interception.
Syntax
# (config restricted-intercept)
Subcommands
# (config restricted-intercept) {enable | disable}
Enables or disables the restricted-intercept list.
# (config restricted-intercept) add {all | client_ip | client_ip/subnet_mask} | {all | server_ip |

server_ip/subnet_mask}
Adds an entry to the restricted list, either a client or a server. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4)
or prefix length (for IPv6).
# (config restricted-intercept) remove {all | client_ip | client_ip/subnet_mask} | {all | server_ip |

server_ip/subnet_mask}
Clears the specified client or server from the restricted list. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4) or
prefix length (for IPv6).
# (config restricted-intercept) view [filter {all | client_ip | client_ip/subnet_mask} | {all |

server_ip | server_ip/subnet_mask}]
Displays the entire list or only the specifiedclients or servers. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4)
or prefix length (for IPv6).
407 of 604
Example
# (config restricted-intercept) add all 192.168.100.1
See Also
408 of 604
# (config rtmp proxy_service)

Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the RTMP proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create rtmp proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit rtmp_proxy_service
# (config rtmp_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config rtmp_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
# (config rtmp_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

# (config rtmp_service_name) exit
# (config rtmp_service_name) group service_group
# (config rtmp_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

# (config rtmp_service_name) proxy-type proxy_type
# (config rtmp_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

409 of 604
# (config rtmp_service_name) view
Displays the specified proxy service details.
Example
# (config proxy-services) create rtmp rtmp1
# (config proxy-services) edit rtmp1
# (config rtmp1) proxy-type http
ok
See Also
410 of 604
# (config rtsp)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the RTSP proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create rtsp proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit rtsp_proxy_service
# (config rtsp_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config rtsp_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
# (config rtsp_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

# (config rtsp_service_name) exit
# (config rtsp_service_name) group service_group
Moves a particular service to the specified service group.
# (config rtsp_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

# (config rtsp_service_name) proxy-type proxy_type
Changes the proxy type of the service to the specified type.
# (config rtsp_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

411 of 604
# (config rtsp_service_name) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create rtsp rtsp1
# (config proxy-services) edit rtsp1
# (config rtsp1) attribute use-adn enable
ok
See Also
412 of 604
# (config socks)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the SOCKS proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create socks_proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit socks_proxy_service
# (config socks_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config socks_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
# (config socks_service_name) attribute detect-protocol {disable | enable}
Detects the protocol being used. Protocols that can be detected include: HTTP, P2P (eDonkey, BitTorrent, FastTrack,
Gnutella), SSL, and Endpoint Mapper.
# (config socks_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

# (config socks_service_name) exit
# (config socks_service_name) group service_group
# (config socks_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

# (config socks_service_name) proxy-type proxy_type
413 of 604
Changes the proxy type of a particular service.
# (config socks_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

# (config socks_service_name) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) create socks socks1
# (config proxy-services) edit socks1
# (config socks1) attribute detect-protocol enable
ok
See Also
414 of 604
# (config ssl)
Synopsis
Manages services that are controlled by the SSL proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create ssl_proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit ssl_proxy_service
# (config ssl_proxy_service)
Subcommands
# (config ssl_service_name) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
Adds a listener with the parameters you specify. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4) or prefix
IPv6 addresses.
# (config ssl_service_name) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config ssl_service_name) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config ssl_service_name) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
byte caching is disabled, a warning message informs you that the byte-cache-priority attribute has no effect when adn-byte-
cache is disabled.
# (config ssl_service_name) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
415 of 604
# (config ssl_service_name) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |

# (config ssl_service_name) attribute detect_protocol {disable | enable}
Controls whether to detect HTTPS protocol after intercepting the SSL traffic, and hand it off to the HTTPS proxy.
Non-HTTPS traffic will be tunneled using STunnel.
# (config ssl_service_name) exit
# (config ssl_service_name) group service_group
# (config ssl_service_name) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

# (config ssl_service_name) proxy-type proxy_type
Changes the service's proxy type.
# (config ssl_service_name) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |

Removes the specified listener. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4) or prefix length (for IPv6).
# (config ssl_service_name) view
Example
# (config proxy-services) edit ssl1
# (config ssl1) add transparent 443
ok
416 of 604
See Also
n "# (config ssl) " on page 415
417 of 604
# (config static-bypass)
Synopsis
Static bypass prevents the ProxySG appliance from transparently accelerating requests to servers that perform IP
authentication with clients. When a request matches an IP address and subnet mask specification, the request is sent to the
designated gateway without going through the ProxySG appliance
Syntax
# (config static-bypass)
Subcommands
# (config static-bypass) add {all | client_ip_address | client_ip_address/subnet_mask} {all | server_
ip_address | server_ip_address/subnet_mask} ["comment"]
Adds a listener with the parameters you specify. IP addresses can be in IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4) or prefix
length (for IPv6). All includes IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. You can optionally enter a comment of up to 80 characters enclosed in
quotation marks (" ") that specifies why you want the specific source/destination combination to be bypassed. Adding a
comment is also useful if another administrator needs to make changes to the configuration later.
# (config static-bypass) exit
# (config static-bypass) remove {all | client_ip_address | client_ip_address/subnet_mask} {all |

server_ip_address | server_ip_address/subnet_mask}
Removes a listener with the parameters you specify. IP addresses can be in IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet mask (for IPv4) or
prefix length (for IPv6). includes IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
# (config static-bypass) view [filter {* | all | client_ip_address | client_ip_address/subnet_mask} {*

| all | server_ip_address | server_ip_address/subnet_mask]
Displays static bypass entries based on the filters you specify. IP addresses can be in IPv4 or IPv6; entera subnet mask (for
IPv4) or prefix length (for IPv6).
418 of 604
Example
# (config static-bypass) add 10.9.17.135 all
ok
See Also
419 of 604
# (config tcp-tunnel)
Synopsis
Manages services that are controlled by the TCP Tunnel proxy
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create tcp-tunnel tcp_tunnel_proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit tcp_tunnel_proxy_service
# (config tcp_tunnel_proxy_service
Subcommands
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) add {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit |
IPv6 addresses.
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
#(config tcp_tunnel_service) attribute detect-protocol {disable | enable}
Detects the protocol being used. Protocols that can be detected include: HTTP, P2P (eDonkey, BitTorrent,
420 of 604
FastTrack, Gnutella), SSL, and Endpoint Mapper.
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) attribute early-intercept {disable | enable}
Controls whether the proxy responds to client TCP connection requests before connecting to the upstream server. When early
intercept is disabled, the proxy delays responding to the client until after it has attempted to contact the server.
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) attribute adn-thin-client {disable | enable}
Applies special treatment to streams from thin client applications (such as RDP, VNC, and Citrix). This processing improves
responsiveness of thin client actions. For example, end users will notice that the desktop displays significantly faster. This
option is available only for services using the TCP Tunnel proxy, and can be enabled only when ADN is enabled and byte
caching and/or compression is enabled. The byte-cache-priority and adn-thin-client settings are mutually exclusive; you cannot
enable both options for a service.
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
#(config tcp_tunnel_service) bypass {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

Changes the behavior from intercept to bypass for the listener you specify. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) exit
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) group service_group
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) intercept {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent |

Changes the behavior from bypass to intercept for the listener you specify. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) proxy-type proxy_type
# (config tcp_tunnel_service) remove {all | source_ip | source_ip/subnet_mask} {transparent | explicit

# (config tcp_tunnel_service) view
421 of 604
Example
# (config proxy-services) create tcp-tunnel TCP1
# (config proxy-services) edit TCP1
# (config TCP1) attribute early-intercept enable
ok
See Also
422 of 604
# (config telnet)
Synopsis
Manage services that are controlled by the Telnet proxy.
Syntax
# (config proxy-services) create telnet telnet_proxy_service [service_group]
# (config proxy-services) edit telnet_proxy_service
# (config telnet_proxy_service
Subcommands
# (config telnet_service) add {all | source_ip[/subnet_mask]} {transparent | explicit | all |
destination_ip[/subnet_mask]} {port | first_port-last_port} [intercept | bypass]
IPv6 addresses.
# (config telnet_service) attribute adn-byte-cache {disable | enable}
tunnel.
# (config telnet_service) attribute adn-compress {disable | enable}
# (config telnet_service) attribute byte-cache-priority {low | normal | high}
# (config telnet_service) attribute detect-protocol {disable | enable}
423 of 604
Detects the protocol being used. Protocols that can be detected include: HTTP, P2P (eDonkey, BitTorrent, FastTrack,
Gnutella), SSL, and Endpoint Mapper.
#(config telnet_service) attribute early-intercept {disable | enable}
Controls whether the proxy responds to client TCP connection requests before connecting to the upstream server. When early
intercept is disabled, the proxy delays responding to the client until after it has attempted to contact the server.
# (config telnet_service) attribute use-adn {disable | enable}
Controls whether ADN is enabled the specific service. Enabling ADN does not guarantee the connections are accelerated by
ADN. The actual decision is determined by ADN routing (for explicit deployment) and network setup (for transparent
deployment).
# (config telnet_service) bypass {all | source_ip[/subnet_mask]} {transparent | explicit | all |

destination_ip[/subnet_mask]} {port | first_port-last_port}
Changes the behavior from intercept to bypass for the listener you specify. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet
# (config telnet_service) exit
# (config telnet_service) group service_group
Moves the service to a different service group.
# (config telnet_service) intercept {all | source_ip[/subnet_mask]} {transparent | explicit | all |

Change the behavior from bypass to intercept for the listener you specify. IP addresses can be IPv4 or IPv6; enter a subnet
# (config telnet_service) proxy-type proxy_type
# (config telnet_service) remove {all | source_ip[/subnet_mask]} {transparent | explicit | all |

# (config telnet_service) view
424 of 604
Example
# (config proxy-services) create telnet telnet1
# (config proxy-services) edit telnet1
# (config telnet1) view
Service Name: telnet1
Proxy: Telnet
Attributes: early-intercept
Destination IP Port Range Action
See Also
425 of 604
# (config) restart
Synopsis
Set restart options for the ProxySG appliance.
Syntax
# (config) restart {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) restart core-image {context | full | none}
Specifies options for core images:
n context: Indicates only core image context should be written on restart.
n full: Indicates full core image should be written on restart.
n none: Indicates no core image should be written on restart.
# (config) restart mode {hardware | software}
Specifies hardware or software restart mode.
Example
# (config) restart mode software
ok
See Also
n link or reference
n link or reference
n chapter in (missing or bad snippet)
426 of 604
# (config) return-to-sender
Synopsis
Return to Sender (RTS) eliminates the need to create static routes by configuring the ProxySG appliance to send response
packets back to the same interface that received the request packet, entirely bypassing any routing lookup on the ProxySG
appliance. Essentially, the ProxySG appliance stores the source Ethernet MAC address that the client’s packet came from
and sends all responses to that address.Under these conditions, if the return-to-sender feature is enabled, the ProxySG
appliance remembers the MAC address of the last hop for a packet from the client or server and sends any responses or
requests to the MAC address instead of the default gateway.
Inbound RTS affects connections initiated to the ProxySG appliance by clients and is enabled by default. Inbound RTS
configures the ProxySG appliance to send SYN-ACK packets to the same interface that the SYN packet arrived on. All
subsequent TCP/IP response packets are also sent to the same interface that received the request packet.
RTS inbound applies only to clients who are on a different subnet than the ProxySG appliance. If clients are on the same
subnet, interface routes are used. Outbound RTS affects connections initiated by the ProxySG appliance to origin servers.
Outbound RTS causes the ProxySG appliance to send ACK and subsequent packets to the same interface that the SYN-ACK
packet arrived on.
Note: RTS functionality should only be used if static routes cannot be defined for the clients
and servers or if routing information for the clients and servers is not available through RIP
packets.
You can use inbound RTS for load balancing. Normally, the ProxySG appliance would not know which load balancer to return
the packet to. When inbound RTS is enabled, the ProxySG appliance simply returns packets to the load balancer the packets
came from.
Syntax
# (config) return-to-sender {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) return-to-sender inbound {disable | enable}
Enables or disables return-to-sender for inbound sessions.
# (config) return-to-sender outbound {disable | enable}
Enables or disables return-to-sender for outbound sessions.
# (config) return-to-sender overwrite-static-route {disable | enable}
When enabled, return-to-sender will overwrite any static route entries. The default is disabled.
427 of 604
Example
# (config) return-to-sender inbound enable
ok
428 of 604
# (config) reveal-advanced
See "# reveal-advanced" on page 96.
429 of 604
# (config) rip
Synopsis
Use this command to set RIP (Routing Information Protocol) configuration options.
Using RIP, a host and router can send a routing table list of all other known hosts to its closest neighbor host every 30
seconds. The neighbor host passes this information on to its next closest neighbor and so on until all hosts have perfect
knowledge of each other. (RIP uses the hop count measurement to derive network distance.) Each host in the network can
then use the routing table information to determine the most efficient route for a packet.
The RIP configuration is defined in a configuration file. To configure RIP, first create a text file of RIP commands and then load
the file by using the load command.
Syntax
# (config) rip {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) rip {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the current RIP configuration.
# (config) rip default-route {disable | enable}
Accepts or denies the incoming default route advertisement.
# (config) rip default-route {group number | weight number}
Allows you to set the preference group and weight of the default routes.
# (config) rip no path
Clears the current RIP configuration path as determined using the rip path url command.
#(config) rip path url
Sets the path to the RIP configuration file to the URL indicated by url.
Example
#(config) rip path url
ok
430 of 604
# (config routing-domains)
Synopsis
Segregate distinct networks on a single ProxySG appliance. Each routing domain is associated with specific logical interfaces
and includes its own routing table and default route. Traffic that flows over interfaces that are not configured in a routing domain
are subject to the default routing configuration of the ProxySG appliance, as set in Configuration > Network > Routing.
Note: Routing domains requires that TCP Forwarding is enabled. See"# (config) tcp-ip" on
page 593 for details.
Syntax
# (config) routing-domains
Subcommands
# (config routing-domains) create routing_domain_name
Creates a routing domain with the specified name.
# (config routing-domains) delete routing_domain_name
Deletes the routing domain with the specified name.
# (config routing-domains) edit routing_domain_name
Edits the specified routing domain. Changes the prompt to "# (config routing-domains)" above.
# (config routing-domains) exit
# (config routing-domains) view
Displays the existing routing domains.
Example
See the example in "# (config routing-domains)" above.
431 of 604
See Also
n "# (config routing-domains)" on the previous page
n SGOS Administration Guide
n Multi-Tenancy Technical Brief
n Routing Domains Technical Brief
432 of 604
# (config routing-domains routing_domain_name)

Synopsis
Segregate distinct networks on a single ProxySG appliance. Each routing domain is associated with specific logical interfaces
and includes its own routing table and default route. Traffic that flows over interfaces that are not configured in a routing domain
are subject to the default routing configuration of the ProxySG appliance, as set in Configuration > Network > Routing.
Note: Routing domains requires that TCP Forwarding is enabled. See "# (config) tcp-ip" on
page 593 for details.
Syntax
# (config routing-domains) edit routing_domain_name
# (config routing_domain_name)
Subcommands
# (config routing_domain_name) default-gateway ip_address [ preference_group (1-10) [weight (1-100)]]
Sets the default gateway for this routing domain. Optionally specify the preference group and weight.
# (config routing_domain_name) exit
Returns to "# (config routing-domains)" on page 431.
# (config routing_domain_name) inline static-route-table EOF
Installs a static routing table to the routing domain.
# (config routing_domain_name) [no] interface adapter_number:interface_number.VLAN
Adds or removes the specified interface from the routing domain.
# (config routing_domain_name) view
Displays information about this routing domain.
433 of 604
Example
Create a routing domain for the VLAN-tagged network used by the marketing department called Marketing, which uses a VLAN
ID of 144. This example uses the following steps:
a. Configure a routing domain for the Marketing subnet.
b. Configure a VLAN for the Marketing subnet.
c. Associate the new VLAN interface to the new routing domain.
d. Configure a default gateway for the new routing domain.
e. Configure a static route for the new routing domain.
f. Verify that the new routing domain contains the configuration.
# (config routing-domains) create Marketing_144
ok
# (config routing-domains) exit
# (config) interface 1:0.144
# (config interface 1:0.144) ip-address 144.144.144.1 255.255.255.0
ok
# (config interface 1:0.144) exit
# (config routing-domains) edit Marketing_144
# (config Marketing_144) interface 1:0.144
ok
# (config Marketing_144) default-gateway 144.144.144.100
# (config Marketing_144) inline static-route-table EOF
44.44.44.44/24 144.144.144.111
EOF
ok
# (config Marketing_144) view
Routing domain Marketing_144 configuration:
Associated interfaces: 1:0.144
; TCP/IP Routing Table
Routing tables
Routing domain 2 : Marketing_144
Internet:
Destination Gateway Flags Refs Use Netif Expire
default 144.144.144.100 UGS 1 0 1:0.144
44.44.44.0/24 144.144.144.111 UGS 1 0 1:0.144
144.144.144.0/24 link#9 UC 0 0 1:0.144
144.144.144.100 link#9 UHLW 1 0 1:0.144 66
144.144.144.111 link#9 UHLW 0 0 1:0.144
434 of 604
See Also
n "# (config routing-domains routing_domain_name)" on page 433
n SGOS Administration Guide
n Multi-Tenancy Technical Brief
n Routing Domains Technical Brief
435 of 604
# (config) security
Synopsis
Use # (config) security commands are used for security, authentication, and authorization. The ProxySG appliance
provides the ability to authenticate and authorize explicit and transparent proxy users using industry-standard authentication
services.
Syntax
# (config) security {subcommand}
Subcommands
Modes in the # (config) security command can be divided into the following categories:
n "Console Access and Authorization" below
n "Realms and Authentication" on the facing page
n "Transparent Proxy" on page 439
n "Top-Level Domains" on page 439
Console Access and Authorization

The options in this category allow you to manage passwords and usernames for the ProxySG appliance itself.
"# (config) security allowed-access" on page 441
Adds or removes the specified IP address to the access control list.
"# (config) security default-authenticate-mode" on page 456
Sets the default authenticate.mode to auto or to sg2.
"# (config) security enable-password" on page 457
Sets the console enable password to the password specified.
"# (config) security encrypted-enable-password" on page 458
Specify an encrypted console enable password.
"# (config) security encrypted-password" on page 459
Specify an encrypted console account password.
"# (config) security enforce-acl" on page 460
Enables or disables the console access control list.
436 of 604
"# (config) security front-panel-pin" on page 461
(On applicable models) Sets a four-digit PIN to restrict access to the front panel of the appliance.
"# (config) security hashed-enable-password" on page 462
Sets the console enable password to the password specified.
"# (config) security hashed-front-panel-pin" on page 463
(On applicable models) Sets a hashed four-digit PIN to restrict access to the front panel of the appliance.
"# (config) security hashed-password" on page 464
Specifies the console password in hashed format.
"# (config) security legacy-relative-usernames" on page 480
Enables and disables the use of legacy relative usernames.
"# (config) security management" on page 489
Manages display settings.
"# (config) security password" on page 494
Specifies the console password.
"# (config) security password-display" on page 495
Specifies format to display passwords in "# show configuration" on page 102 output.
"# (config) security private-key-display" on page 500
Specifies how to display SSH and SSL private keys in show config output.
# (config) security users
Manages user log ins, log outs and refresh data.
"# (config) security username" on page 532
Specifies the console username.
Realms and Authentication

Multiple authentication realms can be used on a single ProxySG appliance. Multiple realms are essential if the enterprise is a
managed provider or the company has merged with or acquired another company. Even for companies using only one protocol,
multiple realms might be necessary, such as the case of a company using an LDAP server with multiple authentication
boundaries. You can use realm sequencing to search the multiple realms all at one time.
437 of 604
Note: Up to 40 realms per type (such as certificate, authentication forms, and RADIUS) are
allowed.
"# (config) security authentication-forms" on page 443
Creates forms for authentication and manages them.
"# (config) security captcha" on page 445
Manages CAPTCHA validators.
"# (config) security certificate" on page 448
Creates and manages certificate realms.
"# (config) security coreid" on page 451
Creates and manages COREid realms.
# (config) security force-credential-forwarding
Controls whether the ProxySG appliance forwards Authorization and Proxy-Authorization headers upstream to the OCS.
"# (config) security iwa-bcaaa" on page 465
Creates and manages IWA realms that connect to Active Directory using BCAAA.
"# (config) security iwa-direct" on page 469
Creates and manages IWA realms that connect to Active Directory directly.
"# (config) security ldap" on page 473
Creates and manages LDAP realms.
"# (config) security local" on page 481
Creates and manages local realms.
"# (config) security local-user-list" on page 484
Creates and manages local user lists.
"# (config security novell-sso realm_name)" on page 491
Creates and manages Novell SSO realms.
"# (config) security policy-substitution" on page 496
Creates and manage policy substitution realms.
438 of 604
"# (config) security radius" on page 502
Creates and manages RADIUS realms.
"# (config) security request-storage" on page 509
Creates and manages request-storage realms.
"# (config) security saml" on page 510
Creates and manages SAML realms.
"# (config security sequence)" on page 518
Creates and manages sequence realms.
"# (config) security siteminder" on page 521
Creates and manages SiteMinder realms.
"# (config security windows-domains)" on page 524
Configures a Windows domain.
"# (config) security windows-sso" on page 529
Creates and manages Windows SSO realms.
"# (config) security xml" on page 533
Creates and manages XML realms.
Transparent Proxy
You can configure the authentication method for transparent proxies.
"# (config) security transparent-proxy-auth" on page 523
Specifies certain transparent proxy authentication settings.
Top-Level Domains
You can manually enter top-level domains.
"# (config) security top-level-domains" on page 522
Manages the top-level domain list.
439 of 604
Example
# (config) show security
Account:
Username: "admin"
Hashed Password: $1$a2zTlEE$1b88R3SXUTXS.zO7lh8db0
Hashed Enable Password: $1$xQnqGerX$LU65b20trsIAF6yJox26L
Hashed Front Panel PIN: "$1$ThSEiB1v$seyBhSxtTXEtUGDZ5NOB1/"
Management console display realm name: "Aurora"
Management console auto-logout timeout: Never
Access control is disabled
Access control list (source, mask):
Flush credentials on policy update is enabled
Default authenticate.mode: auto
Transparent proxy authentication:
Method: cookie
Cookie type: session
Cookie virtual-url: "www.cfauth.com/"
IP time-to-live: 15
Local realm:
No local realm is defined.
RADIUS realm:
No RADIUS realm is defined.
LDAP realm(s):
No LDAP realm is defined.
...
440 of 604
# (config) security allowed-access

Synopsis
Add or remove IP addresses to the console access control list.
Syntax
# (config) security allowed-access {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security allowed-access add source_ip [ip_mask]
Adds the specified IP address to the access control list.
# (config) security allowed-access remove source_ip [ip_mask]
Removes the specified IP from the access control list.
Example
# (config) security allowed-access add 10.25.36.47
See Also
n "# (config) security enforce-acl" on page 460
441 of 604
# (config) security authentication-exception-stats

This command is used for Symantec internal use only.
442 of 604
# (config) security authentication-forms

Synopsis
You can use forms-based authentication exceptions to control what your users see during authentication. To create and put
into use forms-based authentication, you must complete the following steps:
n Create a new form or edit one of the existing authentication form exceptions
n Set storage options
n Set policies
Syntax
# (config security authentication-forms)
Subcommands
# (config authentication-forms) copy source_form_name target_form_name
Changes the name of a form. Note that you cannot change the form type.
# (config authentication-forms) create {authentication-form | new-pin-form | query-form} form_name
Creates a new authentication form using the form type you specify.
# (config authentication-forms) delete form_name
Deletes the specified authentication form.
# (config authentication-forms) exit
# (config authentication-forms) inline form_name eof_marker
Installs an authentication form from console input.
# (config authentication-forms) load form_name
Downloads a new authentication form.
# (config authentication-forms) no path [form_name]
Negates authentication-form configuration.
# (config authentication-forms) path [form_name] path
443 of 604
Specifies the path (URL or IP address) from which to load authentication forms.
# (config authentication-forms) revert [form_name]
Reverts an authentication form to default.
# (config authentication-forms) view
Displays the form specified or all forms.
Example
# (config authentication-forms) create form_type form_name
ok
where form_type indicates the default authentication-form, new-pin-form, or query-form and form_name is the name you give
the form.
See Also
n "# (config) security request-storage" on page 509
444 of 604
# (config) security captcha

Synopsis
Manage new and existing CAPTCHA validators.
Syntax
# (config) security captcha {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security captcha create-validator validator_name
Adds a new CAPTCHA validator.
# (config) security captcha delete-validator validator_name
Deletes an existing CAPTCHA validator.
# (config) security captcha edit-realm validator_name
Edits an existing CAPTCHA validator. Changes prompt to "# (config captcha realm_name)" on the next page.
# (config) security captcha view validator_name
Shows running system information for all CAPTCHA validators or the specified one.
Example
# (config) security captcha view captcha1
Validator name: captcha1
Captcha timeout: 300
Surrogate refresh: 900
Virtual URL: validator.cfauth.com
Disallowed characters: <None>
Captcha font: SansBold
Captcha length: 8
See Also
n "# (config captcha realm_name)" on the next page
n validate(), validate.form(), and validate.mode() in Content Policy Language Reference
445 of 604
# (config captcha realm_name)

Synopsis
Edit an existing CAPTCHA validator.
Syntax
# (config) security captcha edit realm_name
# (config captcha realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config captcha realm_name) captcha-timeout
Specifies the maximum time (in seconds) allowed for users to enter the CAPTCHA challenge response. If the user enters a
response after the time has elapsed, the form refreshes and displays a new CAPTCHA challenge image.
# (config captcha realm_name) disallowed-characters
Specifies a set of characters to exclude from CAPTCHA challenge images.
# (config captcha realm_name) font {1942 | sans-bold}
Specifies the font to use for unobfuscated text in the CAPTCHA challenge image. By default, the text is obfuscated.
# (config captcha realm_name) length number
Restricts the length of the CAPTCHA challenge to the specified number of characters. number is an integer from 4 through 16.
# (config captcha realm_name) surrogate-refresh
Specifies an interval (in seconds) after which the CAPTCHA cookie expires.
# (config captcha realm_name) view
Shows running system information for the current validator.
# (config captcha realm_name) virtual-url URL
Specifies the authentication virtual URL for the CAPTCHA validator. If one is not specified, the default validator.cfauth.com is
used.
Example
# (config captcha captcha1) font sans-bold
ok
446 of 604
See Also
n "# (config) security captcha" on page 445
n validate(), validate.form(), and validate.mode() in Content Policy Language Reference
447 of 604
# (config) security certificate

Synopsis
Create and manage certificate realms.
After an SSL session has been established, the user is asked to select the certificate to send to the ProxySG appliance. If the
certificate was signed by a Certificate Signing Authority that the ProxySG appliance trusts, including itself, then the user is
considered authenticated. The username for the user is the one extracted from the certificate during authentication.
You do not need to specify an authorization realm if:
n The policy does not make any decisions based on groups
n The policy works as desired when all certificate realm-authenticated users are not in any group
Syntax
# (config) security certificate {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security certificate create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified certificate realm.
# (config) security certificate delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified certificate realm.
# (config) security certificate edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to # (config certificate certificate_realm).
# (config) security certificate view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all certificate realms or just the configuration for realm_name if specified.
Example
# (config) security certificate create-realm certrealm
ok
See Also
n # (config certificate certificate_realm)
448 of 604
# (config certificate certificate_realm)

Synopsis
Edit the specified certificate realm.
Syntax
# (config) security certificate edit certificate_realm
# (config certificate certificate_realm)
Subcommands
# (config certificate certificate_realm) authorization ignore-user-list {add | clear | remove}
Manages the ignore-user-list, which is the list of those to ignore if they are returned as search results.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) authorization realm {none | realm-name realm_name}
Specifies the authorization realm to use. Only LDAP, XML, and local realms are valid authorization realms.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) authorization search-filter search_filter
Specifies the search filter that should be used during a search of the LDAP server. The filter can contain policy substitutions
including $(cs-username).
# (config certificate certificate_realm) authorization user-attribute {fqdn | LDAP_attribute_name}
Specifies the user-attribute (fully qualified domain name or an LDAP attribute name) to be used during a search of the LDAP
server.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) authorization username {determine-by-search | use-full-

username | username_for_authorization}
Specifies the way a username should be determined. The default is the attribute cn, which specifies the user’s relative name.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) cookie {persistent {enable | disable} | verify-ip {enable |

disable}
Specifies whether to enable persistent or session cookies, and whether to verify the IP address of the cookie.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) display-name display_name
Specifies the display name for this realm.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) extended-key-usage {add | clear | remove}
Adds and removes extended key usage OIDs and clear the OID list.
449 of 604
# (config certificate certificate_realm) exit
Returns to the "# (config) security certificate" on page 448 prompt.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) identification full-username full_username
Configures the syntax to extract the full username.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) identification username username
Configures the syntax to extract the username.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) inactivity-timeout seconds
Specifies the amount of time a session can be inactive before being logged out.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) refresh-time {authorization-refresh seconds | surrogate-

refresh seconds}
Sets the refresh time for authorization and surrogates.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) rename new_realm_name
Renames this realm to new_realm_name.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) view
Displays this realm’s configuration.
# (config certificate certificate_realm) virtual-url url
Specifies the virtual URL to use for this realm. If no URL is specified the global transparent proxy virtual URL is used.
Example
# (config) security certificate edit-realm testcert
# (config certificate testcert) refresh-time surrogate-refresh 800
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security certificate" on page 448
n "# (config) security ldap" on page 473
n "# (config) security local" on page 481
n "# (config local realm_name)" on page 482
n "# (config) security xml" on page 533
450 of 604
# (config) security coreid

Synopsis
Create and manage COREid realms. Within the COREid Access System, BCAAA acts as a custom AccessGate. It
communicates with the COREid Access Servers to authenticate the user and to obtain a COREid session token, authorization
actions, and group membership information.
Syntax
# (config) security coreid {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security coreid create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified COREid realm
# (config) security coreid delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified COREid realm.
# (config) security coreid edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes prompt to "# (config coreid realm_name) " on the next page.
# (config) security coreid view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all COREid realms or just the configuration for realm_name if specified.
Example
# (config) security coreid create-realm coreid1
ok
See Also
n "# (config coreid realm_name) " on the next page
451 of 604
# (config coreid realm_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified COREid realm.
Syntax
# (config) security coreid edit-realm realm_name
# (config coreid realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config coreid realm_name) access-server-hostname hostname
The hostname of the primary Access Server.
# (config coreid realm_name) access-server-id id
The ID of the primary Access Server.
# (config coreid realm_name) access-server-port port
The port of the primary Access Server
# (config coreid realm_name) add-header-responses {disable | enable}
When enabled, authorization actions from the policy domain obtained during authentication are added to each request
forwarded by the ProxySG appliance. Note that header responses replaces any existing header of the same name; if no such
header exists, the header is added. Cookie responses replace a cookie header with the same cookie name; if no such cookie
header exists, one is added.
# (config coreid realm_name) alternate-agent accessgate-id name
The ID of the alternate AccessGate agent.
# (config coreid realm_name) alternate-agent encrypted-secret encrypted_shared_secret
The encrypted password associated with the alternate AccessGate. (Passwords can be up to 64 characters long and are
always case sensitive.) The primary use of the encrypted-secret command is to allow the ProxySG appliance to reload a
password that it encrypted. If you choose to use a third-party encryption application, be sure it supports ..RSA encryption,
OAEP padding, and is Base64 encoded with no newlines.
# (config coreid realm_name) alternate-agent host hostname
The hostname or the IP address of the alternate system that contains the agent.
# (config coreid realm_name) alternate-agent port port
452 of 604
The port where the alternate agent listens.
# (config coreid realm_name) alternate-agent secret shared_secret
The password associated with the alternate AccessGate. (Passwords can be up to 64 characters long and are always case-
sensitive.)
# (config coreid realm_name) always-redirect-offbox {disable | enable}
Forces authentication challenges to always be redirected to an off-box URL.
# (config coreid realm_name) case-sensitive {disable | enable}
Specifies whether the username and group comparisons on the ProxySG appliance should be case-sensitive.
# (config coreid realm_name) certificate-path certificate_path
If Cert mode is used, the location on the BCAAA host machine where the key, server and CA chain certificates reside. The
certificate files must be named aaa_key.pem, aaa_cert.pem and aaa_chain.pem respectively.
# (config coreid realm_name) cookie {persistent {{disable | enable} | verify-ip {disable | enable}}
# (config coreid realm_name) display-name display_name
Equivalent to the display-name option in the CPL authenticate() action. The default value for the display name is the realm
name. The display name cannot be longer than 128 characters and it cannot be null.
# (config coreid realm_name) encrypted-transport-pass-phrase encrypted_pass_phrase
If Simple or Cert mode is used, the Transport encrypted passphrase configured in the Access System.
#(config coreid realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security coreid" on page 451 prompt.
# (config coreid realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config coreid realm_name) log-out {challenge {disable | enable} | display-time seconds}
Allows you to challenge the user after log out and define the log out page display time.
# (config coreid realm_name) no {alternate-agent | certificate-path}
Removes the alternate agent configuration or the certificate path.
# (config coreid realm_name) primary-agent accessgate-id name
The ID of the primary AccessGate agent.
453 of 604
# (config coreid realm_name) primary-agent encrypted-secret encrypted_shared_secret
The encrypted password associated with the primary AccessGate. (Passwords can be up to 64 characters long and are
always case sensitive.) The primary use of the encrypted-secret command is to allow the ProxySG appliance to reload a
password that it encrypted. If you choose to use a third-party encryption application, be sure it supports RSA encryption,
OAEP padding, and is Base64 encoded with no new line.
# (config coreid realm_name) primary-agent host hostname
The hostname or the IP address of the primary system that contains the agent.
# (config coreid realm_name) primary-agent port port
The port where the primary agent listens.
# (config coreid realm_name) primary-agent secret shared_secret
The password associated with the primary AccessGate. (Passwords can be up to 64 characters long and are always case-
sensitive.)
# (config coreid realm_name) protected-resource-name resource_name
Specifies the resource name defined in the Access System policy domain.
# (config coreid realm_name) refresh-time {credential-refresh seconds | rejected-credentials-refresh

seconds | surrogate-refresh seconds}
Sets the refresh time for credential, rejected credentials cache, and surrogates.
# (config coreid realm_name) rename new_realm_name
Renames the realm to your request.
# (config coreid realm_name) security-mode {cert | open | simple}
The Security Transport Mode for the AccessGate to use when communicating with the Access System
# (config coreid realm_name) ssl {disable | enable}
Enable or disable SSL.
# (config coreid realm_name) ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile_name
Specifies the device profile to use.
# (config coreid realm_name) timeout seconds
The length of time to elapse before timeout if a response from BCAAA is not received.
# (config coreid realm_name) transport-pass-phrase pass_phrase
If Simple or Cert mode is used, the Transport passphrase configured in the Access System.
# (config coreid realm_name) validate-client-IP {disable | enable}
454 of 604
Enables validation of the client IP address in SSO cookies. If the client IP address in the SSO cookie can be valid yet different
from the current request client IP address due to downstream proxies or other devices, then disable client IP address
validation. The WebGates participating in SSO with the ProxySG appliance should also be modified. The WebGateStatic.lst
file should be modified to either set the ipvalidation parameter to false or to add the downstream proxy/device to the
IPValidationExceptions lists.
# (config coreid realm_name) view
Displays the realm configuration.
# (config coreid realm_name) virtual-url url
The URL to redirect to when the user needs to be challenged for credentials. If the ProxySG appliance is participating in SSO,
the virtual hostname must be in the same cookie domain as the other servers participating in the SSO. It cannot be an IP
address or the default.
Example
# (config) security coreid edit-realm coreid_1
# (config coreid coreid_1) access-server-hostname AccessServer_1
# (config coreid coreid_1) refresh-time surrogate-refresh 800
See Also
n "# (config) security coreid" on page 451
455 of 604
# (config) security default-authenticate-mode

Synopsis
Sets the default authenticate.mode to auto or to sg2.
Syntax
# (config) security default-authenticate-mode {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security default-authenticate-mode auto
Enables the access control list.
# (config) security default-authenticate-mode sg2
Disables the access control list.
Example
# (config) security default-authenticate-mode sg2
ok
456 of 604
# (config) security enable-password

Synopsis
Sets the console enable password to the specified password
Syntax
# (config) security enable-password {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security enable-password [password]
Password required to enter enable mode from the CLI when using console credentials, the serial console, or RSA SSH. If you
do not specify the password with the command, the CLI prompts you to enter the password.
Example
# (config) security enable-password
Enter password: *****
Confirm password: *****
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security hashed-enable-password" on page 462
457 of 604
# (config) security encrypted-enable-password

Synopsis
Sets the console enable password to the encrypted password specified.
Syntax
# (config) security encrypted-enable-password {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security encrypted-enable-password encrypted_password
Sets the console enable password to the specified password.
Example
# (config) security encrypted-enable-password encrypted_password
See Also
n "# (config) security encrypted-password" on the facing page
458 of 604
# (config) security encrypted-password

Synopsis
Sets the console account password to the encrypted password specified.
Syntax
# (config) security encrypted-password {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security encrypted-password encrypted_password
Sets the console account password to the password specified.
Example
# (config) security encrypted-password encrypted_password
See Also
n "# (config) security encrypted-enable-password" on the previous page
459 of 604
# (config) security enforce-acl

Synopsis
Enables or disables the console access control list (ACL).
Syntax
# (config) security enforce-acl {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security enforce {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the access control list.
Example
# (config) security enforce disable
ok
See Also
n "# (config) alert" on page 155
460 of 604
# (config) security front-panel-pin

Synopsis
(On applicable models) Set a four-digit PIN to restrict access to the front panel of the ProxySG appliance.
Note: Symantec recommends using this command for best security.
Syntax
# (config) security front-panel-pin {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security front-panel-pin PIN
Note: To clear the PIN, specify 0000.
Example
# (config) security front-panel-pin 12345
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security hashed-front-panel-pin" on page 463
461 of 604
# (config) security hashed-enable-password

Synopsis
Set the console enable password to the specified password.
Syntax
# (config) security hashed-enable-password {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security hashed-enable-password hashed_password
Password required to enter enable mode from the CLI when using console credentials, the serial console, or SSH.
Example
# (config) security hashed-enable-password hashed_password
See Also
n "# (config) security enable-password" on page 457
462 of 604
# (config) security hashed-front-panel-pin

Synopsis
(On applicable models) Set a hashed four-digit PIN to restrict access to the front panel of the ProxySG appliance.
Note: Symantec recommends using this command for best security.
Syntax
# (config) security front-panel-pin {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security front-panel-pin hashed_PIN
Note: To clear the PIN, specify 0000.
Example
# (config) security hashed-front-panel-pin hashed_PIN
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security front-panel-pin" on page 461
463 of 604
# (config) security hashed-password

Synopsis
Sets the console password to the specified password
Syntax
# (config) security hashed-password {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security hashed-password hashed_password
Password required to enter the serial console or SSH.
Example
# (config) security hashed-password hashed_password
See Also
464 of 604
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa

Synopsis
Create and manage Integrated Windows Authentication (IWA) realms that connect to Active Directory using BCAAA.
IWA is an authentication mechanism available on Windows networks. IWA is a Microsoft-proprietary authentication suite that
allows Windows clients (running on Windows 2000 and later) to automatically choose between using Kerberos and NTLM
authentication challenge/response, as appropriate. When an IWA realm is used and a resource is requested by the client from
the ProxySG appliance, the appliance contacts the client's domain account to verify the client's identity and request an access
token. The access token is generated by the domain controller (in case of NTLM authentication) or a Kerberos server (in the
case of Kerberos authentication) and passed to (and if valid, accepted by) the ProxySG appliance. Refer to the Microsoft Web
site for detailed information about the IWA protocol.
Syntax
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified IWA realm.
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified IWA realm.
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name)" on the next page.
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all IWA realms or just the configuration for specified realm.
See Also
n "# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name)" on the next page
465 of 604
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name)

Synopsis
Configure the specified IWA-BCAAA realm.
Syntax
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa create-realm realm_name
ok
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa edit realm_name
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name)
Subcommands
Specifies the alternate server host and port.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) cookie {persistent {enable | disable} | verify-ip {enable | disable}
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) credentials-basic {enable | disable}
Disables/enables support for Basic credentials in this realm. At least one of Basic or NTLM/Kerberos credentials must be
supported.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) credentials-kerberos {enable | disable}
Disables/enables support for Kerberos credentials in this realm. If Kerberos is enabled, NTLM must also be enabled. At least
one of Basic or NTLM/Kerberos credentials must be supported.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) credentials-ntlm {enable | disable}
Disables/enables support for NTLM credentials in this realm. If NTLM is enabled, Kerberos must also be enabled. At least one
of Basic or NTLM/Kerberos credentials must be enabled.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) display-name display_name
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security iwa-bcaaa" on the previous page.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
466 of 604
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) log-out {challenge {enable | disable} | display-time seconds}
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) no alternate-server
Clears the alternate-server.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) primary-server host [port]
Specifies the primary server host and port.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) refresh-time {credential-refresh seconds | rejected-credentials-

refresh seconds | surrogate-refresh seconds}
Sets the refresh time for credential, rejected credentials cache time, and surrogates.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) rename new_realm_name
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) routing-domain domain_name
Associates the realm with the specified routing domain.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) server-authentication {none | origin | proxy}
Enables/disables the forwarding of BASIC credentials of the authenticated user to the origin content server or for proxy
authentication. Flush the entries for a realm if the server- authentication value is changed to ensure that the server-
authentication value is immediately applied.
You can only choose one server-authentication method:
n If set to origin, BASIC credentials are forwarded to an upstream server.
n If set to proxy, BASIC credentials are forwarded to an upstream proxy.
n If set to none, forwarding BASIC credentials is disabled.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) ssl {disable | enable}
Disables/enables SSL communication between the ProxySG appliance and BCAAA.
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile_name
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) test-authentication windows_domain_name\\username password
Tests the IWA configuration to ensure that you can successfully authenticate a user in your Active Directory.
#(config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) timeout seconds
Specifies the IWA request timeout.
467 of 604
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) view
# (config iwa-bcaaa realm_name) virtual-url url
Example
# (config) security iwa-bcaaa edit-realm testIWA
# (config iwa-bcaaa testIWA) no alternate server
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security iwa-bcaaa" on page 465
468 of 604
# (config) security iwa-direct

Synopsis
Create and manage Integrated Windows Authentication (IWA) realms that allow the ProxySG appliance to connect directly to
Active Directory.
IWA is a Microsoft-proprietary authentication suite that allows Windows clients (running on Windows 2000 and higher) to
automatically choose between using Kerberos and NTLM authentication challenge/response, as appropriate. When an IWA
realm is used and a resource is requested by the client from the ProxySG appliance, the appliance contacts the client's domain
account to verify the client's identity and request an access token. The access token is generated by the domain controller (in
case of NTLM authentication) or a Kerberos server (in the case of Kerberos authentication) and passed to (and if valid,
accepted by) the ProxySG appliance.
Refer to the Microsoft support site for detailed information about the IWA protocol.
Syntax
# (config) security iwa-direct {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security iwa-direct create-realm realm_name windows_domain_name
Creates the specified IWA realm.
# (config) security iwa-direct delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified IWA realm.
# (config) security iwa-direct edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config iwa-direct realm_name)" on the next page.
# (config) security iwa-direct view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all IWA realms or just the configuration for the specified realm_name.
See Also
n "# (config iwa-direct realm_name)" on the next page
469 of 604
# (config iwa-direct realm_name)

Synopsis
Configure the specified IWA-Direct realm.
Syntax
# (config) security iwa-direct create-realm realm_name
ok
# (config) security iwa-direct edit realm_name
# (config iwa-direct realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) authorization {realm-name LDAP_realm | self}
Authorize with the specified LDAP realm or with the current IWA-Direct realm. By default, IWA Direct is used for authorization.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) cookie {persistent {enable | disable} | verify-ip {enable | disable}
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) credentials-basic {enable | disable}
Disables/enables support for Basic credentials in this realm. At least one of Basic or NTLM/Kerberos credentials must be
supported.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) credentials-kerberos {enable | disable}
Disables/enables support for Kerberos credentials in this realm. If Kerberos is enabled, NTLM must also be enabled. At least
one of Basic or NTLM/Kerberos credentials must be supported.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) credentials-ntlm {enable | disable}
Disables/enables support for NTLM credentials in this realm. If NTLM is enabled, Kerberos must also be enabled. At least one
of Basic or NTLM/Kerberos credentials must be enabled.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) display-name display_name
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) email-address {enable | disable}
Enable reporting on the user's email address. Use in conjunction with the email-attribute subcommand.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) email-attribute attribute_name
470 of 604
Specifies the attribute that represents the user's email address. Enable retrieval of this attribute with the email-address enable
subcommand.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security iwa-direct" on page 469.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) kerberos-user username password
Set the Kerberos User information needed for a load-balancing configuration
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) log-out {challenge {enable | disable} | display-time seconds}
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) no kerberos-user
Clears the kerberos-user configuration.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) refresh-time {credential-refresh seconds | rejected-credentials-

refresh seconds | surrogate-refresh seconds}
Sets the refresh time for credential, rejected credentials cache time, and surrogates.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) rename new_realm_name
Renames this realm to the specified new_realm_name.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) server-authentication {none | origin | proxy}
authentication. Flush the entries for a realm if the server-authentication value is changed to ensure that the server-
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) suppress-ntlm-challenges {enable | disable}
When enabled, suppress NTLM challenges and send only Negotiate challenges for NTLM and Kerberos; NTLM responses are
still accepted. When disabled, do not suppress NTLM challenges.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) test-authentication-show-all windows_domain_name\\username password
471 of 604
Tests the IWA configuration to ensure that you can successfully authenticate a user in your Active Directory. This submode
displays all user groups.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) test-authentication windows_domain_name\\username password
Tests the IWA configuration to ensure that you can successfully authenticate a user in your Active Directory. This submode
truncates the display results to 20 user groups.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) timeout seconds
Specifies the IWA request timeout.
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) view
# (config iwa-direct realm_name) virtual-url url
Example
# (config) security iwa-direct edit-realm MyRealm
# (config iwa-direct MyRealm) virtual-url http://myproxy
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security iwa-direct" on page 469
472 of 604
# (config) security ldap

Synopsis
Configure and manage LDAP realms.
Symantec supports both LDAP v2 and LDAP v3, but recommends LDAP v3 because it uses Transport Layer Security (TLS)
and SSL to provide a secure connection between the appliance and the LDAP server.
An LDAP directory, either version 2 or version 3, consists of a simple tree hierarchy. An LDAP directory might span multiple
LDAP servers. In LDAP v3, servers can return referrals to others servers back to the client, allowing the client to follow those
referrals if desired. Directory services simplify administration; any additions or changes made once to the information in the
directory are immediately available to all users and directory-enabled applications, devices, and ProxySG appliances.
The ProxySG appliance supports the use of external LDAP database servers to authenticate and authorize users on a per-
group or per-attribute basis.
LDAP group-based authentication for the ProxySG appliance can be configured to support any LDAP-compliant directory
including:
n Microsoft Active Directory Server
n Novell NDS/eDirectory Server
n Netscape/Sun iPlanet Directory Server
n Other
Syntax
# (config) security ldap {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security ldap create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified LDAP realm.
# (config) security ldap delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified LDAP realm.
# (config) security ldap edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config ldap realm_name)" on page 475.
# (config) security ldap view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all LDAP realms or just the configuration for the specified realm_name.
473 of 604
See Also
n "# (config ldap realm_name)" on the facing page
474 of 604
# (config ldap realm_name)

Synopsis
Configure the specified LDAP realm.
Syntax
# (config) security ldap create-realm realm_name
ok
# (config) security ldap edit realm_name
# (config ldap realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config ldap realm_name) alternate-server host [port]
# (config ldap realm_name) case-sensitive {disable | enable}
Specifies whether or not the LDAP server is case-sensitive.
# (config ldap realm_name) cookie {persistent {disable | enable} | verify-ip {disable | enable}
# (config ldap realm_name) default-group-name default_group_name
If the validate-authorized-user command is disabled and a default-group-name is configured, the default-group-name is used as
the group name for non-existent users.
# (config ldap realm_name) display-name display_name
# (config ldap realm_name) distinguished-name user-attribute-type user_attribute_type
Specifies the attribute type that defines the relative user name.
# (config ldap realm_name) distinguished-name base-dn {add | demote | promote | remove} {base_dn |
clear}
Adds/demotes/promotes/removes a base DN from the base DN list, or clears the base DN list.
# (config ldap realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security ldap" on page 473.
475 of 604
# (config ldap realm_name) group-compare {local | server}
Specifies the method of LDAP group comparisons.
# (config ldap realm_name) group-search-constraint ldap_filter_expression
Adds an LDAP filter constraint to group searches.
# (config ldap realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config ldap realm_name) log-out {challenge {disable | enable} | display-time seconds}
# (config ldap realm_name) lookup-group simple_group_name
Allows you to look up the common name of a group in your LDAP tree. For example, looking up the group finance might return a
value such as cn=finance,ou=headquarters,o=acme.
# (config ldap realm_name) lookup-user simple_user_name
Allows you to look up the common name of a user in your LDAP tree. Note that this command will return all matching entries.
For example, looking up the user jdoe might return a values such as cn=jdoe,ou=headquarters,o=acme and CN=jdoe,o=acme.
# (config ldap realm_name) membership-attribute attribute_name
Specifies the attribute that defines group membership.
# (config ldap realm_name) membership-type {group | user}
Specifies the membership type. Specify group if user memberships are specified in groups. Specify user if memberships are
specified in users.
# (config ldap realm_name) membership-username (full | relative)
Specifies the username type to use during membership lookups. The full option specifies that the user's FQDN is used during
membership lookups, and relative option specifies that the user's relative username is used during membership lookups. Only
one can be selected at a time.
# (config ldap realm_name) nested-group-attribute attribute_name
Specifies the attribute that defines nested group membership. For other, ad, and nds, the default attribute name is member. For
iPlanet, the default attribute name is uniqueMember.
# (config ldap realm_name) no {alternate-server | default-group-name | no membership-attribute | no

nested-group-attribute | group-search-constraint}
Clears the attribute values.
# (config ldap realm_name) objectclass container {add | remove} {container_objectclass | clear}
476 of 604
Adds/removes container objectclass values from the list (these values are used during VPM searches of the LDAP realm), or
clears all values from the container objectclass list.
# (config ldap realm_name) objectclass group {add | remove} {group_objectclass | clear}
Adds/removes group objectclass values from the list (these values are used during VPM searches of the LDAP realm), or
clears all values from the group objectclass list.
# (config ldap realm_name) objectclass user {add | remove} {user_objectclass | clear}
Adds/removes user objectclass values from the list (these values are used during VPM searches of the LDAP realm), or clears
all values from the user objectclass list.
# (config ldap realm_name) primary-server host [port]
# (config ldap realm_name) protocol-version {2 | 3}
Specifies the LDAP version to use. SSL and referral processing are not available in LDAP v2.
# (config ldap realm_name) referrals-follow {disable | enable}
Disables/enables referral processing. This is available in LDAP v3 only.
# (config ldap realm_name) refresh-time {authorization-refresh seconds | credential-refresh seconds |

rejected-credentials-refresh seconds | surrogate-refresh seconds}
Sets the refresh time for authorization, credential, rejected credentials cache, and surrogates.
# (config ldap realm_name) rename new_realm_name
# (config ldap realm_name) routing-domain domain_name
Associates the realm with the specified routing domain.
# (config ldap realm_name) search anonymous {disable | enable}
Disables/enables anonymous searches.
# (config ldap realm_name) search dereference {always | finding | never | searching}
Specifies the dereference level. Specify always to always dereference aliases. Specify finding to dereference aliases only
while locating the base of the search. Specify searching to dereference aliases only after locating the base of the search.
Specify never to never dereference aliases.
# (config ldap realm_name) search encrypted-password encrypted_password
Specifies the password to bind with during searches in encrypted format.
# (config ldap realm_name) search password password
477 of 604
Specifies the password to bind with during searches.
# (config ldap realm_name) search user-dn user_dn
Specifies the user DN to bind with during searches.
# (config ldap realm_name) server-authentication {none | origin | proxy}
# (config ldap realm_name) server-type {ad | iplanet | nds | other}
Specifies the LDAP server type for this realm.
# (config ldap realm_name) ssl {disable | enable}
Disables/enables SSL communication between the ProxySG appliance and the LDAP server. This is only available in LDAP
v3.
# (config ldap realm_name) ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile_name
# (config ldap realm_name) support-nested-groups {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the nested group feature.
# (config ldap realm_name) test-authentication username password
Tests the LDAP configuration to ensure that the ProxySG appliance can successfully authenticate a user in your LDAP realm
using the username and password you provide.
# (config ldap realm_name) timeout seconds
Specifies the LDAP server’s timeout.
# (config ldap realm_name) validate-authorized-user {enable | disable}
When this command is enabled, an authorization (not authentication) request verifies that the user exists in the LDAP server. If
the user does not exist, the authorization request fails (authentication requests always require the user to exist).
478 of 604
When this command is disabled, no user existence check is made for an authorization request. If the user does not exist, the
authorization request succeeds.
# (config ldap realm_name) view
# (config ldap realm_name) virtual-url url
Example
# (config) security ldap edit-realm testldap
# (config ldap testldap) server-type iplanet
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security ldap" on page 473
479 of 604
# (config) security legacy-relative-usernames

Synopsis
Enable or disable the use of legacy relative usernames.
Syntax
# (config) security legacy-relative-usernames {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security legacy-relative-usernames {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the use of legacy relative usernames.
Example
# (config) security legacy-relative-usernames disable
ok
480 of 604
# (config) security local

Synopsis
Allows you to configure and manage local realms.
Using a Local realm is appropriate when the network topography does not include external authentication or when you want to
add users and administrators to be used by the ProxySG appliance only.
The Local realm (you can create up to 40) uses a Local User List, a collection of users and groups stored locally on the
ProxySG appliance. You can create up to 50 different Local User Lists. Multiple Local realms can reference the same list at the
same time, although each realm can only reference one list at a time. The default list used by the realm can be changed at any
time.
Syntax
# (config) security local {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security local create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified local realm.
# (config) security local delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified local realm.
# (config) security local edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config local realm_name)" on the next page.
# (config) security local view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all local realms or just the configuration for the specified realm_name.
See Also
n "# (config local realm_name)" on the next page
481 of 604
# (config local realm_name)

Synopsis
Configure the specified local realm.
Syntax
# (config) security local create-realm realm_name
ok
# (config) security local edit realm_name
# (config local realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config local realm_name) cookie {persistent {enable | disable} | verify-ip {enable | disable}
# (config local realm_name) default-group-name default_group_name
If the validate-authorized-user command is disabled and a default-group-name is configured, the default-group-name is used as
the group name for non-existent users.
# (config local realm_name) display-name display_name
# (config local realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security local" on the previous page.
# (config local realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
.# (config local realm_name) log-out {challenge {enable | disable} | display-time seconds}
Configures the log-out behavior.
# (config local realm_name) local-user-list local_user_list_name
Specifies the local user list to for this realm.
# (config local realm_name) no default-group-name
Clears the default group name.
# (config local realm_name) refresh-time {authorization-refresh seconds | surrogate-refresh seconds}
482 of 604
# (config local realm_name) rename new_realm_name
Renames this realm to new_realm_name
# (config local realm_name) server-authentication {none | origin | proxy}
# (config local realm_name) validate-authorized-user {disable | enable}
When validate-authorized-user is enabled, an authorization (not authentication) request verifies that the user exists in the local
user list. If the user does not exist in the list, the authorization request fails (authentication requests always require the user to
exist).
When validate-authorized-user is disabled, no user existence check is made for an authorization request. If the user does not
exist, the authorization request succeeds.
# (config local realm_name) view
Displays this realm’s configuration
# (config local realm_name) virtual-url url
Example
# (config) security local edit-realm testlocal
# (config local testlocal) server-authentication proxy
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security local-user-list" on the next page
483 of 604
# (config) security local-user-list

Synopsis
Use this command in conjunction with local realms.
Syntax
# (config) security local-user-list {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security local-user-list clear [force]
Clears all local user lists. Lists referenced by local realms and the default local user list are recreated but empty. Specify force
to clear realms without a prompt for confirmation.
# (config) security local-user-list create local_user_list
Creates ta local user list with the name specified.
# (config) security local-user-list default append-to-default {disable | enable}
Disables/enables appending uploaded users to the default local user list.
# (config) security local-user-list default list local_user_list
Specifies the default local user list. The default list is populated during password file uploads. The default list is also the default
list used by local realms when they are created
# (config) security local-user-list delete local_user_list [force]
Deletes the specified local user list. The default list and any lists used by local realms cannot be deleted. Specify force to
delete the list without a prompt for confirmation.
# (config) security local-user-list edit local_user_list
Changes the prompt to "# (config) security local-user-list" above.
# (config) security local-user-list exit
Example
# (config) security local-user-list default append-to-default enable
ok
484 of 604
See Also
n "# (config) security local-user-list" on the previous page
485 of 604
# (config local-user-list local_user_list)

Synopsis
Edits the specified local user list.
Syntax
# (config) security local-user-list edit local_user_list
# (config security local-user-list local_user_list)
Subcommands
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) disable-all
Disables all user accounts in the specified list.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) enable-all
Enables all user accounts in the specified list.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) exit
Returns to "# (config) security local-user-list" on page 484 mode.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) group clear
Clears all groups from the list. The users remain but do not belong to any groups.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) group create group_name
Creates the specified group in the local user list.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) group delete group_name [force]
Deletes the specified group in the local user list.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) lockout-duration seconds
The length of time a user account is locked out after too many failed password attempts. The default is 3600.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) max-failed-attempts attempts
Number of failed attempts to login to an ProxySG appliance before the user account is locked. The default is 60 attempts.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) no [lockout-duration | max-failed-attempts | reset-

interval]
Disables the settings for this user list.
486 of 604
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) reset-interval seconds
Length of seconds to wait after the last failed attempt before resetting the failed counter to zero.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) user clear
Clears all users from the list. The groups remain but do not have any users.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) user create user_name
Creates the specified user in the local user list.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) user delete user_name [force]
Deletes the specified user in the local user list.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) user edit user_name
Edits the specified user in the local user list. Changes the prompt to "# (config local-user-list user local_user_name)" on the
next page.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) view
Displays all users and groups in the local user list.
Example
# (config) security local-user-list edit testlul
#(config local-user-list testlul) user create testuser
ok
# (config local-user-list testlul) user edit testuser
# (config local-user-list testlul testuser) enable
ok
See Also
487 of 604
# (config local-user-list user local_user_name)

Synopsis
Edits the specified user in the local user list.
Syntax
# (config local-user-list local_user_list) user edit user_name
#(config local-user-list local_user_list user_name)
Subcommands
# (config local-user-list local_user_list user_name) {disable | enable}
Disables/enables the user account.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list user_name) exit
Returns to "# (config local-user-list local_user_list)" on page 486 mode.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list user_name) group {add | remove} group_name
Adds/removes the specified group from the user.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list user_name) hashed-password hashed_password
Specifies the user’s password in hashed format.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list user_name) password password
Specifies the user’s password.
# (config local-user-list local_user_list user_name) view
Displays information about the specified user account.
Example
See the example in "# (config local-user-list local_user_list)" on page 486.
See Also
n "# (config local-user-list local_user_list)" on page 486
488 of 604
# (config) security management

Synopsis
Manage the automatic logging out of a user and sets the name of realm in the Management Console challenge.
Syntax
# (config) security management {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security management cli-timeout minutes
Specifies the length of an administrative CLI session before the administrator is required to re-enter credentials. The default is
15 minutes (900 seconds). Acceptable values are between 1 and 1440 minutes (60 seconds to 86400 seconds).
# (config) security management display-realm realm_name
Specifies the realm to display in the Management Console challenge. The default value is the IP address of the ProxySG
appliance.
# (config) security management no cli-timeout
Disables the automatic session logout for CLI sessions.
# (config) security management no display-realm
Disables the specified web interface realm displayed in the Management Console challenge.
# (config) security management no web-timeout
Disables the automatic session logout for Management Console sessions.
# (config) security management web-timeout minutes
Specifies the length of an administrative Management Console session before the administrator is required to re-enter
credentials. The default is 15 minutes (900 seconds). Accepted values are between 1 and 1440 minutes (60 seconds to 86400
seconds).
Example
# (config) security management web-timeout 20
ok
489 of 604
# (config) security novell-sso

Synopsis
Configure and manage Novell SSO realms.
Syntax
# (config) security novell-sso {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security novell-sso create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified Novell SSO realm.
# (config) security novell-sso delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified Novell SSO realm.
# (config) security novell-sso edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes prompt to "# (config security novell-sso realm_name)" on the facing page
# (config) security novell-sso view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all Novell SSO realms or of the specified realm.
See Also
n "# (config security novell-sso realm_name)" on the facing page
490 of 604
# (config security novell-sso realm_name)

Synopsis
Configures the specified Novell SSO realm.
Syntax
# (config) security novell-sso edit-realm realm_name
# (config novell-sso realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config novell-sso realm_name) alternate-agent {host hostname | port port_number}
Specifies the alternate agent hostname and port number.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) alternate-agent private-key-password [private_key_password]
Sets the alternate private key password. Entering the command without a password opens the password prompt followed by a
confirmation prompt.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) alternate-agent public-certificate-password [public_certificate_

password]
Sets the alternate public certificate password. Entering the command without a password opens the password prompt followed
by a confirmation prompt.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) alternate-agent encrypted-private-key-password [private_key_password]
Sets the alternate private key password. Entering the command without a password opens the password prompt followed by a
confirmation prompt.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) alternate-agent encrypted-public-certificate-password [public_

certificate_password]
Sets the alternate public certificate password. Entering the command without a password opens the password prompt followed
by a confirmation prompt.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) authorization {realm-name authorization_realm_name | username

username | no {authorization-realm-name | username} | self}
Specifies the realm name, which can be self, and username for authorization. No clears the realm and username.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) cookie {persistent {disable | enable} | verify-ip {disable | enable}}
491 of 604
# (config novell-sso realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security novell-sso" on page 490 mode.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) full-search {day-of-week | time-of-day}
Specifies the day of the week for full searches to occurs and the time of the day (UTC time) to search.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config novell-sso realm_name) ldap monitor-server {add LDAP_host [LDAP_port] | clear | remove LDAP_
host [LDAP_port]}
Add an LDAP host to list of servers to be monitored, clear the list, or remove a specific LDAP host from the list of servers to be
monitored.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) ldap search-realm ldap_realm
Specifies the name of the realm to search and monitor.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) ldap-name {login-time LDAP_name | network-address LDAP_name}
Specifies the name of the LDAP server for Novell directory attributes.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) no alternate-agent
Removes the alternate agent.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) primary-agent {host hostname | port port_number}
Specifies the primary agent hostname and port number.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) refresh-time {authorization-refresh seconds | surrogate-refresh

seconds}
# (config novell-sso realm_name) rename new_realm_name
Renames the current realm to new_realm_name.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) ssl {enable | disable}
Enables or disables SSL between the ProxySG and the BCAAA service.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile_name
# (config novell-sso realm_name) timeout seconds
The time allotted for each request attempt. The default is 60 seconds.
492 of 604
# (config novell-sso realm_name) test-authentication IP_address
Tests the Novell SSO and BCAAA configuration to ensure that the appliance can successfully map an IP address to a user in
your Novell Directory.
# (config novell-sso realm_name) view
# (config novell-sso realm_name) virtual-url url
See Also
n "# (config) security novell-sso" on page 490
493 of 604
# (config) security password

Synopsis
Sets the console password to the specified password
Syntax
# (config) security password {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security password [password]
Password required to enter the console. If you do not specify the password with the command, the CLI prompts you to enter
the password.
Example
# (config) security password
Enter password: *****
Confirm password: *****
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security enable-password" on page 457
494 of 604
# (config) security password-display

Synopsis
Set password display settings.
Syntax
# (config) security password-display {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security password-display {encrypted | none}
Specifies the format to display passwords in show config output. Specify encrypted to display encrypted passwords. Specify
none to display no passwords.
# (config) security password-display keyring keyring
Specifies the keyring to use for password encryption.
# (config) security password-display view
Displays the current password display settings.
Example
# (config) security password-display view
Password display mode: Encrypted
Password encryption keyring: configuration-passwords-key
495 of 604
# (config) security policy-substitution

Synopsis
A Policy Substitution realm provides a mechanism for identifying and authorizing users based on information in the request to
the ProxySG appliance. The realm uses information in the request and about the client to identify the user. The realm is
configured to construct user identity information by using policy substitutions.
The Policy Substitution realm is used typically for best-effort user discovery, mainly for logging and subsequent reporting
purposes, without the need to authenticate the user. Be aware that if you use Policy Substitution realms to provide granular
policy on a user, it might not be very secure because the information used to identify the user can be forged.
Syntax
# (config) security policy-substitution {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config) security policy-substitution create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified policy-substitution realm
# (config) security policy-substitution delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified policy-substitution realm.
# (config) security policy-substitution edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config policy-substitution realm_name)" on the facing page.
# (config) security policy-substitution view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all policy-substitution realms or of the specified realm.
See Also
n "# (config policy-substitution realm_name)" on the facing page
496 of 604
# (config policy-substitution realm_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified realm.
Syntax
# (config) security policy-substitution edit-realm realm_name
# (config policy-substitution realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) authorization-realm-name realm_name
This option is only required if you are associating an authorization realm with the Policy Substitution realm.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) cookie {persistent {disable | enable} | verify-ip {disable |

enable}}
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) exit
Leaves the windows-sso edit-realm mode.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) group-definition substitution_string
The authenticated group name for use in a policy substitution realm. This command identifies the string to be used in an HTTP
header, for use in a child proxy in proxy chain configurations. The parent proxy would look for a HTTP header string and through
policy actions, make policy decisions based on a user’s group.
This command has no impact when used in a policy substitution realm that includes an authorization realm. For more
information on Policy Substitution realms, refer to the Content Policy Language Reference.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) identification determine-usernames {by-definition

construction_rule | by-search construction_rule}
Specifies how to determine usernames.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) identification full-username construction_rule
The full username as created through policy substitutions. The construction rule is made up any of the substitutions whose
values are available at client logon, listed in “CPL Substitutions” in the Content Policy Language Reference.
497 of 604
Note: The username and full username attributes are character strings that contain policy
substitutions. When authentication is required for the transaction, these character strings are
processed by the policy substitution mechanism, using the current transaction as input. The
resulting string is stored in the user object in the transaction, and becomes the user’s identity.
To create full usernames for various uses in Policy Substitution realms, refer to the Content
Policy Language Reference.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) identification ignore-user-list {add username | clear

construction_rule | remove username}
Specifies users to ignore when determining usernames by search.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) identification realm-name LDAP_realm
Specifies the name of the LDAP search realm.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) identification search-filter search_filter
Specifies the LDAP search filter.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) identification username construction_rule
The username as created through policy substitutions. The username is only required if you are using an authorization realm.
The construction rule is made up any of the policy substitutions whose values are available at client logon, listed in “CPL
Substitutions,” in the Content Policy Language Reference.
Note: The username and full username attributes are character strings that contain policy
substitutions. When authentication is required for the transaction, these character strings are
processed by the policy substitution mechanism, using the current transaction as input. The
resulting string is stored in the user object in the transaction, and becomes the user’s identity.
To create usernames for the various uses of Policy Substitution realms, refer to the Content
Policy Language Reference.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) no authorization-realm-name
Clears the authorization realm name.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) refresh-time {authorization-refresh seconds | surrogate-

refresh seconds}
498 of 604
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) rename new_realm_name
Renames this realm to the specified name.
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) view
# (config policy-substitution realm_name) virtual-url url
Example
# (config) security policy-substitution edit-realm PS1
# (config policy-substitution PS1) authorization-realm-name LDAP1
# (config policy-substitution PS1) username $(netbios.messenger-username)
# (config policy-substitution PS1) identification full-username cn=$(netbios.messenger-
username),cn=users,dc=$(netbios.computer-domain),dc=company,dc=com
See Also
n "# (config) security policy-substitution" on page 496
499 of 604
# (config) security private-key-display

Synopsis
Configure how SSH and SSL private keys are displayed in show config output. The settings apply only to the current terminal
session.
Syntax
# (config) security private-key-display {subcommand}
Passphrase Syntax and Notes

If you do not set the passphrase for the # (config) security private-key-display aes* commands and did not set one
earlier in the current terminal session using # (config) security private-key-display passphrase, the CLI displays the
following message:
% No passphrase provided and not previously set
If this occurs, set a passphrase for the session using # (config) security private-key-display passphrase
[passphrase]
In FIPS mode, do not specify the passphrase value in subcommands. The CLI will prompt you to enter the passphrase
instead. See the "Example" on the facing page below.
Subcommands
# (config) security private-key-display aes128-cbc passphrase [passphrase]
Displays private keys, encrypted using AES128-CBC encryption, and sets the passphrase to use for encryption. The
passphrase must be at least eight characters in length.
# (config) security private-key-display aes256-cbc passphrase [passphrase]
Displays private keys, encrypted using AES256-CBC encryption, and sets the passphrase to use for encryption. The
passphrase must be at least eight characters in length.
# (config) security private-key-display none
Omits private keys in show config output.
# (config) security private-key-display passphrase [passphrase]
Sets the passphrase to use for encrypting the display of keyrings in "# show configuration" on page 102 output and # (config
ssh-client client-keys) view private output. The passphrase must be at least eight characters in length.
In addition to the # (config) security private-key-display aes* commands (described in the "Passphrase Syntax and
Notes" above section above), this passphrase is used for encrypting/decrypting imported private keys within the current
terminal session if the #(config ssh-client client-keys) inline command does not specify a passphrase.
500 of 604
# (config) security private-key-display unencrypted
Displays private keys in plaintext. Symantec recommends that you do not use this command.
Example
# (config) security private-key-display passphrase
Passphrase: ********
#(config)
501 of 604
# (config) security radius

Synopsis
RADIUS is often the protocol of choice for ISPs or enterprises with very large numbers of users. RADIUS is designed to
handle these large numbers through centralized user administration that eases the repetitive tasks of adding and deleting users
and their authentication information. RADIUS also inherently provides some protection against sniffing.
Some RADIUS servers support one-time passwords. One-time passwords are passwords that become invalid as soon as
they are used. The passwords are often generated by a token or program, although pre-printed lists are also used. Using one-
time passwords ensures that the password cannot be used in a replay attack.
The ProxySG appliance’s one-time password support works with products such as Secure Computing SafeWord synchronous
and asynchronous tokens and RSA SecurID tokens.
The ProxySG supports RADIUS servers that use challenge/response as part of the authentication process. SafeWord
asynchronous tokens use challenge/response to provide authentication. SecurID tokens use challenge/response to initialize or
change PINs.
Syntax
# (config) security radius {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config) security radius attributes
Configures RADIUS attributes. Changes the prompt to "# (config radius attributes)" on page 504.
# (config) security radius create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified RADIUS realm.
# (config) security radius create-realm-encrypted realm_name encrypted_secret primary_server_host

[primary_server_port]
Creates a RADIUS realm with an encrypted server secret.
# (config) security radius create-realm-prompt-secret realm_name primary_server_host [primary_server_

port]
Creates the specified RADIUS realm; prompts for a server secret.
# (config) security radius delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified RADIUS realm.
# (config) security radius edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config radius realm_name)" on page 506.
502 of 604
# (config) security radius view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all RADIUS realms or the specified realm.
See Also
n "# (config radius attributes)" on the next page
n "# (config radius realm_name)" on page 506
503 of 604
# (config radius attributes)

Synopsis
Configure RADIUS attributes.
Syntax
# (config) security radius attributes
# (config radius attributes)
Subcommands
# (config radius attributes) add {radius-attribute radius_type (1-255) attribute_name [integer | ipv4
| ipv6] | [[string | tag-string | octet-string | tag-octet-string] max_length (1-247)] |[[enum | tag-
enum] =string max_length (1-253) {(1-253)=string max_length (1-253)}]
Configure user-defined RADIUS attributes.
Note: To change the configuration of an existing RADIUS attribute, you must remove it from
the system and add it again with the new configuration:
1. Back up the ProxySG policy and install a new blank policy.
2. If the attribute is in use in the RADIUS session monitor, remove the attribute from the
session monitor using the # (config session-monitor attributes) remove command.
3. Remove the attribute from RADIUS configuration using the # (config radius
attributes) remove command.
4. Add the attribute with new configuration using the # (config radius attributes) add
command.
5. (If the attribute was previously in the RADIUS session monitor configuration) Restart the
appliance and then add the attribute to the session monitor using the #(config session-monitor
attributes) add command.
6. Restore the policy you backed up in step 1.
To verify the configured RADIUS attributes, issue the # (config radius attributes) view
command.
# (config radius attributes) add vendor_id vendor_type (1-255) attribute_name [integer | ipv4 | ipv6]
| [[string | tag-string | octet-string | tag-octet-string] max_length (1-247)] |[[enum | tag-enum] =
string max_length (1-253) {(1-253)=string max_length (1-253)}]
Configure vendor-specific attributes.
# (config radius attributes) exit
504 of 604
Returns to the "# (config) security radius" on page 502 prompt.
# (config radius attributes) remove attribute_name
Removes the specified RADIUS attribute.
# (config radius attributes) view
Displays the configured RADIUS attributes.
See Also
n "# (config) security radius" on page 502
505 of 604
# (config radius realm_name)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) security radius edit-realm realm_name
# (config radius realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config radius realm_name) alternate-server encrypted-secret encrypted_secret
Specifies the alternate server secret in encrypted format. Note that you must create the encrypted secret before executing the
host [port] command.
# (config radius realm_name) alternate-server host [port]
# (config radius realm_name) alternate-server secret secret
Specifies the alternate server secret. Note that you must create the secret before executing the host [port] command
# (config radius realm_name) case-sensitive {disable | enable}
Specifies whether or not the RADIUS server is case-sensitive.
# (config radius realm_name) cookie {persistent {disable | enable} | verify-ip {disable | enable}
# (config radius realm_name) display-name display_name
# (config radius realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security radius" on page 502 mode.
# (config radius realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config radius realm_name) log-out {challenge {enable | disable} | display-time seconds}
506 of 604
# (config radius realm_name) no alternate-server
Clears the alternate server.
# (config radius realm_name) one-time-passwords {enable | disable}
Allows you to use one-time passwords for authentication. The default is disabled.
# (config radius realm_name) encrypted-secret encrypted_secret
Specifies the primary server secret in encrypted format.
# (config radius realm_name) primary-server host [port]
# (config radius realm_name) primary-server secret secret
Specifies the primary server secret.
# (config radius realm_name) refresh-time {credential-refresh seconds | rejected-credentials-refresh

seconds | surrogate-refresh seconds}
Sets the refresh time for credential, rejected credentials cache, and surrogates.
# (config radius realm_name) rename new_realm_name
# (config radius realm_name) server-retry count
Specifies the number of authentication retry attempts. This is the number of attempts permitted before marking a server offline.
The client maintains an average response time from the server; the retry interval is initially twice the average. If that retry
packet fails, then the next packet waits twice as long again. This increases until it reaches the timeout value. The default
number of retries is 10.
# (config radius realm_name) server-authentication {none | origin | proxy}
# (config radius realm_name) test-authentication username password
507 of 604
Tests the RADIUS configuration to ensure that the appliance can successfully authenticate a user in your RADIUS realm. If
the test succeeds, the CLI displays a list of groups to which the user belongs.
# (config radius realm_name) timeout seconds
Specifies the RADIUS request timeout. This is the number of seconds the ProxySG appliance allows for each request attempt
before giving up on a server and trying another server. Within a timeout multiple packets can be sent to the server, in case the
network is busy and packets are lost. The default request timeout is 10 seconds.
# (config radius realm_name) server-charset charset
Allows you to select the character set you need. A character set is a MIME charset name. Any of the standard charset names
for encodings commonly supported by Web browsers can be used. The default is Unicode:UTF8.
One list of standard charset names is found at http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets.
# (config radius realm_name) view
# (config radius realm_name) virtual-url url
Example
# (config) security radius edit-realm testradius
# (config radius testradius) server-retry 8
ok
# (config radius testradius) server-authentication proxy
ok
# (config radius testradius) exit
See Also
n "# (config) security radius" on page 502
n "# (config radius attributes)" on page 504
508 of 604
# (config) security request-storage

Synopsis
When a request requiring the user to be challenged with a form contains a body, the request is stored on the ProxySG
appliance while the user is being authenticated. Storage options include:
n the maximum request size
n the expiration of the request
n whether to verify the IP address of the client requesting against the original request
n whether to allow redirects from the origin server
The storage options are global, applying to all form exceptions you use. The global allow redirects configuration option can be
overridden on a finer granularity in policy using the authenticate.redirect_stored_requests(yes|no) action.
Syntax
# (config) security request-storage {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config) security request-storage allow-redirects {disable | enable}
Specifies whether to allow redirects. The default is disable.
# (config) security request-storage expiry-time seconds
Sets the amount of time before the stored request expires. The default is 300 seconds (five minutes).
# (config) security request-storage max-size megabytes
Sets the maximum POST request size during authentication. The default is 50 megabytes.
# (config) security request-storage verify-ip {disable | enable}
Enables or disables the verify-ip option. The default is to enable the ProxySG appliance to verify the IP address against the
original request.
See Also
n "# (config) security authentication-forms" on page 443
509 of 604
# (config) security saml

Synopsis
SAML 2.0 was developed by the OASIS Security Services Technical Committee. It is an industry standard for retrieving
authorization and identity information in XML documents to facilitate single sign-on (SSO) applications or services on the
internet. In SAML authentication, the exchange of information is performed by the following entities:
n Identity providers (IDPs), which are identity stores. For example, an IDP may have a back-end directory of users.
The IDP authenticates the users. Supported IDPs are:
o Microsoft® Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) 2.0
Note: ADFS 1.0 ships with Windows Server 2008. If you want to use the SAML
realm with AD FS, you must download AD FS 2.0 from the Microsoft website and
install it.
o CA SiteMinder® R12
o Oracle® Access Management 11g
n Service providers (SPs), which provide access to applications or services to users. It is the entity against which users
authenticate. SGOS supports SAML authentication in which the ProxySG appliance acts as the SP.
Syntax
# (config) security saml {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security saml attributes
Configures SAML attributes. Changes the prompt to "# (config saml attributes)" on page 512.
# (config) security saml create-realm realm_name
Creates a realm.
# (config) security saml delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified SAML realm.
# (config) security saml edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config saml realm_name)" on page 514.
# (config) security saml view [realm_name]
510 of 604
Shows running system information for all SAML realms or the specified SAML realm.
Example
# (config) security saml view realm1
Realm name: realm1
Display name: realm1
Federated IDP entity ID:
Federated IDP POST URL:
Federated IDP Redirect URL:
Federated IDP CCL: appliance-ccl
...
See Also
n "# (config saml attributes)" on the next page
n "# (config saml attributes attribute_name)" on page 513
n "# (config saml realm_name)" on page 514
n "SAML Authentication" in SGOS Administration Guide
511 of 604
# (config saml attributes)

Synopsis
Configure SAML attributes.
Syntax
Subcommands
# (config saml attributes) add attribute_name
Adds a new SAML attribute.
# (config saml attributes) edit attribute_name
Edits the specified SAML attribute. Changes the prompt to "# (config saml attributes attribute_name)" on the facing page.
# (config saml attributes) remove attribute_name
Removes the specified SAML attribute.
# (config saml attributes) view
Displays the configured SAML attributes.
See Also
n "# (config) security saml" on page 510
n "# (config saml realm_name)" on page 514
n "# (config saml attributes attribute_name)" on the facing page
512 of 604
# (config saml attributes attribute_name)

Synopsis
blurb description
Syntax

# (config saml attributes) edit attribute_name
# (config saml attributes attribute_name)
Subcommands
# (config saml attributes attribute_name) data type {case-ignore-string | case-exact-string}
Changes the specified attribute’s data type.
# (config saml attributes attribute_name) saml-name saml_name
Changes the specified attribute’s SAML name.
See Also
n "# (config saml attributes)" on the previous page
n "# (config saml realm_name)" on the next page
513 of 604
# (config saml realm_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified SAML realm.
Syntax
# (config) security saml edit-realm realm_name
# (config saml-realm realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config saml realm_name) authorization ignore-user-list {add | clear | remove}
Adds a username to a list of users to ignore when determining authorization, clear the list, or remove a username from the list.
# (config saml realm_name) authorization realm {none | realm_name | self}
Specifies whether to not authorize with the current realm, use a different realm for authorization, or authorize with the current
realm.
# (config saml realm_name) authorization search-filter search_filter
Specifies the LDAP search filter.
# (config saml realm_name) authorization search-realm LDAP_realm
Specifies the name of the LDAP search realm.
# (config saml realm_name) authorization user-attribute { fqdn | LDAP_attribute_name}
Specifies the username attribute on the search result object— either the FQDN or the LDAP attribute name.
# (config saml realm_name) authorization username {determine-by-search | use-full-username | username}
Sets the username for authorization: Determine the username by LDAP search, use the user’s full username or FQDN, or
specify the username.
# (config saml realm_name) client-redirects {disable | enable}
Specifies if SAML redirects should be forwarded to the client.
# (config saml realm_name) cookie persistent {disable | enable}
Specifies whether to use persistent or session cookies.
# (config saml realm_name) cookie verify-ip {disable | enable}
514 of 604
Specifies whether to verify cookies’ IP addresses.
# (config saml realm_name) display-name display_name
Sets the display name of the current realm.
# (config saml realm_name) email-address-attribute attribute_name
Specifies the attribute that represents the user's email address and retrieves the value of the attribute.
Note: Map the SAML email address attribute to the relevant field on the IDP. For example, if
your IDP is Shibboleth, map the emailAddress attribute to the mail field.
# (config saml realm_name) encryption keyring keyring-name
Specifies the keyring used for decrypting assertions.
# (config saml realm_name) federated-idp {ccl ccl_name | entity-id entity_id | import-metadata URL |
slo-post-endpoint URL | sso-post-endpoint URL | sso-redirect-endpoint URL}
Configures the following settings for the IDP with which the realm is federated:
n the trusted CCL for validation of the IDP certificate
n the SAML entity ID
n the URL from which the IDP metadata is downloaded/imported; the URL is not stored, but it is used to import metadata
when the command is issued
n the federated IDP single logout POST endpoint
n the federated IDP SSO POST endpoint
n the federated IDP SSO redirect endpoint
# (config saml realm_name) group-attribute attribute_name
Specifies the name of the group membership attribute.
# (config saml realm_name) inactivity-timeout number_of_seconds
Specifies the number of seconds a session can be inactive before it is logged out.
# (config saml realm_name) inline idp-metadata XML EOF
Installs IDP metadata by entering it in XML format, followed by an end-of-file character.
# (config saml realm_name) log-out challenge {disable | enable}
515 of 604
Disables or enables challenging after logout. For example, if this setting is enabled and a user logs out of a web site, the user
must enter credentials again the next time they access the web site.
# (config saml realm_name) log-out display-time number_of_seconds
Specifies the number of seconds to display the logout page after logging out.
# (config saml realm_name) no {encryption keyring | federated-idp sso-post-endpoint | federated-idp

sso-redirect-endpoint | group-attribute | user-attribute | user-fullname-attribute}
Clears the specified parameter.
# (config saml realm_name) not-after number_of_seconds
Specifies a number of seconds after the current time, after which assertions are invalid. The default value is 20.
# (config saml realm_name) not-before number_of_seconds
Specifies a number of seconds before the current time, before which assertions are invalid. The default value is 10.
# (config saml realm_name) prefix-idp-cookies {disable | enable}
Specifies if IDP cookies should be prefixed when client redirect is disabled.
# (config saml realm_name) refresh-time { credential-refresh number_of_seconds | rejected-credential-

refresh number_of_seconds | surrogate-refresh number_of_seconds}
Configures the refresh time for authorization credentials and surrogates.
# (config saml realm_name) rename new_realm_name
Renames the current realm.
# (config saml realm_name) require-encryption {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the requirement that all incoming assertions are encrypted.
# (config saml realm_name) ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile
Specifies the SSL device profile to use for the realm
# (config saml realm_name) user-attribute attribute_name
Specifies the attribute that contains the username.
# (config saml realm_name) user-fullname-attribute attribute_name
Specifies the attribute that contains the full username.
# (config saml realm_name) view
Shows running system information for the current SAML realm.
# (config saml realm_name) virtual-host hostname
516 of 604
Specifies the hostname for the SAML endpoints.
Example
> example
# example
# (config) example
See Also
n "# (config saml attributes)" on page 512
n "# (config saml attributes attribute_name)" on page 513
n "SAML Authentication" in SGOS Administration Guide
517 of 604
# (config security sequence)

Synopsis
After a realm is configured, you can associate it with other realms to allow Symantec to search for the proper authentication
credentials for a specific user. That is, if the credentials are not acceptable to the first realm, they are sent to the second, and
so on until a match is found or all the realms are exhausted. This is called sequencing.
Syntax
# (config) security sequence {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config) security sequence create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified sequence realm
# (config) security sequence delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified sequence realm.
# (config) security sequence edit-realm realm_sequence_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config sequence realm_name)" on the facing page.
# (config) security sequence view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all sequence realms or the specified realm.
Example
# (config) security sequence edit-realm testsequence
# (config sequence testsequence) IWA-only-once disable
ok
# (config sequence testsequence) realm clear
ok
See Also
n "# (config sequence realm_name)" on the facing page
518 of 604
# (config sequence realm_name)

Synopsis
Edits the specified realm .
Syntax
# (config) security sequence edit-realm realm_sequence_name
# (config sequence realm_sequence_name)
Subcommands
# (config sequence realm_name) display-name display_name
# (config sequence realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config security sequence)" on the previous page mode.
# (config sequence realm_name) IWA-only-once {disable | enable}
Specifies whether or not to challenge for credentials for the IWA realm one or multiple times.
# (config sequence realm_name) realm {add | demote | promote | remove} {realm_name | clear}
Adds/demotes/promotes/removes a realm from the realm sequence, or clears all realms from the realm sequence.
# (config sequence realm_name) rename new_realm_name
# (config sequence realm_name) try-next-realm-on-error {disable | enable}
Specifies that the next realm on the list should be attempted if authentication in the previous realm has failed with a permitted
error. The default value is to not attempt the next realm and fall out of the sequence.
# (config sequence realm_name) view
# (config sequence realm_name) virtual-url url
Specifies the virtual URL to use for this realm sequence. If no URL is specified the global transparent proxy virtual URL is
used.
519 of 604
Example
See the example in "# (config security sequence)" on page 518.
See Also
n "# (config security sequence)" on page 518
520 of 604
# (config) security siteminder

Synopsis
Within the SiteMinder system, BCAAA acts as a custom Web agent. It communicates with the SiteMinder policy server to
authenticate the user and to obtain a SiteMinder session token, response attribute information, and group membership
information.
Custom header and cookie response attributes associated with OnAuthAccept and OnAccessAccept attributes are obtained
from the policy server and forwarded to the ProxySG appliance. They can (as an option) be included in requests forwarded by
the appliance.
Within the ProxySG appliance, BCAAA acts as its agent to communicate with the SiteMinder server. The ProxySG appliance
provides the user information to be validated to BCAAA, and receives the session token and other information from BCAAA.
Each SiteMinder realm used causes the creation of a BCAAA process on the Windows host computer running BCAAA. A
single host computer can support multiple realms (from the same or different ProxySG appliances); the number depends on the
capacity of the BCAAA host computer and the amount of activity in the realms.
Note: Each (active) SiteMinder realm on the ProxySG appliance should reference a different
agent on the Policy Server.
Configuration of the ProxySG appliance’s realm must be coordinated with configuration of the SiteMinder policy server. Each
must be configured to be aware of the other. In addition, certain SiteMinder responses must be configured so that BCAAA gets
the information the ProxySG appliance needs.
Syntax
# (config) security siteminder {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security siteminder create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified SiteMinder realm
# (config) security siteminder delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified SiteMinder realm.
# (config) security siteminder edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm.
# (config) security siteminder view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of all SiteMinder realms or the specified realm.
521 of 604
# (config) security top-level-domains

Synopsis
To ensure the proper handling of authentication cookies for top-level domains, a public database (the Public Suffix List) was
created. The ProxySG appliance maintains an internal suffix list for the same purpose. Because there may be instances when
the internal list does not properly handle or include new suffixes, a new feature was added to allow administrators to manually
add top-level domains.
Syntax
# (config) security top-level-domains {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security top-level-domains add-domain domain_name
Adds a top-level domain.
# (config) security top-level-domains delete-domain domain_name
Delete the specified top-level domain.
# (config) security top-level-domains view
Displays the list of user-added top-level domains.
Example
# (config) security top-level-domains add-domain domain1
ok
522 of 604
# (config) security transparent-proxy-auth

Synopsis
Configure authentication method for transparent proxies.
Syntax
# (config) security transparent-proxy-auth method {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security transparent-proxy-auth method {ip | cookie}
Specifies whether to use IP or cookie surrogate credentials.
# (config) security transparent-proxy-auth meta-refresh {enable | disable}
Enables or disables meta-refresh style redirects with Internet Explorer. Some browsers have a hard-coded limit on the number
of server redirects that they follow for a given request. For example, if you are browsing a website that performs several
redirects, the redirects added by the ProxySG appliance authentication subsystem can exceed the browser’s limit. The end
result is that the browser will refuse to load the webpage, because it will not follow all of the redirects. You can use the
security transparent-proxy-auth meta-refresh enable command to allow the ProxySG appliance to perform redirects
for authentication without exceeding the browser’s limit. When this CLI setting is enabled, the ProxySG appliance redirects the
browser by sending an HTTP 200 response with a meta-refresh header, rather than by sending an HTTP 302 or 307 response.
Example
# (config) security transparent-proxy-auth method cookie
ok
523 of 604
# (config security windows-domains)

Synopsis
Configure a Windows domain for features that require the appliance to join a domain, such as encrypted MAPI and IWA Direct.
Before creating domains, you must create a hostname for the ProxySG appliance; the hostname must be unique within your
Active Directory.
Syntax
# (config) security windows-domains {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config security windows-domains) create domain_name_alias
Creates a domain with the specified name.
# (config security windows-domains) delete domain_name_alias
Deletes the specified domain.
# (config security windows-domains) edit domain_name_alias
Edits the specified domain's SNMP trap settings. Changes the prompt to "# (config security windows-domains domain_name_
alias)" on page 526.
# (config security windows-domains) group-cache [disable | enable]
Enabled by default, this setting caches the group-name-to-SID mapping for each group of interest to prevent excessive delays
during policy compilation. If your deployment has a large number of trusted domains, leave this option enabled; a delay still
exists during initial policy compilation at boot time, but not during subsequent policy compilations.
# (config security windows-domains) hostname appliance_hostname
Specify the hostname.
# (config security windows-domains) inline domain-details domain_name_alias
Specify details about the domain.
# (config security windows-domains) join domain_name_alias DNS_domain_name join_account_name [join_

account_password]
Join the specified domain.
# (config security windows-domains) join-container domain_name_alias DNS_domain_name container_DN

join_account_name [join_account_password]
Join the specified container.
524 of 604
# (config security windows-domains) leave host domain_name [join_account_name [join_account_password]
Leave the specified host.
# (config security windows-domains) ldap-ping-protocol [tcp | udp]
Specifies the protocol over which to send an LDAP ping for domain controller discovery.
# (config security windows-domains) rejoin domain_name_alias join_account_name [join_account_password]
Rejoin the specified domain.
# (config security windows-domains) site-aware [enable | disable]
Enables or disables AD site awareness. By default, the setting is enabled. If disabled, a site name will not be returned for the
domain, even if one exists.
# (config security windows-domains) smb2 [disable | enable]
Specifies whether to use the SMB2 protocol for connecting to the Active Directory server. Disable this setting if the server still
uses the SMB1 protocol.
# (config security windows-domains) view
View information about configured domains.
Example
#(config) security windows-domains
#(config security windows-domains) hostname HQ1
#(config security windows-domains) create cal
#(config security windows-domains) join cal corp.example.com administrator
testpass
See Also
n "# (config security windows-domains domain_name_alias)" on the next page
525 of 604
# (config security windows-domains domain_name_alias)

Synopsis
Configure SNMP trap settings for the specified Windows domain.
Syntax
# (config) security windows-domains edit domain_name_alias
# (config) windows-domains domain_name_alias)
Subcommands
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp auth-traps [enable | disable]
Enables or disables SNMP traps for the Windows domain.
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp avg-latency-last-minute-threshold ms
Configures Average Schannel latency last minute threshold (in milliseconds).
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp avg-latency-last-3minutes-threshold ms
Configures Average schannel latency last three minutes threshold (in milliseconds).
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) avg-latency-last-5minutes-threshold ms
Configures Average schannel latency last five minutes threshold (in milliseconds).
Configures Average schannel latency last 15 minutes threshold (in milliseconds).
Configures Average schannel latency last 60 minutes threshold (in milliseconds).
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp failed-auths-last-minute-threshold ms
Configures failed authentications last minute threshold.
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp failed-auths-last-3minutes-threshold ms
Configures failed authentications last 3 minutes threshold.
526 of 604
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp min-latency-last-minute-threshold ms
Configures minimum Schannel latency last minut e threshold (in milliseconds).
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp min-latency-last-3minutes-threshold ms
Configures minimum Schannel latency last 3 minutes threshold (in milliseconds).
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp max-latency-last-minute-threshold ms
Configures maximum Schannel latency last minute threshold (in milliseconds).
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp max-latency-last-3minutes-threshold ms
Configures maximum Schannel latency last 3 minutes threshold (in milliseconds).
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp schannel-resets
Configures the number of Schannel resets threshold.
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp schannel-timeouts
Configures the number of Schannel timeouts threshold.
527 of 604
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp schannel-waiters
Configures the number of Schannel current waiters threshold.
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) snmp view
Displays the current SNMP settings for the domain.
# (config windows-domains domain_name_alias) refresh-trusts
Refreshes the Windows Domain trusts.
Example
# (config windows-domains my_domain) snmp auth enable
ok
See Also
n "# (config security windows-domains)" on page 524
528 of 604
# (config) security windows-sso

Synopsis
In a Windows SSO realm, the client is never challenged for authentication. Instead, the BCAAA agent collects information
about the current logged on user from the domain controller and/or by querying the client machine. Then the IP address of an
incoming client request is mapped to a user identity in the domain. If authorization information is also needed, then another
realm (LDAP or local) must be created.
Syntax
> CLI {subcommand}
# (config) security windows-sso {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security windows-sso create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified Windows SSO realm.
# (config) security windows-sso edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config windows-sso realm_name)" on the next page.
# (config) security windows-sso delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified Windows SSO realm.
# (config) security windows-sso view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of the specified realm or all Windows SSO realms.
See Also
n "# (config windows-sso realm_name)" on the next page
529 of 604
# (config windows-sso realm_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified Windows SSO realm.
Syntax
# (config) security windows-sso edit-realm realm_name
# (config windows-sso realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config windows-sso realm_name) alternate-agent {host hostname | port port_number}
Specifies the alternate agent hostname and port number.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) authorization {authorization-realm-name realm_name | username

username | no {authorization-realm-name | username} | self}
Specifies or clears the realm name, which can be self, and username for authorization
# (config windows-sso realm_name) cookie {persistent {disable | enable}| verify-ip {disable | enable}}
# (config windows-sso realm_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) security windows-sso" on the previous page mode.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config windows-sso realm_name) no alternate-agent
Removes the alternate agent.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) primary-agent {host hostname | port port_number}
Specifies the primary agent hostname and port number.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) refresh-time {authorization-refresh seconds | surrogate-refresh

seconds}
# (config windows-sso realm_name) rename new_realm_name
530 of 604
Renames the current realm to the one specified.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) ssl {enable | disable}
Enables or disables SSL between the ProxySG appliance and the BCAAA service.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile_name
# (config windows-sso realm_name) sso-type {query-client | query-dc | query-dc-client}
Selects the method of querying: client, domain controller, or both. The default is domain controller.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) test-authentication IP_address
Tests the Windows SSO and BCAAA configuration to ensure that the ProxySG appliance can successfully map an IP address
to a user in your Active Directory.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) timeout seconds
The time allotted for each request attempt. The default is 60 seconds.
# (config windows-sso realm_name) view
# (config windows-sso realm_name) virtual-url url
Example
# (config windows-sso test2) ssotype query-client-dc
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security windows-sso" on page 529
531 of 604
# (config) security username

Synopsis
Sets the console username.
Syntax
# (config) security username {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security username username
Example
# (config) security username QATest
ok
532 of 604
# (config) security xml

Synopsis
An XML realm uses XML messages to request authentication and authorization information from an HTTP XML service (the
XML responder that runs on an external server). The XML realm (the XML requestor) supports both HTTP GET and HTTP
POST methods to request an XML response.
The XML messages are based on SOAP 1.2. The XML responder service accepts XML requests from the ProxySG appliance,
communicates with an authentication or authorization server, and responds with the result. When the realm is used to
authenticate users, it challenges for Basic credentials. The username and password are then sent to the XML responder to
authenticate and authorize the user.
The XML realm can place the username and password in the HTTP headers of the request or in the body of the XML POST
request. If the credentials are placed in the HTTP headers, the Web server must do the authentication and the XML service
just handles authorization. If credentials are placed in the XML request body, the XML service handles both authentication and
authorization.
Syntax
# (config) security xml {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) security xml create-realm realm_name
Creates the specified XML realm
# (config) security xml delete-realm realm_name
Deletes the specified XML realm.
# (config) security xml edit-realm realm_name
Edits the specified realm. Changes the prompt to "# (config xml realm_name)" on the next page.
# (config) security xml view [realm_name]
Displays the configuration of the specified realm or all XML realms.
See Also
n "# (config xml realm_name)" on the next page
533 of 604
# (config xml realm_name)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) security xml edit [realm_name]
# (config xml realm_name)
Subcommands
# (config xml realm_name) alternate-responder {host | port}
Specifies the alternate responder host and port.
# (config xml realm_name) alternate-responder path {authenticate authenticate_path | authorize

authorize_path}
Specifies the alternate responder path for authentication and authorization requests.
# (config xml realm_name) authorization {default-group-name group_name | username full_username |

realm {none | username | self}}
Specifies the default group name, username, and realm for authorization.
# (config xml realm_name) connections count
Specifies the number of connections to the responder.
# (config xml realm_name) cookie {persistent {enable | disable} | verify-ip {enable | disable}
# (config xml realm_name) display-name display_name
# (config xml realm_name) exit
Exits configure XML-realm mode and returns to configure mode.
# (config xml realm_name) inactivity-timeout seconds
# (config xml realm_name) log-out {challenge {enable | disable} | display-time seconds}
534 of 604
# (config xml realm_name) no alternate-responder
Removes the alternate-responder.
# (config xml realm_name) no default-group-name
Removes the default-group-name.
# (config xml realm_name) one-time-passwords {enable | disable}
Allows you to use one-time passwords for authentication. The default is disabled.
# (config xml realm_name) primary-responder {host host | port port}
Specifies the primary responder host and port.
#(config xml realm_name) primary-responder path {authenticate authenticate_path | authorize authorize_

path}
Specifies the primary responder path for authentication and authorization requests.
#(config xml realm_name) refresh-time {authorization-refresh seconds | credential-refresh seconds |

rejected-credentials-refresh seconds| surrogate-refresh seconds}
Sets the refresh time for authorization, credential, rejected credentials cache, and surrogates.
# (config xml realm_name) rename new_realm_name
# (config xml realm_name) retry count
Specifies the number of times for the system to retry a request. The default is not to retry a request.
#(config xml realm_name) server-authentication {none | origin | proxy}
#(config xml realm_name) timeout seconds
535 of 604
Specifies the XML request timeout. This is the number of seconds the ProxySG appliance allows for each request attempt
before giving up on a server and trying another server. Within a timeout multiple packets can be sent to the server, in case the
network is busy and packets are lost. The default request timeout is 10 seconds
# (config xml realm_name) view
# (config xml realm_name) virtual-url virtual_URL
# (config xml realm_name) xml {credentials {header | request} | request-interested {enable | disable}
| username username_parameter}
Specifies the user credential location and the username parameter. The username parameter is passed in the request when
this realm is used for authentication or authorization.
Example
# (config) security xml edit-realm xml14
# (config xml xml14) display-name
ok
# (config xml xml14) server-authentication origin
ok
See Also
n "# (config) security xml" on page 533
536 of 604
# (config users)
Synopsis
Manage user log ins, logouts and refresh data.
Syntax
# (config users)
Subcommands
# (config users) authorization-refresh {ip-addresses prefix [realm_name] | realms [realm_name]| users
glob_user_name [realm_name]}
Refreshes authorization data for the specified IP address, realm (or all realms), or user.
The IP address subnet notation is based on Classless Inter-Domain_Routing (CIDR):
n 1.2.3.4 : the IP address 1.2.3.4
n 1.2.3.0/24: the subnet 1.2.3.0 with netmask 255.255.255.0
The username pattern is a glob-based pattern, supporting three operators:
n '*' : match zero or more characters
n '?' : match exactly one character
n '[x-y]': match any character in the character range from 'x' to 'y'
# (config users) credentials-refresh {ip-addresses prefix [realm_name] | realms [realm_name] | users

Refreshes credential data for the specified IP address, realm (or all realms), or user.
# (config users) exit
# (config users) log-out {ip-addresses prefix [realm_name] | realms [realm_name] | users glob_user_
name [realm_name]}
Logs out the specified IP address, realm (or all realms), or user.
# (config users) surrogates-refresh {ip-addresses prefix [realm_name] | realms [realm_name] | users

537 of 604
Refreshes surrogate data for the specified IP address, realm (or all realms), or user.
# (config users) view detailed {ip-addresses prefix [realm_name] | realms [realm_name] | users glob_
user_name [realm_name]}
See a detailed view of users, sorted by IP address, realm, or username.
# (config users) view {ip-addresses prefix [realm_name] | realms [realm_name] | users glob_user_name
[realm_name]}
See all logged-in users sorted by IP address, realm, or username.
Example
# (config users) surrogates-refresh ip-addresses 10.25.36.0/24
See Also
n "# (config) security" on page 436
538 of 604
# (config) security-policy
Synopsis
Configure Security Policy service settings.
Syntax
# (config security-policy)
Subcommands
# (config security-policy) disable
Disables security policy.
# (config security-policy) download cancel
Cancels a download that is in progress.
# (config security-policy) download get-now
# (config security-policy) download get-now background
# (config security-policy) download get-now background force
Ignore any existing data (even if the database is already up-to-date) and force a fresh download of the entire database. The
download occurs in the background, and you can continue to use the CLI while download is in progress.
# (config security-policy) download get-now force
cancel the download, press and hold CTRL+C.
# (config security-policy) enable
Enables security policy.
# (config security-policy) view
Displays the current settings.
539 of 604
# (config security-policy) no download {password | profile | url | username}
Clears the specified parameter.
Example
# (config security-policy) download get-now
downloading database..
See Also
n “Configuring Threat Protection” chapter in SGOS Administration Guide
n ProxySG Security Best Practices
n ProxySG Web Visual Policy Manager Reference
540 of 604
# (config serial-console)
Synopsis
Configure the serial console.
Syntax
# (config) serial-console
# (config serial-console)
Subcommands
# (config serial-console) inline pre-authentication-terms terms EOF
Configures pre-authentication terms and conditions prompt.
# (config serial-console) no pre-authentication-terms
Disables pre-authentication terms and conditions prompt.
# (config serial-console) exit
# (config serial-console) view
Show serial console configuration.
541 of 604
# (config) show
See "# show" on page 97.
# (config ssh-client)
Synopsis
Configure ciphers, client keys, HMACs, and known hosts for outbound SSH connections. Also, view all SSH client
information.
Syntax
# (config) ssh-client
Subcommands
# (config ssh-client) ciphers
Manage SSH client ciphers. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssh-client ciphers)" on the facing page.
# (config ssh-client) client-keys
Manage SSH client keys. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssh-client client-keys)" on page 545.
# (config ssh-client) hmacs
Manage SSH client HMACs. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssh-client hmacs)" on page 546.
# (config ssh-client) known-hosts
Manage SSH client known hosts. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssh-client known-hosts)" on page 548.
# (config ssh-client) view
View all SSH client information. See "# (config ssh-client) view" on page 550.
542 of 604
# (config ssh-client ciphers)

Synopsis
Manage SSH ciphers for outbound client connections. You can add, remove, reorder, and view ciphers. Fewer ciphers are
available when the appliance is in FIPS mode.
As a best practice, make sure that the remote SSH server and the appliance share at least one cipher in common.
Syntax
# (config ssh-client) ciphers
# (config ssh-client ciphers)
Subcommands
# (config ssh-client ciphers) add cipher_name [ordinal_position]
Adds a new SSH cipher to the current list. The cipher-name must be one of the names listed under choices in the view output.
The optional ordinal-position argument puts the cipher at that position in the list. Without the ordinal_position argument, the
cipher is added to the end of the list. Using the ordinal-position argument avoids needing to use the promote command to put
the addition at a position other than the end of the list. The ciphers you add here are added to the current list.
# (config ssh-client ciphers) demote cipher-name [shift_value]
Demotes the specified SSH cipher to a position lower in the current cipher list. The shift_value is the number of positions to
move the cipher on the list; if a shift_value isn’t specified, the cipher is demoted one position. Demoting a cipher puts it lower
on the list, making it less preferred than the ciphers higher on the list. The appliance “hints” the preferred selection of the
ciphers by the order of the list.
# (config ssh-client ciphers) promote cipher_name [shift_value]
Promotes the specified SSH cipher to a position higher in the current cipher list. Promoting a cipher puts it higher on the list,
making it more preferred than the ciphers lower on the list.
# (config ssh-client ciphers) remove cipher_name
Removes an SSH cipher from the current list. The cipher_name must be one of the names listed under current in the view
output.
# (config ssh-client ciphers) reset
Resets the current SSH ciphers selection to the default set of ciphers; use the view command to see the default cipher list.
543 of 604
# (config ssh-client ciphers) set cipher_list
Sets the list of SSH ciphers in the specified order, where cipher_list is a comma-separated list. If you have a long list of
ciphers, specifying the order of the ciphers in a single command can be easier then promoting or demoting individual ciphers.
Names in the cipher_list must be available under choices in the view output. The ciphers you set here replace the current list.
# (config ssh-client ciphers) view
Note: The event log indicates when any ciphers are added or removed.
544 of 604
# (config ssh-client client-keys)

Synopsis
Manage SSH client keys for outbound client connections. The following key types are supported:
n RSA (2048-bit, 3072-bit, and 4096-bit sizes)
n ECDSA (NIST P-256, NIST P-384, and NIST P-521 curves)
n Ed25519
When you use the create or inline subcommand, you create a SSH client key pair: the public key is shared with the remote
SSH server, and the private key is stored on the ProxySG appliance. You can create no more than one key of each type. If you
attempt to create more than one key of a type, you receive the error % Key of this type already exists.
Passphrase Syntax and Notes

In FIPS mode, do not specify the passphrase value in subcommands. The CLI will prompt you to enter the passphrase
instead. The passphrase specified in the inline subcommand is effective only for the current terminal session.
Syntax
# (config ssh-client) client-keys
# (config ssh-client clent-keys)
Subcommands
# (config ssh-client client-keys) create ecdsa {nistp256 | nistp384 | nistp521}
Creates a ECDSA key with the specified curve. The keys are stored in the SSH keyring.
# (config ssh-client client-keys) create ed25519
Creates an Ed25519 key. The keys are stored in the SSH keyring.
# (config ssh-client client-keys) create rsa {2048 | 3072 | 4096}
Creates a RSA key with the specified bit size. The keys are stored in the SSH keyring.
# (config ssh-client client-keys) delete {rsa | ecdsa | ed25519}
Deletes the specified key.
545 of 604
# (config ssh-client client-keys) inline {rsa | ecdsa | ed25519} [passphrase] eof_marker
Imports a private key of the specified type. The import format can be PEM (PKCS1), PKCS8, or the OpenSSH format. The
keys are stored in the SSH keyring.
If the private key is encrypted and the appliance is not in FIPS mode, you must specify the passphrase parameter; otherwise,
the #(config) security private-key-display passphrase value is used. If that passphrase was not set earlier
in the current terminal session, the CLI prompts you for a passphrase after you enter the private key and EOF marker.
# (config ssh-client client-keys) view private {rsa | ecdsa | ed25519} passphrase
Displays configured private keys, or the specified type of private key, in the OpenSSH format. You must enter a passphrase
that consists of at least eight characters. The passphrase will be used to encrypt the view output.
# ( config ssh-client client-keys) view [public] [rsa | ecdsa | ed25519]
Displays all configured public keys, or only the specified key type.
Example
# (config ssh-client client-keys) view
RSA public key:

ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCu216qsORcu000OgBJrAF8BETXt4o3wPJhLg4UV32M
E5y79mZbroKHMZK1zHHSrS/oT3kNAGVsiHtT2fizntcWP0B+iKQoqu9y+EXRjkmSo88fs/SEl+qOwW+wML3kziR2GcHv8hShIE/ju6
n+i9HJo2zGSj9SBfRBjdYydvC/rNL+0r8ebAAfk0jbuVaG9aNK+C6DPZgVcKbp2m4kQEpT+pU+R5euXbHO8EaVzMECVF14wZoGxwv0
HqYh2Mo5ktvfkFqh4LxNHCQ3TXL7P0/tD9gr5ebQ9oEP3q+scWR3lD3EV0Rgkl7ucyHqpg4126T1GPNzI9BT+41fz/uK7uej
Ed25519 public key:

ssh-ed25519 AAAAC3NzaC1lZDI1NTE5AAAAICxiVUqS7pW3L3kzNL7U4qMHmJDafIwmNfaDiTZhQam2
# (config ssh-client hmacs)

Synopsis
Manage SSH HMACs for outbound connections. You can add, remove, reorder, and view HMACs. Fewer HMACs are
available when the appliance is in FIPS mode. As a best practice, make sure that the remote SSH server and the appliance
share at least one HMAC in common.
Syntax
546 of 604
# (config ssh-client) hmacs
# (config ssh-client hmacs)
Subcommands
# (config ssh-client hmacs) add hmac_name [ordinal_position]
Adds a new SSH HMAC algorithm to the current list. The hmac-name must be one of the names listed under choices in the
view output. The optional ordinal_position argument will place the HMAC at that position in the list. Without the ordinal-position
argument, the HMAC will be added to the end of the list. Using the ordinal_position argument avoids needing to use the
promote command to put the addition at a position other than the end of the list.
# (config ssh-client hmacs) demote hmac_name [shift_value]
Demotes the specified SSH HMAC algorithm to a position lower in the current HMAC list. The shift-value is the number of
positions to move the HMAC on the list; if a shift_value isn’t specified, the HMAC is demoted one position. Demoting an
HMAC puts it lower on the list, making it less preferred than the HMACs higher on the list. The appliance “hints” the preferred
selection of the HMACs by the order of the list.
# (config ssh-client hmacs) promote hmac_name [shift_value]
Promotes the specified SSH HMAC algorithm to a position higher in the current HMAC list. Promoting an HMAC places it
higher on the list, making it more preferred than the HMACs lower on the list.
# (config ssh-client hmacs) remove hmac_name
Removes an SSH HMAC algorithm from the current list. The hmac_name must be one of the names listed under current in the
view output.
# (config ssh-client hmacs) reset
Resets current SSH HMAC list to the default set of HMAC algorithms; use the view command to see the default HMAC list.
# (config ssh-client hmacs) set hmac_list
Sets list of SSH HMAC algorithms in the specified order, where hmac_list is a comma-separated list.. If you have a long list of
HMACs, specifying the order of the algorithms in a single command can be easier then promoting or demoting individual
HMACs. Names in the hmac_list must be available under choices in the view output.
# (config ssh-client hmacs) view
547 of 604
Note: The event log indicates when any HMACs are added or removed.
# (config ssh-client known-hosts)

Synopsis
Manage known hosts for outbound SSH connections.
Syntax
# (config ssh-client) known-hosts
# (config ssh-client known-hosts)
Subcommands
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) add "host_key_entry"
Adds a known host entry. When you add a new entry, it is:
n Saved in OpenSSH format.
n Assigned an ID number. For example, the first entry you add is assigned ID 1.
n Appended to the end of the known hosts list. For example, if you add a second entry, it is assigned ID 2.
Because the host_key_entry includes spaces, enclose it within quotation marks for the CLI to accept it as a single entry.
Note: Add host key entries in the following format: marker comma_separated_list_of_
host_pattern(s) key_type key #comment If the entry does not comply with this format,
fields might contain incorrect values or be empty. The marker is optional, but if specified it must
be @revoked or @cert-authority. The comment is optional but helpful for identifying hosts. In
addition, the following example shows abbreviated host keys. When you specify host keys in
CLI commands on a production appliance, you must include keys in their entirety.
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) clear
Clears all entries from the known hosts list and resets the ID counter.
548 of 604
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) remove {ID_number | "complete_matching_line"}
Removes the specified entry, where:
n ID_number : Specifies the ID number of the entry to remove. To determine the ID number for an existing known host
entry, issue the view command.
n complete_matching_line : Specifies the complete entry to remove. The line must match; partial string matches do not
remove any hosts.
Note: Because the complete_matching_line includes spaces, enclose it within quotation

marks for the CLI to accept it as a single entry.
When you use the # (config ssh-client known-hosts) remove command, its ID number is not reassigned to subsequent
additions or entries that are lower on the list. Refer to the Example section for details.
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) fetch-host-key hostname [port] [force]
Obtain keys from a remote host. Specify either the hostname or IP address, and a port number. If you do not specify a port, the
default 22 is used. Specify force to add the host key without the CLI prompting you for confirmation.
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) view [regex]
Displays the known hosts list. If no entries have been added, or if the list was cleared, the CLI responds Known hosts file
is empty. Specifying a regex pattern displays a filtered view of the known hosts list based on the specified regular
expression.
Keep in mind the following about regex search:
n To enter regex that includes a backslash, use an escaping backslash. For example, to match on decimal characters
using \d, type \\d.
n The regex matches on host key only—not the ID numbers).
n The regex search is case-sensitive.
Examples
Display all host key entries stored on the appliance:
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) view

1 192.0.2.1 ssh-rsa YHkIc...= #log server
2 @revoked *.example.com ssh-rsa kXGHw...= #this cert is revoked
3 example.net,example.org ssh-rsa j5hNK...=
Remove the entry with the revoked certificate and verify it is removed. Note that the ID counter is not reset:
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) remove 2

ok
549 of 604

Add an entry with a valid certificate and verify it is added. Note that the new entry is appended to the list:
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) add "@cert-authority *.example.com ssh-rsa AB3Nz...="

ok
4 @cert-authority *.example.com ssh-rsa AB3Nz...=
Clear all entries and verify that the list is empty:
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) clear

ok
Known hosts file is empty
Add known host entries and verify that they are added. Note that the ID counter is reset:
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) add "192.0.2.1 ssh-rsa YHkIc...= #log server"

ok
#(config ssh-client known-hosts) add "example.net,example.org ssh-rsa j5hNK...="
ok
#(config ssh-client known-hosts) add "@cert-authority *.example.com ssh-rsa AB3Nz...="
ok
3 @cert-authority *.example.com ssh-rsa AB3Nz...=
Display a filtered list based on the specified regex pattern:
# (config ssh-client known-hosts) view j5

# (config ssh-client) view

Synopsis
View all SSH client information.
Syntax
550 of 604
# (config ssh-client) view {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config ssh-client) view ciphers
Same as # (config ssh-client ciphers) view output.
#(config ssh-client) view client-keys private {rsa | ecdsa | ed25519} passphrase
Same as # (config ssh-client client-keys) view private output.
# (config ssh-client) view client-keys [public] [rsa | ecdsa | ed25519]
Same as # (config ssh-client client-keys) view public output.
# (config ssh-client) view hmacs
Same as # (config ssh-client hmacs) view output.
# (config ssh-client) view known-hosts [regex]
Same as # (config ssh-client known-hosts) view output.
551 of 604
# (config) ssh-console
Synopsis
Configures the SSH host and client keys. This CLI command also sets global options, such as the welcome banner for all
SSH Consoles on the system.
To create and edit additional SSH console services, see "# (config ssh_console)" on page 357.
Syntax
# (config ssh-console)
Subcommands
# (config ssh-console) ciphers
Manages SSH ciphers. See "# (config ssh-console) ciphers" on page 555.
# (config ssh-console) create host-keypair sshv2 [rsa [1024 | 2048 | 3072]]
Creates an SSHv2 host key pair with an RSA key of the specified bit size for the SSH console, whether or not rsa is specified.
If no bit size is specified, the default size of 2048 bits is used.
# (config ssh-console) create host-keypair sshv2 ecdsa [nistp256 | nistp384 | nistp521]
Creates an SSHv2 host key pair with an ECSDSA key with the specified curve for the SSH console. If no curve is specified,
nist521 is used.
# (config ssh-console) create host-keypair sshv2 ed25519
Creates an SSHv2 host key pair with an Ed25519 key for the SSH console.
# (config ssh-console) delete client-key username key_id
Deletes the client key with the specified username and key ID.
# (config ssh-console) delete director-client-key key_id
Deletes the Director client key.
# (config ssh-console) delete host-keypair
Deletes all host key pairs. If you delete all host key pairs using this command, you will be unable to log in to the ProxySG via
SSH again (the current SSH session is unaffected). To access the appliance via SSH again, create a host key pair using the
Management Console (Configuration > Authentication > SSH Inbound Connections).
# (config ssh-console) delete host-keypair [ecdsa | ed25519 | rsa]
552 of 604
Deletes the specified SSHv2 host key pair. If the key type is not specifed, all SSHv2 host keys are deleted.
# (config ssh-console) hmacs
Manages SSH HMAC (Hash-based Message Authentication Code) algorithms. See "# (config ssh-console) hmacs" on
page 557.
# (config ssh-console) hostkey-algs add host_key_algorithm_name
Adds a new SSH host key algorithm to the current list.
# (config ssh-console) hostkey-algs remove host_key_algorithm_name
Removes an SSH host key algorithm from the current list.
# (config ssh-console) hostkey-algs reset
Resets current SSH host key algorithm list to the default. The default list is available in the view output.
# (config ssh-console) hostkey-algs set host_key_algorithms_list
Sets list of SSH host key algorithms in the specified order, where host_key_algorithms_list is a comma-separated list. Names
in the list must be available under choices in the view output.
# (config ssh-console) hostkey-algs view
Displays the SSH host key algorithms currently configured, the default set of algorithms, and the available choices of
algorithms. Fewer algorithms are selected or available if the appliance is in FIPS mode. (true?)
#(config ssh-console) inline {client-key eof_marker | director-client-key eof_marker | host-key ecdsa

[force] [passphrase] eof_marker | host-key ed25519 [force] [passphrase] eof_marker | host-key rsa
[force] [passphrase] eof_marker | welcome-banner eof_marker}
Add the specified client keys, host keys, or banner for those logging to the ProxySG appliance using SSHv2.
You cannot specify a passphrase in the host-key commands while the appliance is in FIPS mode. You can specify a
passphrase if the appliance is not in FIPS mode and the key being added is encrypted. If the appliance is in FIPS mode and a
passphrase was specified previously, users are prompted for the passphrase; for best security, the CLI does not display the
password when entered.
# (config ssh-console) kex-algs add key_exchange_algorithm_name
Adds a new SSH key exchange algorithm to the current list.
# (config ssh-console) kex-algs remove key_exchange_algorithm_name
Removes an SSH key exchange algorithm from the current list.
# (config ssh-console) kex-algs reset
Resets current SSH key exchange algorithm list to the default. The default list is available in the view output.
# (config ssh-console) kex-algs set key_exchange_algorithms_list
553 of 604
Sets list of SSH key exchange algorithms in the specified order, where key_exchange_algorithms_list is a comma-
separated list. Names in the list must be available under choices in the view output.
# (config ssh-console) kex-algs view
Displays the SSH key exchange algorithms currently configured, the default set of algorithms, and the available choices of
algorithms. Fewer algorithms are selected or available if the appliance is in FIPS mode. (true?)
# (config ssh-console) no welcome-banner
Disables the welcome banner.
# (config ssh-console) exit
# (config ssh-console) view {client-key {bubblebabble username [key_id]| hex username [key_id] |
randomart username [key_id]} | director-client-key | management-center-client-key | host-public-key
[sshv2 [ecdsa | ec25519 | rsa]]| user-list | versions-enabled}
Display specified SSH console parameters.
Example
# (config ssh-console) view versions-enabled
SSHv2 is enabled.
See Also
n "# (config ssh-console) ciphers" on the facing page
n "# (config ssh-console) hmacs" on page 557
554 of 604
# (config ssh-console) ciphers

Synopsis
Manage SSH ciphers on the appliance. You can add, remove, reset, and view ciphers. Fewer ciphers are available when the
appliance is in FIPS mode.
After an upgrade or downgrade, the current list of ciphers —as shown in view subcommand output—may change. If you modify
the current list using the add, remove, and set subcommands, the changes persist after system upgrades, downgrades, and
reboots; however, the current list will not be identical to the list prior to upgrade/downgrade if the system must consider
deprecated ciphers. To understand the behavior after upgrade/downgrade:
n Ciphers that were previously added explicitly (using the add subcommand) are added to the current list if they are
supported after upgrade/downgrade. They are not added if they are deprecated in the current version.
n Ciphers that were previously removed explicitly (using the remove subcommand) are removed from the current list even
if they are supported in the current version.
n Ciphers that were neither added nor removed explicitly are added to the current list if supported in the current version
and removed from the list if deprecated. If you upgrade to a release that supports only ciphers that you previously
removed, resulting in an empty current list, the appliance warns you that the list is empty and event-logs the
occurrence.
For example, if you upgrade to a version of SGOS in which an added cipher is deprecated, the cipher is removed from the
current list. Downgrading to the previous SGOS version adds the cipher back to the current list.
Note: The event log indicates when any ciphers are added or removed.
Syntax
# (config ssh-console) ciphers {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config ssh-console) ciphers add cipher_name [ordinal-position]
Adds a new SSH cipher to the current list. The cipher_name must be one of the names listed under choices in the ciphers
view output. The optional ordinal-position argument puts the cipher at that position in the list. Without the ordinal-
position argument, the cipher is added to the end of the list. The ciphers you add here are appended to the current list.
# (config ssh-console) ciphers remove cipher_name
555 of 604
Removes an SSH cipher from the current list. The cipher_name must be one of the names listed under current in the ciphers
view output.
# (config ssh-console) ciphers reset
Resets the current SSH ciphers selection to the default set of ciphers; use the ciphers view command to see the default cipher
list.
# (config ssh-console) ciphers set cipher_list
Sets the list of SSH ciphers in the specified order, where cipher_list is a comma-separated list. Names in the cipher_list must
be one of the names listed under choices in the ciphers view output. The ciphers you set here replace the current list.
# (config ssh-console) ciphers view
Example
# (config ssh-console) ciphers view
current: aes256-gcm@openssh.com,aes128-gcm@openssh.com,aes256-ctr,aes192-ctr, aes128-ctr
default: aes256-gcm@openssh.com,aes128-gcm@openssh.com,aes256-ctr,aes192-ctr, aes128-ctr
choices: aes256-gcm@openssh.com,aes128-gcm@openssh.com,aes256-ctr,aes192-ctr, aes128-ctr, rijndael-
cbc@lysator.liu.se,arcfour256,arcfour128,arcfour,cast128-cbc, blowfish-cbc,aes256-cbc,aes192-cbc,3des-
cbc,aes128-cbc
See Also
n FIPS Mode WebGuide
n "# (config) ssh-console" on page 552
n "# (config ssh-console) hmacs" on the facing page
556 of 604
# (config ssh-console) hmacs

Synopsis
Manage SSH HMAC (Hash-based Message Authentication Code) algorithms on the appliance. You can add, remove, reset,
and view HMAC algorithms. Fewer HMAC algorithms are available when the appliance is in FIPS mode.
After an upgrade or downgrade, the current list of HMACs —as shown in view subcommand output—may change. If you modify
the current list using the add, remove, and set subcommands, the changes persist after system upgrades, downgrades, and
reboots; however, the current list will not be identical to the list prior to upgrade/downgrade if the system must consider
deprecated HMACs. To understand the behavior after upgrade/downgrade:
n HMACs that were previously added explicitly (using the add subcommand) are added to the current list if they are
supported after upgrade/downgrade. They are not added if they are deprecated in the current version.
n HMACs that were previously removed explicitly (using the remove subcommand) are removed from the current list
even if they are supported in the current version.
n HMACs that were neither added nor removed explicitly are added to the current list if supported in the current version
and removed from the list if deprecated.
n If you upgrade to a release that supports only HMACs that you previously removed, resulting in an empty current list,
the appliance warns you that the list is empty and event-logs the occurrence.
For example, if you upgrade to a version of SGOS in which an added HMAC is deprecated, the HMAC is removed from the
current list. Downgrading to the previous SGOS version adds the HMAC back to the current list.
Note: The event log indicates when any HMACs are added or removed.
Syntax
# (config ssh-console) hmacs {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config ssh-console) hmacs add hmac_name [ordinal-position]
Adds a new SSH HMAC algorithm to the current list. The hmac_name must be one of the names listed under choices in the
hmacs view output. The optional ordinal-position argument will place the HMAC at that position in the list. Without the
ordinal-position argument, the HMAC will be added to the end of the list. Using the ordinal-position argument avoids
needing to use the promote command to put the addition at a position other than the end of the list.
557 of 604
# (config ssh-console) hmacs remove hmac_name
Removes an SSH HMAC algorithm from the current list. The hmac_name must be one of the names listed under current in the
hmacs view output.
# (config ssh-console) hmacs reset
Resets current SSH HMAC list to the default set of HMAC algorithms; use the hmacs view command to see the default
HMAC list.
# (config ssh-console) hmacs set hmac_list
Sets the list of SSH HMACs in the specified order, where hmac_list is a comma-separated list. Names in the hmac_list must
be available under choices in the hmacs view output.
# (config ssh-console) hmacs view
Example
# (config ssh-console) hmacs view
current: hmac-sha2-512-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-256-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha1-etm@openssh.com,umac-
128-etm@openssh.com,umac-64-etm@openssh.com,umac-128@openssh.com,umac-64@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-
512,hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1
default: hmac-sha2-512-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-256-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha1-etm@openssh.com,umac-
512,hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1
choices: hmac-sha2-512-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-256-etm@openssh.com, hmac-sha1-etm@openssh.com,umac-
512,hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-md5-etm@openssh.com,hmac-ripemd160-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha1-96-
etm@openssh.com,hmac-md5-96-etm@openssh.com,hmac-md5,hmac-ripemd160,hmac-ripemd160@openssh.com,hmac-
sha1-96,hmac-md5-96
See Also
n FIPS Mode WebGuide
n "# (config) ssh-console" on page 552
n "# (config ssh-console) ciphers" on page 555
558 of 604
# (config) ssl
Synopsis
Use this command to configure HTTPS termination, including managing certificates, both self-signed and those from a
Certificate Signing Authority (CSA).
To configure HTTPS termination, you must complete the following tasks:
n Configure a keyring
n Configure the SSL client
n Configure the HTTPS service
Note: You must use a serial or SSH connection to execute these commands.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl) {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config ssl) ccr-renegotiation-list {clear | max-entries number | view}
Manages the Client Certificate Requested list, where:
n clear: Removes all entries in the list.
n max-entries number: Specifies the maximum number of entries allowed in the list. The maximum value is 10000, the
minimum is 0, and the default is 1000.
n view: Displays all the entries in the list.
# (config ssl) create ccl list_name
Creates a list to contain CA certificates.
# (config ssl) create certificate keyring_id [attribute value]...
Creates a certificate. The CLI prompts you to enter values for the following attributes:
n two-digit ISO country code
n two-letter state/province abbreviation
559 of 604
n city name/locality
n organization name
n organization unit
n common name
n email address
n challenge password
n company name
n digest type
Press ENTER to specify no value. Default values are in square brackets [].
Note: You can associate certificates with a keyring.

You can create a self-signed certificate in one of two ways: interactively or non-interactively.
The default digest is SHA256.
Director uses non-interactive commands in profiles and overlays to create certificates.
# (config ssl) create crl crl_id
Creates a Certificate Revocation List.
# (config ssl) create fips {ccl list_name | keyring {no-show keyring_id [key_length] | show keyring_id
[key_length] | show-director keyring_id [key_length]} | ssl-device-profile device_profile_name
[keyring]}
Creates FIPS-compliant PKI elements.
Note: Version 7.2 does not support FIPS mode. See the Release Notes for information.
# (config ssl) create hsm name ip_address port device_profile
Creates an HSM. The device profile is the client certificate belonging to the appliance; the HSM uses this certificate to
authenticate the appliance.
# (config ssl) create hsm-keygroup name
Creates an HSM keygroup in the same namespace as an HSM keyring. Membership may only be HSM keyrings.
Note: The keygroup name “verbose” is reserved for future expansion.
560 of 604
# (config ssl) create keylist list_name
Creates a keylist with no keyrings with the specified name.
# (config ssl) create keyring {show | show-director | no-show} keyring_id [key_length]
Creates a keyring, with a keypair where:
n show: Keyrings created with this attribute are displayed in the show configuration output, meaning that the keyring can
be included as part of a profile or overlay pushed by Director.
n show-director: Keyrings created with this attribute are part of the show configuration output if the CLI connection is
secure (SSH/RSA) and the command is issued from Director.
n no-show: Keyrings created with this attribute are not displayed in the show configuration output and cannot be part of a
profile. The no-show option is provided as additional security for environments where the keys will never be used
outside of the particular ProxySG appliance.
# (config ssl) create ssl-device-profile SSL_device_profile_name [keyring]
Creates an SSL device profile of the specified name and keyring.
# (config ssl) create signing-request keyring_id [attribute value]...
Creates a certificate signing request (CSR). The CLI prompts you to enter values for the following attributes:
n two-digit ISO country code
n two-letter state/province abbreviation
n city name/locality
n organization name
n organization unit
n common name
n email address
n challenge password
n company name
n digest type
Press ENTER to specify no value. Default values are in square brackets [].
561 of 604
Note: You must associate the CSR with a keyring and a digest.
You can create a CSR in one of two ways: interactively or non-interactively.
The default digest is SHA256.
Director uses non-interactive commands in profiles and overlays to create CSRs.
# (config ssl) create ssl-client ssl_client_name
Associates the SSL client with a keyring. Only the default is permitted.
# (config ssl) delete ca-certificate name
Deletes a CA-certificate from the ProxySG appliance.
# (config ssl) delete ccl list_name
Deletes a CCL list from the ProxySG appliance.
# (config ssl) delete certificate keyring_id
Deletes the certificate associated with a keyring.
# (config ssl) delete crl list_name
Deletes the specified Certificate Revocation List.
# (config ssl) delete external-certificate name
Deletes an external certificate from the ProxySG appliance.
# (config ssl) delete hsm name
Deletes an existing HSM device. It is an error to delete an HSM if keyrings reference it.
# (config ssl) delete hsm-keyring name [force]
Deletes an existing HSM keyring. It is an error to remove a keyring that is assigned to a keygroup unless the force keyword is
present. If the force keyword is present, all references to the keyring will be removed from any keygroup which references it. It
is an error to remove a keyring if it is referenced in policy or configuration outside of keygroups.
# (config ssl) delete keylist list_name
Deletes the specified keylist. Keyrings associated with the keylist are not deleted. If the keylist is used in policy, the keylist
cannot be deleted and generates an error.
# (config ssl) delete keyring keyring_id
Deletes a keyring with a keypair.
# (config ssl) delete keyring [force] keyring_id
562 of 604
Deletes a keyring. The force option removes the keyring from all keylists using the keyring, and then deletes the keyring.
# (config ssl) delete signing-request keyring_id
Deletes a certificate signing request.
# (config ssl) delete ssl-client ssl_client_name
Deletes an SSL client.
# (config ssl) delete ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile_name
Deletes an SSL device profile.
# (config ssl) edit ccl list_name
Edits the specified CCL. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssl ccl list_name)" on page 571.
# (config ssl) edit crl crl_id
Edits the specified CRL. Changes the prompt to"# (config ssl crl list_name)" on page 572.
# (config ssl) edit hsm name
Edits the specified HSM. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssl hsm name)" on page 573.
# (config ssl) edit hsm-keygroup name
Edits the specified HSM keygroup. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssl hsm-keygroup name)" on page 574. The keygroup
name “verbose” is reserved for future expansion.
# (config ssl) edit keylist keylist_id
Enables you to configure the keylist parameters; changes the prompt to "# (config ssl keylist keylist_id)" on page 584.
# (config ssl) edit ssl-device-profile profile_name
Edits the specified SSL device profile. Changes the prompt to "# (config device-profile profile_name) " on page 569.
# (config ssl) edit ssl-client ssl_client_name
Edits the default SSL client. Changes the prompt to "# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name)" on page 582.
# (config ssl) exit
Exits configure ssl mode and returns to configure mode.
# (config ssl) force-secure-renegotiation {enable | disable}
Enabling this makes the appliance perform strict secure renegotiation only for all SSL connections.
563 of 604
Note: By default this feature is disabled. If this feature is enabled, all secure communications
with Symantec servers will fail. If you enable this setting, the ProxySG appliance performs
strict secure renegotiation only for all SSL connections.
# (config ssl) inline ca-certificate name eof
Imports the specified CA certificate.
# (config ssl) inline certificate keyring_id eof
Imports the specified certificate.
Note: Using the inline certificate command, you can associate a certificate chain with a
keyring. You must paste all associated intermediate certificates after the server certificate. The
maximum character count for importing a certificate chain and associating it with a keyring is
7999.
# (config ssl) inline crl list_name eof
Imports a Certificate Revocation List.
# (config ssl) inline external-certificate name eof
Imports a certificate without the corresponding private key.
# (config ssl) inline fips ca-certificate name [eof_marker]
Installs a FIPS-compliant CA certificate.
# (config ssl) inline fips external-certificate name [eof_marker]
Installs a FIPS compliant certificate without a corresponding private key.
# (config ssl) inline fips keyring {no-show keyring_id [password | "" eof_marker | show keyring_id
[password | "" eof_marker | show-director keyring_id [password | "" eof_marker}
Installs a FIPS compliant keyring with unshowable, showable, or director showable key pairs.
# (config ssl) inline hsm-keyring name key_label EOF
Adds an HSM keyring. The certificate chain for the key is entered inline. A test sign operation will be performed to make sure
that the key matches the certificate chain and all certificates will be checked to make sure that their CA flag is set. For
example:
# (config ssl) inline hsm-keyring hsmkeyring1 test hsmlabel eof1234
564 of 604
The keyring must have the same key label as that known by the HSM. In the example, hsmlabel is used. When the appliance
sees the indicated eof tag, it will cease processing, and present the data.
# (config ssl) inline keylist list_name extractor_string
Imports a keylist. Each keyring ID must be listed on independent lines. If a keylist with the same name already exists, it will be
replaced with the new information.
# (config ssl) inline keyring {show | show-director | no-show} keyring_id [password] eof
Imports a keyring, where:
n show: Private keys associated with keyrings created with this attribute can be displayed in the CLI or included as part of
a profile or overlay pushed by Director.
n show-director: Keyrings created with this attribute are part of the show configuration output if the CLI connection is
secure (SSH/RSA) and the command is issued from Director.
n no-show: Keyrings created with this attribute are not displayed in the show configuration output and cannot be part of a
profile. The no-show option is provided as additional security for environments where the keys will never be used
outside of the particular ProxySG appliance.
n password: The password for the keyring. eof: End-of-file marker. This can be anything, as long as it doesn’t also appear
in the inline text. (If the eof appears in the inline text, the inline command completes at that point.)
Note: The following keyrings cannot be added to keylists: default, passive-attack-protection,

config-passwords, and default-untrusted.
# (config ssl) inline signing-request keyring_id eof
Imports the specified signing request.
# (config ssl) intermediate-cert-cache
Configures the intermediate certificate cache. Changes the prompt to"# (config ssl icc)" on page 575.
# (config ssl) keydata-path URL
Sets the path for keyrings and keylists to import.
# (config ssl) ocsp
Configures OCSP. Changes the prompt to"# (config ssl oscp)" on page 577.
# (config ssl) proxy client-cert-ccl {ccl_list_name | all | none}
Specifies the CCL to be used for the client. The default is all.
# (config ssl) proxy crl-distribution-point {enable | disable | hostname hostname_or_ip_address}
565 of 604
Configures the CRL distribution point for emulated certificates, where:
n enable: A CRL distribution point is used for emulated certificates.
n disable: No CRL distribution point is used for emulated certificates.
n hostname: Specify the CRL distribution point in hostname or IP address format.
# (config ssl) proxy issuer-keyring keyring_name
Specifies the keyring to be used for SSL interception.
# (config ssl) proxy issuer-keyring hsm-keyring
After verifying SafeNet Java HSM connectivity, you must add the issuer keyring to the HSM keyring,
# (config ssl) proxy ocsp-stapling {enable | disable}
Enables or disables the sending of OCSP stapled responses from the ProxySG SSL forward proxy. The default value is
enable.
# (config ssl) proxy preserve-untrusted {enable | disable}
When this feature is enabled, if an OCS presents a certificate to the ProxySG appliance that is not signed by a trusted
Certificate Authority (CA), the ProxySG appliance presents the browser with a certificate that is signed by its untrusted issuer
keyring. A warning message is displayed to the user, and they can decide to ignore the warning and visit the website or cancel
the request. The default value is disable.
# (config ssl) proxy server-cert-ccl {ccl_list_name | all}
Specifies the CCL to be used for the server. The default is browser-trusted.
# (config ssl) proxy untrusted-issuer-keyring untrusted_issuer_keyring
Specifies the keyring used for signing emulated server certificates when preserving an untrusted OCS certificate. The default
value is default-untrusted.
# (config ssl) request-appliance-certificate
Generates an appliance certificate.
# (config ssl) show ssl hsm-keygroup name
Shows HSM keygroup configuration.
# (config ssl) ssl-nego-timeout seconds
Configures the SSL-negotiation timeout period. The default is 300 seconds.
# (config ssl) test hsm-keyring hsm_keyring
566 of 604
Verify that the HSM keyring that has been generated on the SafeNet Java HSM can successfully communicate with the
appliance. If the HSM keyring is not accepted, use the error code to determine the cause, and verify that it has been properly
added.
# (config ssl) view appliance-certificate-request
Displays the appliance certificate request generated by the request-appliance-certificate command.
# (config ssl) view ca-certificate name
Displays the Certificate Authority certificate.
# (config ssl) view ccl
Displays the CA certificate lists.
# (config ssl) view certificate keyring_id
Displays the certificate.
# (config ssl) view crl [list_name]
Displays the specified Certificate Revocation List or all CRLs.
# (config ssl) view external-certificate name
Displays the external certificate.
# (config ssl) view hsm name
Show HSM device(s); shows status, including uptime, downtime, and so on.
# (config ssl) view hsm-keygroup name
Lists configured HSM keygroup(s); also shows status (included for each key in the group).
# (config ssl) view hsm-keyring name
Lists configured HSM key(s); also shows status (including uptime, downtime, and so on).
# (config ssl) view keypair {aes128-cbc | aes256-cbc | unencrypted} keyring_id | keyring_id}
Displays the keypair. To view the keypair in an encrypted format, specify aes128-cbc or aes128-cbc before the keyringID. You
are then prompted for the challenge entered when the keyring was created.
# (config ssl) view keyring [keyring_id | unreferenced | expiring-in n]
Displays the keyring, where:
n keyring_id: Displays the certificate subject, serial number, issuer, and all keylists that the specified keyring is a
member of.
567 of 604
n unreferenced: Lists all the keyrings that are not referenced anywhere else in the configuration or in policy.
n expiring-in n: Lists all keyrings with certificates expiring in a specified N days.
To display all keyrings with expired certificates, use # (config ssl) view keyring expiring-in 0.
# (config ssl) view keyring [keyring_id]
Displays the keyring or all keyrings.
# (config ssl) view ocsp
Displays SSL OCSP configuration.
# (config ssl) view proxy
Displays SSL proxy configuration.
# (config ssl) view signing-request keyring_id
Displays the certificate signing request.
# (config ssl) view ssl-client
Displays summary information of SSL clients.
# (config ssl) view ssl-device-profile
Displays SSL device profile.
# (config ssl) view ssl-nego-timeout
Displays SSL negotiation timeout period status summary.
# (config ssl) view summary {ca-certificate | external-certificate} [name]
Displays a summary for all CA-certificate or external-certificate commands, or for the certificate name specified.
Example
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl) create certificate keyring-id cn bluecoat challenge test c US state CA company bluecoat
digest sha256
See Also
n "# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name)" on page 582
n # (config) load crl crl_list
n #(config) load keydata [passphrase]
568 of 604
# (config device-profile profile_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified SSL device profile.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
# (config ssl) edit ssl-device-profile profile_name
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name)
Subcommands
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) ccl {ccl_name | all}
Configures the CA Certificate List to use.
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) cipher-suite [cipher_suite]
Associates the specified cipher suite(s) with the current SSL device profile. Pressing ENTER without specifying cipher suites
displays a list of available ciphers and a prompt to select ciphers.
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) device-id device_id
Sets the device authentication profile of the specific device ID.
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) ssl" on page 559 prompt.
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) keyring-idkeyring_id
Configures SSL client keyring id.
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) no keyring-id
569 of 604
Clears the keyring-id.
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) protocol {tlsv1 | tlsv1.1 | tlsv1.2 | tls1.3}
Configures SSL client protocol version or versions. Changing the SSL protocol version or versions will reset the list of available
cipher suites.
# (config device-profile profile_name) verify-peer {enable | disable}
Enables or disables device authentication peer verification.
# (config ssl device-profile profile_name) view
Displays the SSL client details.
Example
# (config device-profile test1) view
Name: test1
Usable for: client
Keyring:
CCL: browser-trusted
Device-id: $(subject.CN)
Cipher suite: tls_aes_256_gcm_sha384 tls_chacha20_poly1305_sha256 tls_aes_128_gcm_sha256 tls_aes_128_
ccm_8_sha256 tls_aes_128_ccm_sha256 ecdhe-rsa-aes256-sha384 ecdhe-rsa-aes128-sha256 ecdhe-rsa-aes256-
gcm-sha384 ecdhe-rsa-aes128-gcm-sha256 ecdhe-rsa-aes128-sha ecdhe-rsa-aes256-sha aes128-sha256 aes256-
sha256 aes128-gcm-sha256 aes256-gcm-sha384 aes128-sha aes256-sha dhe-rsa-aes128-sha dhe-rsa-aes256-sha
dhe-rsa-aes128-gcm-sha256 dhe-rsa-aes256-gcm-sha384
Protocol: tlsv1.1 tlsv1.2 tlsv1.3
Verify-peer: enabled
See Also
n "# (config) ssl" on page 559
570 of 604
# (config ssl ccl list_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified CCL.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
Subcommands
# (config ssl ccl list_name) add ca_certificate_name
Adds a CA certificate to this list. (The CA certificate must first be imported in "# (config) ssl" on page 559 mode.)
# (config ssl ccl list_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) ssl" on page 559 mode.
# (config ssl ccl list_name) remove ca_certificate_name
Removes a CA certificate from the specified list.
# (config ssl ccl list_name) view
Shows a summary of CA certificates in this list.
Example
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl) edit ccl list1
# (config ssl ccl list1) add CACert1
ok
See Also
571 of 604
# (config ssl crl list_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified Certificate Revocation List.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
Subcommands
# (config ssl crl list_name) exit
# (config ssl crl list_name) inline eof_marker
Imports a Certificate Revocation List.
# (config ssl crl list_name) load crl
Downloads the specified Certificate Revocation List.
# (config ssl crl list_name) path crl
Specifies the network path to download the specified Certificate Revocation List.
# (config ssl crl list_name) view
Displays the specified Certificate Revocation List.
Example
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl) edit ccl list1
# (config ssl ccl list1) add CACert1
ok
See Also
572 of 604
# (config ssl hsm name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified HSM.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
Subcommands
# (config ssl hsm name) device-profile profile
Change the device profile.
# (config ssl hsm name) ip-address address
Edit the IP address.
# (config ssl hsm name) port port
Change the port.
# (config ssl hsm name) view
Show current HSM configuration.
Example
# (config ssl) edit hsm test
# (config ssl hsm test) device-profile default
ok
See Also
573 of 604
# (config ssl hsm-keygroup name)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
Subcommands
# (config ssl hsm-keygroup name) add keyring_name
Adds a keyring to the keygroup. You cannot add the same keyring more than once or add an hsm-keygroup, “regular” keyring,
or “regular” keylist to the keygroup.
# (config ssl hsm-keygroup name) remove keyring-name
Removes a keyring from the keygroup.
# (config ssl hsm-keygroup name) clear
Clears the keygroup
# (config ssl hsm-keygroup name) view
Displays the keygroup.
Example
# (config ssl) edit hsm test
# (config ssl hsm test) device-profile default
ok
See Also
574 of 604
# (config ssl icc)

Synopsis
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
# (config ssl icc)
Subcommands
# (config ssl icc) clear-cache
Clears the intermediate CA certificates that are currently stored on the appliance.
# (config ssl icc) disable
Simultaneously disables the caching of intermediate CA certificates and clears the existing cache on the ProxySG appliance.
# (config ssl icc) enable
Enables the caching of intermediate CA certificates on the ProxySG appliance.
# (config ssl icc) exit
# (config ssl icc) view certificate {detail certificate_name | summary [certificate_name]}
Display details about the certificates that have been cached on the appliance.
# (config ssl icc) view status
Displays the current status of the intermediate certificate cache, including usage statistics and the number of stored
intermediate CA certificates.
Example
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl icc) enable
575 of 604
ok
# (config ssl icc) view status
Intermediate Certificate
Caching: enabled
Number of cached certificates: 4
Number of new certificates: 2
Number of cache hits: 14
# (config ssl icc) clear-cache
ok
See Also
576 of 604
# (config ssl oscp)

Synopsis
Configure the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) settings.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
# (config ssl) oscp
# (config ssl oscp)
Subcommands
# (config ssl ocsp) create responder_name
Creates a responder with the specified name.
# (config ssl ocsp) default responder_name
Sets the specified responder as the default responder.
# (config ssl ocsp) delete responder_name
Deletes the specified responder.
# (config ssl ocsp) edit responder_name
Edits the specified responder. Changes the prompt to "# (config ocsp responder_name)" on page 579.
# (config ssl ocsp) exit
# (config ssl ocsp) no
Clears the current default responder setting.
# (config ssl ocsp) view
Displays configuration information for each responder.
577 of 604
Example
See the example for "# (config ocsp responder_name)" on the facing page.
See Also
578 of 604
# (config ocsp responder_name)

Synopsis
Edit the specified OCSP responder.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
# (config ssl) oscp
# (config ssl oscp) create responder_name

# (config ssl oscp) edit responder_name
# (config ssl oscp responder_name)
Subcommands
# (config ocsp responder_name) exit
Returns to the "# (config ssl oscp)" on page 577 prompt.
# (config ocsp responder_name) extension nonce {disable | enable}
Enables or disables use of a nonce control in an OCSP request. When enabled, a nonce (unique digits sequence) is included
as one of the requestExtensions in each OCSP request. Default is disable.
# (config ocsp responder_name) extension request-signing-keyring keyring_id
Configures the OCSP request to contain a signature along with certificates to help the OCSP responder verify this signature.
They keyring must already exist and have a certificate.
# (config ocsp responder_name) ignore expired-responder {enable | disable}
Specifies whether the OCSP request must contain a signature along with certificates to help the OCSP responder verify this
signature. They keyring must already exist and ave a certificate. By default, invalid responder certificate dates cause the
subject certificate verification to fail.
# (config ocsp responder_name) ignore ocsp-signing-purpose {enable | disable}
Specifies whether to ignore the enforcement of purpose field in the responder certificate. Default is enable.
# (config ocsp responder_name) ignore request-failure {enable | disable}
Specifies whether to ignore connection failures and timeouts to the OCSP server. Default is disable.
579 of 604
# (config ocsp responder_name) ignore unknown-status {enable | disable}
Specifies whether to treat “unknown” revocation status for a certificate as an error. By default, unknown status is an error and
causes subject certification verification to fail.
# (config ocsp responder_name) ignore untrusted-responder {enable | disable}
Specifies whether to bypass, during responder certificate verification, any untrusted certificate errors. For example, a missing
issuer certificate or a missing self-signed certificate. By default, any untrusted certificate failure is an error and causes the
subject certificate verification to fail.
# (config ocsp responder_name) issuer-ccl {ccl_name | all | none}
Sets the name of the CCL. This is the list of CA names which is associated with the certificate to be checked for revocation. It
may either be a server or client certificate, or a certificate that is used for verifying system images.
# (config ocsp responder_name) no extension request-signing-keyring
Resets the request signing keyring.
# (config ocsp responder_name) response-ccl {response_ccl_name | all}
Sets the name of the CCL.
# (config ocsp responder_name) ssl-device-profile ssl_device_profile_name
Sets the SSL device profile. The device profile is a unique set of SSL cipher-suites, protocols and keyrings used when the
ProxySG appliance makes HTTPS connections with an OCSP responder. The default value is the pre-created device profile
named “default.”
# (config ocsp responder_name) ttl {auto | number_of_days}
Configures the time to live (TTL) value. This value determines how long a response remains in the cache. The auto option
indicates that the response is cached until nextUpdate. If nextUpdate is not present the response is not cached. The number_
of_days variable indicates that the nextUpdate field in the response is to be overridden and that the response is to be cached
for the indicated number of days. Default is auto.
# (config ocsp responder_name) url ocsp server url
Sets the OCSP server URL.
# (config ocsp responder_name) use-forwarding {disable | enable}
Sets the OCSP requests to use forwarding.
# (config ocsp responder_name) view
Displays the responder configurations.
580 of 604
Example
# (config ssl oscp) create responder1
ok
# (config ssl oscp) edit responder1
# (config ssl oscp responder1)
# (config ocsp responder1) use-forwarding enable
ok
See Also
n "# (config ssl oscp)" on page 577
581 of 604
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name)

Synopsis
Edit the default SSL client.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
# (config ssl) edit ssl-client ssl_client_name
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name)
Subcommands
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name) ccl {ccl_name | all}
Configures the CA Certificate List to use.
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name) cipher-suite [cipher_suite]
Associates the specified cipher suite(s) with the default SSL client. Pressing ENTER without specifying cipher suites displays
a list of available ciphers and a prompt to select ciphers.
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name) exit
Returns to "# (config) ssl" on page 559 prompt.
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name) keyring-id keyring_id
Configures SSL client keyring id.
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name) no keyring-id
Clears the keyring-id.
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name) protocol {sslv3 | tlsv1 | tlsv1.1 | tlsv1.2 | tls1.3}
582 of 604
Configures SSL client protocol version or versions. Changing the SSL protocol version or versions will reset the list of available
cipher suites.
# (config ssl ssl-client ssl_client_name) view
Displays the SSL client details.
Example
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl) edit ssl-client default
# (config ssl ssl-client default) cipher-suite AES128-GCM-SHA256 DHE-DSS-AES256-SHA256
ok
# (config ssl ssl-client default) exit
# (config ssl) exit
# (config)
See Also
583 of 604
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id)

Synopsis
Edit the default SSL client.
Syntax
# (config) ssl
# (config ssl)
# (config ssl) edit keylist keylist_id
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id)
Subcommands
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id) add keyring_id
Adds the specified keyring to the keylist.
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id) remove keyring_id
Removes the specified keyring from the keylist.
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id) clear
Removes all keyrings from the keylist.
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id) default-keyring keyring_id
Sets the specified keyring as the default in the keylist. The default keyring is used when clients do not support SNI or when
they send incompatible SNI information.
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id) exit
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id) extractor extractor_string
Sets the extractor pattern for the keyring. The extractor supports substitutions from all attributes of Subject, Issuer,
SubjectAltName, IssuerAltName, SerialNumber, and ServerName certificate fields. The default extractor value is
$(subject.CN); many other subject attributes are recognized, among them OU, O, L, ST, C, and DC. Field indexes can be
used in substitutions on a group name or attribute; for example $(SubjectAltName.DNS.1).
# (config ssl keylist keylist_id) view [verbose]
584 of 604
Displays the keylist extractor as well as the keyring IDs and their respective extractor values. Use verbose to display the
certificate field values of the keylist.
See Also
585 of 604
# (config) static-routes
Synopsis
Set the network path to download the static routes configuration file.
To use static routes, you must create a routing table and place it on an HTTP server accessible to the device. The routing table
is a text file containing a list of static routes made up of destination IP addresses (IPv4 or IPv6), subnet masks (for IPv4) or
prefix lengths (for IPv6), and gateway IP addresses (IPv4 or IPv6).
When you download a routing table, the table is stored in the device until it is replaced by downloading a new table.
The routing table is a simple text file containing a list of IPv4/IPv6 addresses, subnet masks/prefix lengths, and gateways. A
sample routing table is illustrated below:
10.63.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.63.158.213
10.64.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.63.158.213
10.65.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.63.158.226
fe80::2d0:83ff:fe05:780%0:0 64 00:D0:83:05:07:80
Note that a routing table can contain a combination of IPv4 and IPv6 entries, but the gateway for each destination must be on
the appropriate network type. For example, an IPv6 destination must use an IPv6 gateway. When a routing table is loaded, all
requested addresses are compared to the list, and routed based on the best match.
After the routing table is created, place it on an HTTP server so it can be downloaded to the device. To download the routing
table to the appliance, use "# (config) load" on page 350.
Syntax
# (config) static-routes {subcommands}
Subcommands
# (config) static-routes no path
Clears the network path location of the static route table.
# (config) static-routes path url
Sets the network path location of the static route table to the specified URL.
Example
# (config) static-routes path 10.25.36.47/files/routes.txt
ok
586 of 604
# (config) streaming
Synopsis
Configure global streaming settings as well as settings for each streaming proxy (Windows Media, Real Media, QuickTime,
Flash, Adobe HDS, Apple HLS, and Microsoft Smooth Streaming).
Syntax
# (config) streaming {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) streaming adobe-hds http-handoff {disable | enable}
Disables or enables Adobe HDS handoff. Set to enable in order to control and view statistics on Adobe HTTP Dynamic
Streaming streams.
# (config) streaming apple-hls http-handoff {disable | enable}
Disables or enables Apple HLS handoff. Set to enable in order to control and view statistics on Apple HTTP Live Streaming S
streams
# (config) streaming flash http-handoff {disable | enable}
Disables or enables Flash HTTP handoff.
# (config) streaming max-client-bandwidth kbps
Sets the maximum client bandwidth permitted to the specified kbps.
# (config) streaming max-gateway-bandwidth kbps
Sets the maximum gateway bandwidth permitted to the specified kbps.
# (config) streaming ms-smooth http-handoff {disable | enable}
Disables or enables Microsoft Smooth handoff.
# (config) streaming multicast address-range first_address-last_address
The IP address range for the ProxySG appliance's multicast-station. Default is from 224.2.128.0 and 224.2.255.255.
# (config) streaming multicast port-range first_address-last_address
Port range for the ProxySG appliance's multicast-station. Default is between 32768 and 65535.
# (config) streaming multicast ttl ttl
Time to live value for the multicast-station on the ProxySG appliance, expressed in hops. Default is 5; a valid number is
between 1 and 255.
587 of 604
# (config) streaming no max-client-bandwidth
Clears the current maximum client bandwidth setting.
# (config) streaming no max-gateway-bandwidth
Clears the current maximum gateway bandwidth setting.
# (config) streaming quicktime http-handoff {disable | enable}
Disables or enables QuickTime HTTP handoff.
# (config) streaming quicktime max-client-bandwidth kbps
Sets the maximum connections allowed.
# (config) streaming quicktime max-connections number
Sets the maximum client bandwidth allowed.
# (config) streaming quicktime max-gateway-bandwidth kbps
Sets the maximum gateway bandwidth allowed.
# (config) streaming quicktime no {max-client-bandwidth | max-connections | max-gateway-bandwidth}
Negates QuickTime parameters.
# (config) streaming real-media http-handoff {disable | enable}
Disables or enables Real Media HTTP handoff.
# (config) streaming real-media log-forwarding {disable | enable}
Sets Real Media client log forwarding.
# (config) streaming real-media max-client-bandwidth kbps
Limits the total bandwidth used by all connected clients. Changing the setting to no max-client-bandwidth uses the maximum
available bandwidth. Zero (0) is not an accepted value
# (config) streaming real-media max-connections number
Limits the concurrent number of client connections. Changing the setting to no max-connections uses the maximum available
bandwidth. Zero (0) is not an accepted value.
# (config) streaming real-media max-gateway-bandwidth kbps
Limits the total bandwidth used between the proxy and the gateway. Changing the setting to no max-gateway-bandwidth, uses
the maximum available bandwidth. Zero (0) is not an accepted value.
# (config) streaming real-media multicast {disable | enable}
Disables or enables Real Media client multicast support.
588 of 604
# (config) streaming real-media no {max-client-bandwidth | max-connections | max-gateway-bandwidth |

refresh-interval}
Negates Real Media parameters.
# (config) streaming realrefresh-interval hours
Sets the streaming content refresh interval.
# (config) streaming windows-media asx-hostname name [hostname_or_IP]
Customize a Windows-media Media ASX file hosted on the ProxySG appliance to point to a different IP address or FQDN. If a
host name or IP address isn’t specified, the ASX file is populated with the Management Console IP address. The name is the
name field in the http://appliance_address/MMS/nsc Advanced URL.
# (config) streaming windows-media asx-rewrite number in_addr cache_proto cache_addr [cache_port]
If your environment does not use a Layer 4 switch or WCCP, the ProxySG appliance can operate as a proxy for Windows
Media Player 6.4 clients by rewriting the .asx file (which links Web pages to Windows Media ASF files) to point to the
Windows Media streaming media cache rather than the Windows Media server.
n number can be any positive number. It defines the priority of all the asx-rewrite rules. Smaller numbers indicate higher
priority.
n in_addr specifies the hostname. It can have a maximum of one wildcard character.
n cache_proto rewrites the protocol on the ProxySG appliance and can take any of the following forms:
o mmsu (MMS-UDP)
o mmst (MMS-TCP)
o http (HTTP)
o mms (MMS-UDP or MMS-TCP)
n cache_addr rewrites the address on the ProxySG appliance
# (config) streaming windows-media broadcast-alias alias url loops date time
Enables scheduled live unicast or multicast transmission of video-on-demand content.
n alias must be unique.
n url specifies the address of the video-on-demand stream.
n loops specifies the number of times the stream should be played back. 0 means forever.
n date specifies the broadcast alias starting date. To specify multiple starting dates, enter the date as a comma-
separated string. date can take any of the following formats:
589 of 604
o yyyy-mm-dd
o today
n time specifies the broadcast-alias starting time. To specify multiple starting times within the same date, enter the time
as a comma-separated string. No spaces are permitted. time can take any of the following formats:
o hh:mm
o midnight, 12am, 1am, 2am, 3am, 4am, 5am, 6am, 7am, 8am, 9am, 10am, 11am, noon, 12pm, 1pm, 2pm, 3pm,
4pm, 5pm, 6pm, 7pm, 8pm, 9pm, 10pm, 11pm.
# (config) streaming windows-media http-handoff {disable | enable}
Allows the Windows Media module to control the HTTP port when Windows Media streaming content is present. The default is
enabled.
# (config) streaming windows-media live-retransmit {disable | enable}
Allows the ProxySG appliance to retransmit dropped packets sent through MMS-UDP for unicast. The default is enabled.
# (config) streaming windows-media log-compatibility {disable | enable}
Disables or enables access log compatibility. When log-compatibility is enabled, the ProxySG appliance generates the MMS
log the same way as Windows Media Server does. Three fields are affected when log-compatibility is enabled:
n c-ip x-wm-c-ip (client address derived from client log)
n c-dns x-wm-c-dns (client hostname derived from client log)
n c-uri-stem cs-uri (use full URI instead of just the path)
# (config) streaming windows-media log-forwarding {disable | enable}
Enables or disables forwarding of the client log to the origin media server.
# (config) streaming windows-media max-client-bandwidth kpbs
Sets the maximum client bandwidth permitted to the specified kbps.
# (config) streaming windows-media max-connections number
Limits the concurrent number of client connections. If this variable is set to 0, you effectively lock out all client connections to
the ProxySG appliance. To allow maximum client bandwidth, enter streaming windows-media no max-connections.
# (config) streaming windows-media max-fast-bandwidth kpbs
Sets the maximum fast start bandwidth per player.
# (config) streaming windows-media max-gateway-bandwidth kpbs
590 of 604
Sets the maximum limit, in kilobits per second (Kbps), for the amount of bandwidth Windows Media uses to send requests to
its gateway. If this variable is set to 0, you effectively prevent the ProxySG appliance from initiating any connections to the
gateway. To allow maximum gateway bandwidth, enter streaming windows-media no max-gateway-bandwidth.
# (config) streaming windows-media multicast-alias alias url [preload]
Creates an alias on the ProxySG appliance that reflects the multicast station on the origin content server.
# (config) streaming windows-media multicast-error-correction {disable | enable}
Enables the transmission of forward error correction (FEC) packets from a Windows Media Server to proxied Windows Media
Player clients, when provided. This feature is enabled by default. Disabling the option can lead to a bandwidth gain but may
lead to playback instability on high-latency Internet connections.
# (config) streaming windows-media multicast-station name {alias | url} ip_address port ttl
Enables multicast transmission of Windows Media content from the ProxySG appliance.
n name specifies the name of the alias. It must be unique.
n alias can be a unicast alias, a multicast-alias or a broadcast alias, as well as a URL to a live stream source.
n ip_address is an optional parameter and specifies the multicast station's IP address.
n port specifies the multicast station's port value address.
n ttl specifies the multicast-station's time-to-live value, expressed in hops (and must be a valid number between 1 and
255). The default ttl is 5.
# (config) streaming windows-media no asx-rewrite number
Deletes the ASX rewrite rule associated with number.
# (config) streaming windows-media no broadcast-alias alias
Deletes the broadcast alias rule associated with alias.
# (config) streaming windows-media no max-client-bandwidth
Negates maximum client bandwidth settings.
# (config) streaming windows-media no max-connections
Negates maximum connections settings.
# (config) streaming windows-media no max-gateway-bandwidth
Negates maximum gateway bandwidth settings.
# (config) streaming windows-media no multicast-alias alias
Deletes the multicast alias rule associated with the specified alias.
591 of 604
# (config) streaming windows-media no multicast-station name
Deletes the multicast station rule associated with name.
# (config) streaming windows-media no refresh-interval
Sets the current Windows Media refresh interval to “never refresh.”
# (config) streaming windows-media no server-auth-type cache_ip_address
Clears the authentication type associated with cache_ip_address.
# (config) streaming windows-media no unicast-alias alias
Deletes the unicast alias rule associated with alias. The name of the alias, such as “welcome1” that is created on the ProxySG
appliance and reflects the content specified by the URL. The protocol is specified by the URL if the protocol is mmst, mmsu, or
http. If the protocol is mms, the same protocol as the client is used.
# (config) streaming windows-media refresh-interval hours
Checks the refresh interval for cached streaming content. hours must be a floating point number to specify refresh interval. 0
means always check for freshness.
# (config) streaming windows-media server-auth-type {basic | ntlm} cache_ip_address
Sets the authentication type of the ProxySG appliance indicated by cache_ip_address to BASIC or NTLM.
# (config) streaming windows-media server-thinning {disable | enable}
Disables or enables server thinning.
# (config) streaming windows-media unicast-alias alias url
Creates an alias on the ProxySG appliance that reflects the content specified by the URL. When a client requests the alias
content, the ProxySG appliance uses the URL specified in this command to request the content from the origin streaming
server.
Example
# (config) streaming windows-media http-handoff enable
ok
592 of 604
# (config) tcp-ip
Synopsis
Configure TCP/IP settings, including TCP/IP Space Communications Protocol Specifications (SCPS).
Syntax
# (config) tcp-ip {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) tcp-ip bypass-keep-alive {disable | enable}
Enables or disables keep-alive for bypass connections. Note that this setting does not affect existing connections.
# (config) tcp-ip icmp-bcast-echo {disable | enable}
Enables or disables ICMP broadcast echo responses.
# (config) tcp-ip icmp-tstamp-echo {disable | enable}
Enables or disables ICMP timestamp echo responses.
# (config) tcp-ip ip-forwarding {disable | enable}
Enables or disables IP-forwarding.
# (config) tcp-ip pmtu-discovery {disable | enable}
Enables or disables Path MTU Discovery.
# (config) tcp-ip rfc-1323 {disable | enable}
Enables or disables RFC-1323 support (satellite communications).
# (config) tcp-ip routing-algorithm hashing [both | destination-address | source-address]
Sets the routing algorithm as hashing. Selects the outbound route within the same group based on source and/or destination IP
address. Use the hashing option, for example, when the ProxySG appliance needs to connect to a secure Web server and the
Web server requires the source IP address to remain unchanged during the lifetime of the secure session. Similarly, other
services that use cookies to maintain session concept across multiple connections might also need to use hash base routing.
The default setting is weighted-round-robin.
# (config) tcp-ip routing-algorithm weighted-round-robin
The default setting for the tcp-ip routing-algorithm option is weighted-round-robin. This setting is appropriate for all deployments
except where noted in the hashing above.
# (config) tcp-ip scps {disable | enable}
593 of 604
Enables or disables SCPS-TP protocol.
# (config) tcp-ip scps bandwidth bandwidth_size
Specifies the transmission link bandwidth to be used by the ProxySG appliance for packet metering and window sizing during
SCPS usage. The value is kbps (shown as bits-per-second/1000).
# (config) tcp-ip scps interface adapter:interface[.vlan]
Sets the satellite-facing interface used to communicate with the satellite during a SCPS transmission.
# (config) tcp-ip scps rtt rtt_value
Sets the SCPS link round-trip time. The value is in milliseconds.
# (config) tcp-ip silly-window-avoidance {disable | enable}
Refer to Symantec Support for information on this command.
# (config) tcp-ip tcp-newreno {disable | enable}
Enables or disables TCP NewReno support (improved fast recovery).
# (config) tcp-ip tcp-2msl seconds
Specifies the time_wait value for a TCP connection before completely closing.
# (config) tcp-ip tcp-loss-recovery-mode {aggressive | enhanced | normal}
Helps to recover throughput efficiently after packet losses occur and also addresses performance problems due to a single
packet loss during a large transfer over long delay pipes. The feature is enabled (set to normal) by default.
# (config) tcp-ip window-size window_size
Specifies the TCP window size for satellite communications. The default is 1 MB.
Example
# (config) tcp-ip ip-forwarding enable
ok
# (config) tcp-ip rfc-1323 enable
ok
See Also
n Space Communications Protocol Specifications (SCPS) Deployment Guide
594 of 604
# (config) threat-protection
Synopsis
In SGOS 6.x, these commands were used to configure the built-in threat protection policy invoked when malware scanning
was enabled on the ProxySG appliance.
Issuing this command in the CLI results in the message:
% Malware security policy configuration has moved to the Web Visual Policy Manager.
Starting in SGOS 7.x, configure malware scanning via the Content Security Policy component of Policy Services. For details,
refer to the ProxySG Web Visual Manager Reference and the ProxySG Security Best Practices document at MySymantec.
595 of 604
# (config threat-risk)
Synopsis
Configure the Threat Risk Levels feature.
Syntax
# (config) threat-risk
# (config threat-risk)
Subcommands
# (config threat-risk) disable
Disables the Threat Risk Levels service.
# (config threat-risk) download cancel
# (config threat-risk) download get-now
# (config threat-risk) download get-now background
# (config threat-risk) download password password
Sets the password used during a download from an internal server.
# (config threat-risk) download url URL
Sets the URL to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config threat-risk) download username username
Sets the username to use when downloading from an internal server.
# (config threat-risk) enable
Enables the Threat Risk Levels service.
# (config threat-risk) exit
596 of 604
# (config threat-risk) no download {password | profile | url | username}
# (config threat-risk) service {disable | enable}
Disables or enables the WebPulse service.
# (config threat-risk) service forward none
Disables forwarding requests (when the request does not have a risk level in the database) to WebPulse.
# (config threat-risk) service forward host_or_group_alias
Specifies an existing forwarding host or group alias to use when forwarding requests to WebPulse. You can only use
forwarding if security is disabled. To disable security, use the # (config threat-risk) service secure disable
command.
# (config threat-risk) service mode background
Performs dynamic categorization in the background.
# (config threat-risk) service mode realtime
Performs dynamic categorization in real time.
# (config threat-risk) service mode none
Disables dynamic categorization.
# (config threat-risk) service send-request-info {disable | enable}
Disables or enables sending request statistics to WebPulse.
# (config threat-risk) service send-https-url disable
Disables dynamic categorization for HTTPS requests.
# (config threat-risk) service send-https-url {full | path}
Includes the full URL from HTTPS requests, or sends only the path (excluding query strings).
# (config threat-risk) service send-malware-info {disable | enable}
Disables or enables sending potential malware information to WebPulse.
# (config threat-risk) service socks-gateway none
Do not use SOCKS gateway for the WebPulse protocol.
# (config threat-risk) service socks-gateway gateway_or_group_alias
597 of 604
Specify an existing SOCKS gateway or group alias for the WebPulse protocol.
# (config threat-risk) test-url URL
Display the threat risk level of the specified URL.
# (config threat-risk) view
View current Threat Risk Levels settings and download status.
# (config threat-risk) view risk-levels
Displays supported risk levels, including system-defined levels.
Example
# (config threat-risk) download get-now
downloading database..
Licensed Until: Thu, 17 Oct 2015 00:00:00 UTC
Service: Enabled
Time: Mon, 1 Apr 2019 20:39:49 UTC
Downloading from: https://subscription.es.bluecoat.com/threatrisk/database
% Successfully loaded database.
% Attempting to copy new database
ok
See Also
n "Analyzing the Threat Risk of a URL" in SGOS Administration Guide
598 of 604
# (config) timezone
Synopsis
Set the local time zone on the appliance.
Syntax
# (config) timezone {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) timezone database-path {url | default}
Sets the network path to download the time zone database.
# (config) timezone set area/location
Sets the local time zone. Use # (config) show timezones to display a list of supported time zones in area/location format.
See Also
n "# (config) clock" on page 239
599 of 604
# (config ui)
Synopsis
Configure the user interface settings for the appliance.
Syntax
# (config) ui
# (config ui)
Subcommands
# (config ui) default {advanced | solution}
Sets the default user interface.
# (config ui) exit
# (config ui) no update-path
Clears the user interface download path.
# (config ui) reset
Resets the user interface o the bound system version.
# (config ui) update-path url
Sets the user interface download path.
Example
# (config) ui
# (config ui) default advanced
ok
600 of 604
# (config) upgrade-path
Synopsis
Specify the network path to download system software.
Syntax
# (config) upgrade-path {subcommand}
Note: Command strings that include the special character “?” must be quoted. For example,
the following command will result in an error:
# (config) upgrade-path https://example.com/cgi-bin/download?rid=3399924431
To execute the command correctly, enclose the string in quotes as shown:
# (config) upgrade-path "https://example.com/cgi-bin/download?rid=3399924431"
Subcommands
# (config) upgrade-path url
Specifies the network path to use to download ProxySG system software. The image name must be included in the network
path.
Example
# (config) upgrade-path http://your_server/image_file
ok
601 of 604
# (config) virtual-ip
Synopsis
Configure the virtual IP addresses on the appliance.
Syntax
# (config) virtual-ip {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) virtual-ip address ip_address
Specifies the virtual IP to add.
# (config) virtual-ip clear
Removes all virtual IP addresses.
# (config) virtual-ip no address ip_address
Removes the specified virtual IP from the list.
Example
# (config) virtual-ip address 192.200.0.55
ok
602 of 604
# (config) wccp
Synopsis
The ProxySG appliance can be configured to participate in a WCCP (Web Cache Control Protocol) scheme, where a WCCP-
capable router collaborates with a set of WCCP-configured ProxySG appliance to service requests. WCCP is a Cisco-
developed protocol. For more information about WCCP, refer to the SGOS Administration Guide and the WCCP Deployment
Guide.
After you have created the WCCP configuration file, place the file on an HTTP server so it can be downloaded to the ProxySG
appliance. To download the WCCP configuration to the ProxySG appliance, use "# (config) load" on page 350.
Syntax
# (config) wccp {subcommand}
Subcommands
# (config) wccp {disable | enable}
Disables or enables WCCP.
# (config) wccp no path
Negates certain WCCP settings.
# (config) wccp path url
Specifies the network path from which to download WCCP settings.
Example
# (config) wccp path 10.25.36.47/files/wccp.txt
ok
See Also
n "WCCP Configuration in SGOS Administration Guide
603 of 604
# (config webex)
Synopsis
Enable/disable HTTP-handoff to the WebEx proxy, which can deny or allow desktop and file sharing The ProxySGappliance
can be configured to control desktop application and file sharing within a WebEx session. The appliance must be setup with an
active, licensed Symantec WebFilter database. SSL interception is required. For more information about the WebEx proxy,
refer to the SGOS Administration Guide.
Syntax
# (config) webex
# (config webex)
Subcommands
# (config webex) http-handoff enable
Performs the HTTP hand-off to the WebEx proxy
# (config webex) http-handoff disable
Disables the HTTP hand-off to the WebEx proxy; WebEx traffic will be handled by the HTTP proxy
# (config webex) view configuration
Displays the WebEx configuration
# (config webex) view statistics
Displays the WebEx proxy statistics
Example
# (config webex) view configuration
WebEx configuration:
HTTP handoff: Enabled
See Also
n "Configuring the WebEx Proxy" in SGOS Administration Guide
604 of 604

Cli 72 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cli 72 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cli 72 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ProxySG Command Line

Copyright © 2020 Broadcom. All Rights Reserved.

Tuesday, January 21, 2020

About the ProxySG Command Line Interface Reference

This document describes each of the commands available in the CLI.

About the Command Line Interface

fixed-width font Command line text, Content Policy Language (CPL).

fixed-width font, Literal string to be entered as shown.

{ } One of the parameters enclosed within the braces must be supplied.

[ ] Optional parameter or parameters.

SSH and Script Considerations

The preceding can be shortened to:

Standard and Privileged Modes

n Standard mode prompt: >

n Privileged mode prompt: #

n Configure privileged mode prompt: # (config)

Accessing Quick Command Line Help

To access a comprehensive list of mode-specific commands, type help or ? at the prompt.

The ? command displays the available commands. For example:

Special Characters in Command Strings

# (config) upgrade-path https://example.com/cgi-bin/download?rid=3399924431

To execute the command correctly, enclose the string in quotes:

# (config) upgrade-path "https://example.com/cgi-bin/download?rid=3399924431"

The “!” Character

# licensing register-hardware user1 !password

Escape the “!” with a backslash character (“\”) such as:

# licensing register-hardware user1 \!password

# licensing register-hardware user1

Additional SGOS Documentation

Standard Mode Commands

The standard mode prompt is a greater-than sign (>):

Press "enter" three times to activate the serial console.

This command is used for general HTTP connectivity testing.

Note: conf t is a shortcut to typing configure terminal.

n "# disable" on page 66

n "# (config) security hashed-password" on page 464

n "# (config) security password" on page 494

n "# (config) security username" on page 532

Displays accelerated PAC file information.

"> show access-log" on page 25

Displays the current access log settings.

> show advanced-url

Displays the advanced URL for statistics.

> show appliance-identifier

> show appliance-name

Displays the name of the appliance.

> show application-attributes

> show application-classification

> show application-protection

> show arp-table

Displays TCP/IP ARP table information.

> show bandwidth-gain

"> show bandwidth-management" on page 29

Displays bandwidth management configuration and statistics information.

"> show bridge" on page 30

Displays information about bridging on the system.

> show cachepulse

> show caching

"> show cifs" on page 31